JP7511282B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Conventional gaming machines typically determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information acquired when the start conditions are met, and then execute a variable presentation according to the result of that determination.

In these types of gaming machines, various effects are used in the variable effects to increase the excitement of the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-033816 A

However, the gaming machines described in the above patent documents have room for improvement in the variable presentation, making the game less interesting.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the present invention, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine includes an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) operable by a player, a first acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (entry of a gaming ball into a first starting hole), a second acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (entry of a gaming ball into a second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging the judgment information, a pre- judgment means (main control board 110) for pre-judging the judgment information before the judgment means, and a specific gaming state (probability change gaming state) that is more advantageous to a player than a predetermined gaming state (normal gaming state). The present invention is equipped with a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the state of the game machine to a special state (a time-saving game state, a time-saving game state), and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing a game presentation (variable presentation) according to a judgment result of the judgment means, the operation means including a first operation means (presentation button 17) and a second operation means (presentation lever) different from the first operation means, the presentation control means being capable of executing vibration presentations (pre-reading vibration presentations, vibration presentations at the time of a dialogue notice presentation, at the time of a cut-in presentation, at the time of a successful decision presentation , at the time of a pattern alignment, at the time of a c pattern alignment, at the time of a confirmation presentation, etc.) that vibrates the first operation means during the execution of the game presentation, and a suggestion presentation (pattern alignment, c pattern alignment, confirmation presentation, etc.) that suggests the execution of the special game , and when the vibration presentation is executed during the operation of the second operation means, When the vibration related to the vibration effect is transmitted to the player via the second operating means, the vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect) executed at a predetermined timing, and a second vibration effect (vibration effect when symbols are lined up, when c symbols are lined up, when a confirmation effect is generated , etc.) executed at a timing different from the first vibration effect, the first vibration effect can be executed according to the result of the advance determination, the second vibration effect can be executed according to the result of the determination, the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed in the game performance such that their performance periods do not overlap, and the game performance corresponding to the determination result of the determination information acquired based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition is executed in the predetermined game state. the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect are executable, and when the game effect corresponding to the determination result of the determination information acquired based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition is executed in the specific game state, execution of the first vibration effect is restricted but the second vibration effect is executable, the ease of execution of the first vibration effect differs between the predetermined game state and the specific game state, the length of the vibration period in the first vibration effect and the length of the vibration period in the second vibration effect can be made different, and the second vibration effect is not executed in the game effect in which the special game is not executed, but is executable when the suggestion effect is executed in the game effect in which the special game is executed .

The present invention makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of games.

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a front view of the gaming machine. FIG. 4 is a rear view showing the state in which each unit is assembled to the base frame. FIG. 3 is a partially exploded perspective view of FIG. 2 . 1 is a diagram showing a main board case of the present embodiment when a main control board is stored in the main board case. FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view including a base of the main board case. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the structure of a main control board. 13 is a front view of the main board case when the main control board is stored. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a block diagram of the entire gaming machine. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a big win determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol determination table. A figure showing an example of a special chart variation pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pre-determination table. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing main processing in a main control board. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing input control processing in the main control board. A diagram showing the first starting hole detection switch input processing on the main control board. A diagram showing the special diagram special electric control processing on the main control board. A diagram showing the special pattern memory determination process in the main control board. A diagram showing the main processing in the performance control unit. A diagram showing timer interrupt processing in the performance control unit. A diagram showing customer waiting performance processing in the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a demonstration waiting time determination table. A diagram showing a look-ahead type performance processing in the performance control unit. A diagram showing the icon change performance decision process in the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an icon final display mode determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a change scenario determination table. A diagram showing the icon change performance execution process in the performance control unit. A figure showing an example of a change pattern determination table for the hold icon. 13A is a diagram showing an example of a one-stage change pattern determination table for the icon, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of a two-stage change pattern determination table for the icon. A diagram showing the continuous preview performance decision process in the performance control unit. A figure showing an example of a continuous preview type determination table for presentation modes A to C (normal game play state). A figure showing an example of a continuous preview type determination table for presentation modes D to G (specific game play states). A figure showing an example of a continuous preview presentation scenario determination table for presentation modes A to C (normal game play state). A figure showing an example of a continuous preview presentation scenario determination table for presentation modes D to G (specific game play states). A diagram showing the continuous preview performance execution processing in the performance control unit. A diagram showing the lamp change performance execution process in the performance control unit. A diagram showing the variable performance pattern determination process in the performance control unit. A figure showing an example of a variable presentation pattern determination table for presentation modes A to C (normal game state). A figure showing an example of a variable presentation pattern determination table for presentation modes D to G (specific game states). A diagram showing the timer performance decision process in the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of an event timer count determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a suggestion event determination table for a single timer. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a first suggestion event determination table for a two-time timer, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a second suggestion event determination table for a two-time timer. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of an update pattern determination table. A diagram showing the jackpot preview performance decision process in the performance control unit. A figure showing an example of a pre-reach notice determination table for presentation modes A to C (normal game play state). A figure showing an example of a pre-reach notice determination table for presentation modes D to G (specific game states). FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a dialogue preview pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a step-up notice pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table. A figure showing an example of a development effect pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a roulette notice determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a stop option determination table for roulette prediction. A figure showing an example of a cut-in presentation pattern determination table for presentation modes A to C (normal game state). A figure showing an example of a cut-in presentation pattern determination table for presentation modes D to G (specific game states). FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a deciding effect pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a re-lottery effect pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a confirmed effect pattern determination table. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a main process in a central control unit. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing specific examples of when the operating unit is operated while waiting for customers. This is a timing chart showing when the variable performance starts from the waiting state for customers. This is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which a variable performance starts from a waiting state for customers. This shows the continuation of the example presentation in which the variable presentation begins from a waiting state for customers. This is a timing chart showing the increase in the number of reserved balls during a variable performance. A figure showing an example of a presentation in which the number of reserved balls increases during a variable presentation. This is a timing chart showing the number of reserved items increasing immediately after decreasing. This figure shows an example of a presentation in which the number of reserved items increases immediately after decreasing. This is a timing chart showing the increase in the number of reserved balls during a specific reach performance. A figure showing an example of a presentation in which the number of reserved balls increases during a specific reach presentation. This is a timing chart showing the increase and decrease in the number of reserved balls before and after the end of a specific game state. A figure showing an example of a presentation in which the number of reserved balls increases or decreases before and after the end of a specific game state. This figure shows the continuation of the example presentation in which the number of reserved balls increases or decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state. A figure showing an example of a presentation when a player changes a presentation element during the first variable presentation in a specific game state. A figure showing an example of a presentation when a player changes a presentation element during a second variable presentation in a specific game state. A figure showing an example of a performance when a pre-reading action performance and a step-up preview performance are executed. A figure showing the continuation of the example presentation when a pre-reading action presentation and a step-up preview presentation are executed. A figure showing an example of a performance when a pre-reading vibration performance and a dialogue preview performance are executed. A figure showing the continuation of the example of the performance when a pre-reading vibration performance and a dialogue preview performance are executed. This is a timing chart when a timer effect is executed during a variable effect. A figure showing an example of a presentation in which a timer presentation is executed during a variable presentation. A figure showing an example of a presentation in which a roulette preview and a pseudo consecutive presentation are executed before a reach presentation. A figure showing an example of a presentation in which a pseudo consecutive presentation is executed after a reach presentation. A figure showing an example of a presentation when a development presentation is executed and an SP reach presentation is executed. A figure showing an example of a presentation when a development presentation is executed and an SPSP reach presentation is executed. A figure showing an example of a presentation in which a cut-in presentation is executed during an SP reach presentation, resulting in a jackpot. This figure shows the continuation of the example presentation when a cut-in presentation is executed during a SP reach presentation, resulting in a jackpot. This figure shows example 1 of a presentation in which a deciding performance is executed during an SPSP reach performance, resulting in a jackpot. This figure shows a continuation of presentation example 1 when a deciding presentation is executed during the SPSP reach presentation, resulting in a jackpot. This figure shows example 2 of a presentation in which a deciding effect is executed during an SPSP reach effect, resulting in a jackpot. This figure shows the continuation of presentation example 2 when a deciding presentation is executed during the SPSP reach presentation, resulting in a jackpot. A figure showing an example of a presentation when a special SP reach presentation is executed in presentation mode A (normal game state) resulting in a jackpot. This figure shows an example of a presentation when a special SP reach presentation is executed in presentation mode G (specific game state) resulting in a jackpot. A figure showing an example of a performance when a special mission performance is executed during a jackpot. A figure showing an example of a presentation when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and then resumed while the icon change presentation and lamp change presentation are being executed. This figure shows the continuation of the example presentation when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and then resumed while the icon change presentation and lamp change presentation are being executed. This figure shows examples of presentations when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and then resumed while a look-ahead effect presentation, a pending icon change presentation, and a lamp change presentation are being executed. This figure shows the continuation of the example presentation when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and then resumed while the look-ahead effect presentation, the pending icon change presentation, and the lamp change presentation are being executed. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a front view of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a finishing effect pattern determination table in the second embodiment.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 1. Fig. 1 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment.

The gaming machine 1 is provided with an outer frame 2, a gaming board mounting frame 3 that is rotatably supported relative to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 that is rotatably supported relative to the gaming board mounting frame 3, and a gaming board 5 that has a gaming area 5a formed therein through which gaming balls flow.

The outer frame 2 is made up of a rectangular base frame 2a with a central opening in the front-rear direction, to which a decorative plate 2b is attached at the lower front. The outer frame 2 is fixed to the island equipment of the amusement arcade via fastening members (e.g., nails, fasteners, etc.).

The game board mounting frame 3 has a mounting section (not shown) for mounting the game board 5 from the front, is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via a first hinge mechanism section 6 at one horizontal end, and is supported rotatably with the first hinge mechanism section 6 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated like a door relative to the outer frame 2, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed to the front, making it possible to perform maintenance on various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the front side of the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism 7 at one horizontal end so as to cover the front of the mounting portion of the game board mounting frame 3, and is supported rotatably with the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated like a door relative to the game board mounting frame 3, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) that opens in the front-to-rear direction is formed in the approximate center near the top of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or acrylic plate) is attached to cover the opening 8 from the rear, making it possible to see the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 attached to the mounting portion of the playing board mounting frame 3 through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, there are provided an audio output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having multiple decorative lamps (LEDs), an upper tray 11 for storing multiple game balls such as those paid out from the payout device 100 described below, a lower tray 12 for receiving and storing game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and flow into the overflow ball flow path described below, and a launch operation device 13 for launching the game balls.

The audio output devices 9 are provided at two locations spaced apart on the top of the glass frame 4, and are designed to output background music (BGM), sound effects (SE), etc. to create a sound (music, voice) effect. A number of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and lighting effects are created by changing the direction of light irradiation and the color of light emitted by each lamp (LED). The frame lighting devices 10 are also equipped with an alarm LED 10a that is controlled to light up/blink when the glass frame 4 opens or a dispensing abnormality, which will be described later, occurs.

The bottom surface of the storage section 11a of the upper tray 11 for the game balls slopes downward toward the direction (right direction) of the launch operation device 13, and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward slope. When the game balls stored in the storage section 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the ball feed solenoid 11b operates to send the game balls out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3.

In addition, in the central front part of the upper tray 11, a performance button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see Figure 1) are arranged side by side and function as input devices for performing decision operations and selection operations related to various performances described below.

The effect button device 16 is provided with an effect button 17 (not shown) that can be used to perform operations such as decision operations (operation input), an effect button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 9) that detects operations on the effect button 17, and a button drive device 17b (see FIG. 9) for driving the effect button 17, allowing the player to input specific information into the gaming machine 1.

The performance button 17 can perform a performance light emission by lighting the performance button LED (full color), which is part of the frame lighting device 10 (see FIG. 9), in a predetermined light emission pattern (e.g., white, red, rainbow). In addition, the driving force of the button drive motor, which is part of the button drive device 17b, can move the button 17 up and down between a standby position (origin position) located below and a performance position located above, and the button position detection sensor (not shown) detects that the button 17 is in the origin position. Furthermore, the driving force of the button vibration motor, which is part of the button drive device 17b, can vibrate in a predetermined vibration pattern to perform a performance action, and the performance button 17 can be operated even when the button vibration motor is vibrating.

The selection button device 18 is provided with a cross key 19 (not shown) that can be used to perform operations such as selection, and a cross key detection switch 19a (see FIG. 9) that is connected to the cross key 19 and detects operations on the cross key 19, allowing the player to input specified information into the gaming machine 1.

In addition, a lending operation unit 20 is provided on the right side of the upper tray 11, which allows the lending of game balls and the return of storage media such as cards that store the remaining balance. When the lending button on the lending operation unit 20 is operated, a ball lending machine (not shown) attached to the gaming machine 1 subtracts the remaining balance stored in the storage media and lends out game balls, and when the return button on the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the storage media is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

Between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12, an overflow ball flow path (not shown) is formed to receive game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and guide them to the lower tray 12. In addition, a tray full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 9) is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path to detect when the lower tray 12 is full of game balls, and while the tray full detection switch 32a detects that the lower tray 12 is full, the payout device 100 (described later) stops paying out game balls.

The launch operation device 13 is provided with a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a launch handle 15 rotatably mounted on the base 14, a touch sensor 15a (see FIG. 9) that detects whether the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, a launch volume 15b (see FIG. 9) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the launch handle 15, and multiple handle LEDs (frame lighting device 10) for illuminating the launch handle 15 in a predetermined manner. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, the ball feed solenoid 11b is activated and the game balls are sent out one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 is provided with a game board mounting section 25 for mounting the game board 5, a launching device 26 for launching game balls toward the game area 5a, a locking mechanism 27 for locking the game board mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 in a closed state, and an opening detection switch 31a for detecting the opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4.

The game board mounting section 25 is formed in a recessed chamber shape that opens to the front at approximately the center near the top of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. At the back of the recessed chamber of the game board mounting section 25, an opening that opens in the front-to-rear direction is provided, and through this opening, various devices and the like provided on the back side of the game board 5 face the rear of the gaming machine 1.

The launching device 26 is provided with a launching member 28 for launching the game ball, a launching solenoid 28b (see FIG. 9) for driving the launching member 28, a launching rail 29 that slopes upward from the launching member 28 toward the lower left end of the game board, and a stopper 30 that stops the game ball A at the launch position, which is the lower end of the slope of the launching rail 29. Then, when the game ball sent out by the ball feed solenoid 11b is received at the launch position, the game ball A is launched toward the game area 5a by the operation of the launching member 28.

The locking mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting part 25, and the front end of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed on the front side of the glass frame 4. When a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the game board mounting frame 3 is unlocked and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

At a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, there are provided a curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 located on the outside of the inner rail 35, and a guide member 37 that guides the game balls toward the center of the game area 5a. Between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36, there is formed a launched ball guide path 38 that guides the game balls launched by the launching device 26 to the upstream part of the game area 5a. In addition, at the most downstream part of the game area 5a, there is formed an outlet 39 for guiding the game balls that have flowed down outside the game area (the collection part of the game board mounting frame 3).

A decorative frame 40, which is a frame that restricts the entry of game balls into the interior, known as a center case, is provided in the approximate center of the play area 5a, and a presentation space 40a is formed inside the decorative frame 40. A warp device 41 is provided on the side of the decorative frame 40 to guide game balls flowing down the play area 5a into the decorative frame 40, and a stage section 42 is provided at the bottom of the decorative frame 40 to roll the game balls introduced into the decorative frame 40 by the warp device 41 and cause them to flow down below the decorative frame 40.

At the bottom of the game area 5a, there are multiple (four in this embodiment) general winning openings 43 spaced apart, through which game balls can always enter (be entered). When a game ball that has entered (been entered) one of the general winning openings 43 is detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a (see Figure 9), a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 100 (not shown) to the upper tray 11.

On both sides (left and right areas) of the game area 5a, there are provided normal gates 44 (normal start areas) through which the game ball can pass. When a game ball that has passed through the normal gates 44 is detected by the gate detection switch 44a (see FIG. 9), a winning lottery for a normal symbol (auxiliary game determination) is held. The winning lottery for a normal symbol will be described later.

At the bottom of the game area 5a, directly below the stage section 42, there is a first start hole 45 (special symbol start area) where game balls can always enter (enter), and when a game ball that has entered (entered) this first start hole 45 is detected by the first start hole detection switch 45a (see FIG. 9), a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., three balls) are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 100 to the upper tray 11. In addition to paying out prize balls, a jackpot determination (special game determination) of the first special symbol (identification information) described below is made.

Below the first starting hole 45, there is a variable starting section 46 that changes from a closed state (basic mode) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter (slot) to an open state (special mode) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter (slot) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning the lottery for a normal pattern).

The variable start section 46 is provided with a second start hole 47 (special chart start area) through which the game ball can enter (enter), a second start hole detection switch 47a (see FIG. 9) that detects the entry (entry) of the game ball into the second start hole 47, a movable member 48 that converts (varies) the second start hole 47 between a closed state and an open state, and a second start hole opening/closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 9) that converts the movable member 48 between an open state and an closed state. When the second start hole 47 is in a closed state, it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter, and when the second start hole 47 is in an open state, it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter (enter).

When a game ball that has entered the second start hole 47 is detected by the second start hole detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., three balls) are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 100 to the upper tray 11. In addition to paying out the prize balls, a jackpot determination (special game determination) of the second special symbol (identification information) described below is made.

Between the first starting hole 45 and the variable starting section 46, a winning hole lamp NR (not shown) is provided to illuminate the first starting hole 45 and the area around the variable starting section 46 in a predetermined manner, and a lighting effect can be created by illuminating the board lighting device 76, which has multiple lamps (full-color LEDs, etc.).

Above the guide member 37 and downstream of the right-side normal gate 44, there is a variable winning section 49 that is converted from a closed state (basic mode) in which the game ball cannot win (enter) to an open state (special mode) in which the game ball can win (enter) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning the jackpot judgment for a special pattern).

The variable winning section 49 is provided with a large winning opening 50 through which the game ball can win (enter), a large winning opening detection switch 50a (see FIG. 9) for detecting the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening 50, an opening/closing member 51 for converting (variable) the large winning opening 50 between a closed state and an open state, and a large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b for converting the opening/closing member 51 between open and closed. When the large winning opening 50 is in a closed state, it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win, and when the large winning opening 50 is in an open state, it is possible or easy for the game ball to win (enter).

In addition, when a game ball that has entered the large prize opening 50 is detected by the large prize opening detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are paid out from the payout device 100 to the upper tray 11 as prize balls.

On the back side of the game board 5, there is an out-ball flow path that receives and collects game balls that have entered the general prize opening 43, the first start opening 45, the second start opening 47, and the large prize opening 50 and are detected by the general prize opening detection switch 43a, the first start opening detection switch 45a, the second start opening detection switch 47a, and the large prize opening detection switch 50a, as well as game balls that have flowed into the outlet 39, and allows them to flow down, and an out-ball detection switch 52a is provided at the most downstream part of the out-ball flow path. Game balls that flow down this out-ball flow path and are detected by the out-ball detection switch 52a are discharged from the outlet on the back side of the game machine 1 to the outside of the game machine 1 (island equipment).

Outside the play area 5a, there is a main information display device 59 consisting of a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, a normal symbol display 62, a first special symbol reserved display 63, a second special symbol reserved display 64, and a normal symbol reserved display 65, a round number display 66 (see FIG. 9) that displays the number of rounds when a jackpot game (special game mode) described later is executed, a right-hand hit display 67 (see FIG. 9) that prompts the player to shoot the game ball toward the right area of the play area 5a during a jackpot game (special game) or a time-saving game state, and a status confirmation display 68 (see FIG. 9) that shows that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode described later is set.

A winning probability display sticker (not shown) is attached near the main information display device 59. The winning probability display sticker has the winning probability of the jackpot of the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment (1/285 to 1/300) and the set value (4 to 1) printed on it. Note that the location of the winning probability display sticker is just one example, and is not limited to the vicinity of the main information display device 59, but may be on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1.

The first special symbol display 60 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of the jackpot determination for the first special symbol, which is performed on the condition that the gaming ball enters (sinks) the first starting hole 45, the second special symbol display 61 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of the jackpot determination for the second special symbol, which is performed on the condition that the gaming ball enters (sinks) the second starting hole 47, and the normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of the winning lottery for the normal symbol, which is performed on the condition that the gaming ball enters (sinks) the normal gate 44.

The jackpot determination for the first special symbol corresponds to obtaining a random number value for jackpot determination (first special symbol determination information) when the gaming ball enters (enters) the first starting hole 45, and determining whether or not there is a "jackpot" by comparing the obtained random number value for jackpot determination with the jackpot determination value. When a jackpot determination for the first special symbol is made, the first special symbol is displayed in a varying manner on the first special symbol display 60, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the first special symbol, which indicates the lottery result, is displayed stationarily. In other words, the stationary display of the first special symbol serves as an announcement of the lottery result.

The jackpot determination for the second special symbol corresponds to obtaining a random number value for jackpot determination (second special symbol determination information) when the game ball enters (enters) the second starting hole 47, and determining whether or not there is a "jackpot" by comparing the obtained random number value for jackpot determination with the jackpot determination value. When a jackpot determination for the second special symbol is made, the second special symbol is displayed in a varying manner on the second special symbol display 61, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the second special symbol, which indicates the lottery result, is displayed stationarily. In other words, the stationary display of the second special symbol serves as an announcement of the lottery result.

The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are each composed of multiple LEDs, and when each special symbol changes, the LEDs of the corresponding display blink at a predetermined interval or sequence. When a special symbol is displayed stationary, the LEDs light up in a manner that indicates the result of each jackpot determination (jackpot, miss).

In this embodiment, a "jackpot" refers to a state in which the right to play a jackpot game (special game) is acquired in a jackpot judgment (special game judgment) of the first special symbol or a jackpot judgment (special game judgment) of the second special symbol. A "jackpot game" refers to a game state in which a round game in which the big prize opening 50 is opened in a predetermined manner is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or 15 times).

The maximum number of times the jackpot opening 50 can be opened and the maximum opening time for each round of play are preset, but if a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., nine balls) enter the jackpot opening 50 even before the maximum number of times or maximum opening time is reached, one round of play ends. In other words, the "jackpot game (special game)" is a game state that is advantageous for players who are more likely to win prize balls. In this embodiment, it is possible to generate one of several types of jackpot games that differ in the degree of advantage they offer to the player, which will be described in more detail below.

The winning lottery for the normal symbol corresponds to obtaining a random number value for winning judgment when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44, and comparing the obtained random number value for winning judgment with the winning judgment value to determine whether or not there is a "win". When the winning lottery for the normal symbol is performed, the normal symbol is displayed in a varying manner on the normal symbol display 62, and after a predetermined time has passed, the normal symbol is displayed stationarily to indicate the lottery result. In other words, the stationary display of the normal symbol serves as a notification of the lottery result.

The normal symbol display 62 is composed of one or more LEDs, and the LEDs flash at a predetermined interval or sequence when displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner. When displaying a normal symbol in a static manner, the LEDs light up in a manner that indicates the result of the winning lottery (a winning state or a losing state).

In this embodiment, "win" refers to a state in which the right to play a win state (auxiliary game) is acquired in a winning lottery for a normal symbol. "Winning game (auxiliary game)" refers to a game state in which the second starting hole 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

The maximum number of times the second start hole 47 can be opened and the maximum opening time during a winning game (auxiliary game) are preset, but if a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., nine balls) enter the second start hole 47 even before the maximum number of times or maximum opening time is reached, the winning game (auxiliary game) ends. In other words, the "winning game (auxiliary game)" is a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed (the conditions for starting the variable display are likely to be met). In this embodiment, multiple types of winning games (auxiliary games) with different degrees of advantage to the player are provided, which will be described in detail later.

The first special symbol reserved indicator 63 is composed of multiple LEDs, and is intended to display the number of rights (first reserved memories) to make a jackpot determination for the first special symbol (display of the variation of the first special symbol) that is stored when a game ball enters (enters) the first starting hole 45, and lights up or flashes in a manner that indicates the number of first reserved memories. Note that up to four first reserved memories can be stored, but the number may be more or less than four.

The second special symbol reserved indicator 64 is composed of multiple LEDs, and is intended to display the number of rights (second reserved memories) to make a jackpot determination for the second special symbol (display of the variation of the second special symbol) that is stored when the game ball enters (enters) the second starting hole 47, and lights up or flashes in a manner that indicates the number of second reserved memories. Note that up to four second reserved memories can be stored, but the number may be more or less than four.

The normal symbol reserved indicator 65 is composed of multiple LEDs, and is intended to display the number of rights (normal symbol reserved memories) to hold a winning lottery for a normal symbol (variable display of normal symbols) that are stored when a game ball enters (passes) the normal symbol gate 44, and lights up or flashes in a manner that indicates the number of normal symbol reserved memories. Note that up to four normal symbol reserved memories can be stored, but the number may be more or less than four.

The first special symbol display 60 and/or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured with a seven-segment LED. For example, if the special symbol wins the jackpot, a static "7" is displayed, and if it is a miss, a static "-" is displayed, with the light going off and the "-" alternating during the variable display. Before the variable display of the special symbol begins, the stopped result of the previous variable display is displayed by the LED being lit, so by starting with the LED being turned off when the variable display begins, it becomes easier to know that the variable display has started.

The round number indicator 66 is composed of multiple LEDs and is intended to display the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) occurs. When a jackpot game starts, the LEDs start to light up in a predetermined manner indicating the number of rounds, the LEDs continue to light up during the jackpot game, and when the jackpot game ends, the LEDs are turned off. For example, if the jackpot game has two rounds, only the fourth LED from the left lights up, and if the jackpot game has sixteen rounds, all LEDs light up.

The right-hit indicator 67 is composed of one LED, and is used to display a right-hit display that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right-side game area (so-called right hit) during a jackpot state (special game state) and during a time-limited game state, and the LED lights up during the jackpot state (special game state) and during the time-limited game state.

The status confirmation indicator 68 is composed of a single LED and is intended to indicate that the setting change mode, which will be described later, or the setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set. When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is entered, the LED starts to light up, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended, the LED goes out. In this way, the status confirmation indicator 68, which indicates that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, is provided on the front (surface) of the gaming machine, making it easy to check whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set.

Note that the installation location of the status check indicator 68 is just an example, and is not limited to the installation location in this embodiment, but may be on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, in this embodiment, the same display mode (illuminated display) is displayed regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but the display may be made so that it is possible to recognize which mode it is set to. For example, when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation indicator 68 may be illuminated, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status confirmation indicator 68 may be flashed, or when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation indicator 68 and one of the indicators of the second game information display device 69 may be illuminated, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, only the status confirmation indicator 68 may be illuminated.

In addition, in this embodiment, a status confirmation indicator 68 is provided as a dedicated indicator to indicate that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set, but it may be used in combination with another indicator. For example, in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, the main information display device 59 and the second game information display device 69 described below are turned off, so these displays may be used. Specifically, one LED of the display of either the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on, or all LEDs of the main information display device 59 and the second game information display device 69 may be turned on.

At the bottom right inside the play area 5a, there is provided a sub information display device 80 consisting of a sub first change indicator 81, a sub second change indicator 82, a sub first hold indicator 83, a sub second hold indicator 84, a sub normal map change indicator 85, a sub normal map hold indicator 86, and a sub right hit indicator 87 that prompts the player to shoot the game ball toward the right area of the play area 5a (so-called right hit). Note that the sub information display device 80 does not have an indicator such as the above-mentioned status confirmation indicator 68 that indicates that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode described below is set.

The sub-first variable indicator 81 is for displaying (informing) the result of the jackpot determination for the first special symbol, and the sub-second variable indicator 82 is for displaying (informing) the result of the jackpot determination for the second special symbol, and each is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of the corresponding special symbol starts, the LED blinks at a predetermined interval (the first lamp symbol LZ or the second lamp symbol LZ is displayed variable), and when the corresponding special symbol is displayed stationary, the result of the jackpot determination (lights up in the case of a jackpot, goes out in the case of a miss) is displayed stationary.

In addition, the sub-first change display 81 and the sub-second change display 82 may be configured to flash while the special pattern is being displayed and to light up or go out when the special pattern is displayed as stopped, so that it is possible to know whether or not the special pattern is being displayed as changed.

The sub-first hold indicator 83 is for displaying the number of first hold memories (hold number), and the sub-second hold indicator 84 is for displaying the number of second hold memories (hold number), and each is composed of two LEDs, one on the left and one on the right. When the hold number is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the hold number is "1", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned off, when the hold number is "2", the left LED is blinking and the right LED is turned on when the hold number is "3", and when the hold number is "4", the left and right LEDs are blinking.

The sub-regular symbol variation display 85 is for displaying (informing) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variation display of the regular symbol starts, the LED blinks (varies) at a specified interval. Then, when the regular symbol is displayed in a static state, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights up in the case of a win, and goes out in the case of a loss) is displayed in a static state.

In addition, the sub-regular pattern change indicator 85 may be configured to flash while displaying the normal pattern change, and to light up or go out when the normal pattern is displayed as stopped, so that it is possible to know whether or not the normal pattern change is being displayed.

The sub-regular map reservation indicator 86 is used to display the number of reserved regular map memories (reserved number), and is composed of two LEDs lined up on the left and right. When the reserved regular map number is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the reserved regular map number is "1", the left LED is lit and the right LED is turned off, when the reserved regular map number is "2", the left LED flashes and the right LED is lit, and when the reserved regular map number is "4", the left and right LEDs flash.

A first image display device 70 (main LCD) consisting of a liquid crystal display is provided at the back of the performance space 40a, a second image display device 71 (sub LCD) consisting of a liquid crystal display with a smaller display area than the first image display device 70 (main LCD) is provided at the bottom of the performance space 40a and in front of the first image display device 70 (main LCD), a first movable member 73 modeled after a character's face is provided at the top of the performance space 40a, and a circular second movable member 74 is provided at the right part of the performance space 40a.

The image display device consisting of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) displays various effects according to the progress of the game. The effects include a customer waiting demo effect that is executed during a customer waiting state (a waiting state where the game is not progressing) in which the special symbol changing display is not being performed, and a changing effect that accompanies the changing display of the special symbol 70a that is executed during the changing display of the special symbol.

The display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) has three columns of variable display areas, a left area, a central area, and a right area, and the variable display of the performance pattern 70a is performed by scrolling the performance pattern 70a displayed in each variable display area vertically (from top to bottom in this embodiment). In addition, a special pattern display area is formed in the lower right corner of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), and the variable display of the special pattern TZ is performed by scrolling the special pattern TZ displayed in the special pattern display area vertically (from top to bottom in this embodiment) in response to the variable display of the special pattern.

The performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are composed of patterns showing numbers from "1" to "9", for example, and the display of the change in the performance pattern 70a is performed in response (synchronization) to the display of the change in the special pattern executed by the first special pattern display device 60 and the second special pattern display device 61. That is, the display of the change in the performance pattern 70a starts in response to the start of the display of the change in the special pattern, the display of the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped (oscillating display) before the display of the change in the special pattern stops, and the display of the change in the performance pattern 70a is stopped (static display) in response to the stop display of the display of the change in the special pattern. In addition to the patterns showing numbers, the performance pattern 70a may be provided with patterns showing the alphabet such as "A" to "F".

Note that a "temporary stop display" refers to a state in which the performance pattern 70a fluctuates slightly or changes shape slightly, making it appear to the player that the performance pattern 70a is stopped (but is not completely stopped).

When the performance symbol 70a is displayed in a stopped state, the performance symbol 70a stops for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) in a predetermined state (miss state, jackpot state, etc.) that indicates the result of the jackpot determination. A jackpot state (special result state) is a combination of the same performance symbols such as "777" or a combination of performance symbols with a pattern such as "357", while a miss state is any other state. Note that the state of the variable display of the performance symbol 70a is not limited to this, and it may scroll left and right, or rotate (spin) on the spot.

In addition, while the display of the effect pattern 70a is changing, various effect images and movies such as reach effects, background images, characters, etc., which will be described later, are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) depending on the result of the jackpot determination, thereby increasing the player's anticipation of the execution of a jackpot (special game) (hereinafter referred to as the "jackpot winning expectation").

In addition, at the bottom of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main LCD), there are formed a first reserved icon display area 70B for displaying a number of first reserved icons corresponding to the first special reserved number (U1), which is the current number of first reserved memories in the normal game state (basically excluding the specific game state), a second reserved icon display area 70D for displaying a number of second reserved icons corresponding to the second special reserved number (U2), which is the current number of second reserved memories in the specific game state (basically excluding the normal game state), and an icon display area 70C for displaying the icon corresponding to (related to) the variable display of the special pattern (performance pattern 70a) being executed in the normal game state and the specific game state.

The first reserved icon display area 70B is divided into a first display section 70B1, a second display section 70B2, a third display section 70B3, and a fourth display section 70B4 from the side closest to the icon display area 70C, and each display section 70B1 to 70B4 displays a number of first reserved icons corresponding to the number of first special reserved charts (U1).

Specifically, the first display section 70B1 displays a first hold icon H11 indicating the first hold memory in which the first special symbol variable display is executed first, the second display section 70B2 displays a first hold icon H12 indicating the first hold memory in which the first special symbol variable display is executed second, the third display section 70B3 displays a first hold icon H13 indicating the first hold memory in which the first special symbol variable display is executed third, and the fourth display section 70B4 displays a first hold icon H14 indicating the first hold memory in which the first special symbol variable display is executed fourth, and each time the first special symbol variable display is executed in the normal game mode, the first hold icon displayed on each display section is shifted (decreased) toward the icon display area 70C.

In the first reserve icon display area 70B configured in this manner, the first reserve icon is displayed in the normal game state, so the number of first reserve icons also increases or decreases in response to an increase or decrease in the number of first special reserved patterns (U1) (the first reserve icons are displayed in an increasing or shifting manner (decreasing manner)), but in the specific game state, the first reserve icon is not displayed, so the number of first reserve icons does not increase or decrease in response to an increase or decrease in the number of first special reserved patterns (U1) (the first reserve icons are not displayed in an increasing or shifting manner (decreasing manner)).

The second reserved icon display area 70D is divided into a first display section 70D1, a second display section 70D2, a third display section 70D3, and a fourth display section 70D4 from the side closest to the icon display area 70C, and each of the display sections 70D1 to 70D4 displays a number of second reserved icons corresponding to the number of reserved second special charts (U2). In other words, the number of second reserved icons increases or decreases in response to an increase or decrease in the number of reserved second special charts (U2).

Specifically, the first display section 70D1 displays a second hold icon H21 indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed first, the second display section 70D2 displays a second hold icon H22 indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed second, the third display section 70D3 displays a second hold icon H23 indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed third, and the fourth display section 70D4 displays a second hold icon H24 indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed fourth, and each time the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in a specific game state, the second hold icon displayed on each display section is shifted (decreased) toward the icon display area 70C.

In the second reserve icon display area 70D configured in this manner, since the second reserve icon is displayed in a specific game state, the number of second reserve icons also increases or decreases in response to an increase or decrease in the second special reserved number (U2) (the second reserve icons are displayed in an increase or shift (decreasing) manner), but since the second reserve icon is not displayed in a normal game state, the number of second reserve icons does not increase or decrease in response to an increase or decrease in the second special reserved number (U2) (the second reserve icons are not displayed in an increase or shift (decreasing) manner).

When the specific game state (here, the time-saving game state) ends and the normal game state is entered, if the second special reserved number (U2) is "1" or more, the second reserved icon is exceptionally displayed in the second reserved icon display area 70D until the second special reserved number (U2) becomes "0", so the number of second reserved icons also increases or decreases in response to the increase or decrease in the second special reserved number (U2) (the second reserved icon is displayed to increase or shift (decreased)), but in the normal game state, the second reserved icon may be displayed without exception (the second reserved icon is not displayed to shift).

The icon display area 70C displays the icon TI by moving (shifting) the first reserved icon displayed in the first display section 70B1 of the first reserved icon display area 70B in response to the start of the variable display of the first special pattern (performance pattern 70a) in the normal game state (excluding the specific game state), or the second reserved icon displayed in the first display section 70D1 of the second reserved icon display area 70D in response to the start of the variable display of the second special pattern (performance pattern 70a) in the specific game state (excluding the normal game state), and the icon TI disappears (is erased) when the variable display of the special pattern (performance pattern 70a) ends. Note that the icon may be erased during the variable display of the special pattern (performance pattern 70a).

In this embodiment, the "first reserved number of special drawings" may be referred to as the "first reserved number," and the "second reserved number of special drawings" may be referred to as the "second reserved number." In addition, the "first reserved icon," the "second reserved icon," and the "relevant icon" may be collectively referred to as the "icon."

In addition, on the left side of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), there is a first special chart reserved number display area 70E for displaying a first reserved number indicating the current number of first special chart reserved numbers (U1) in normal game mode and specific game mode, and a second special chart reserved number display area 70F for displaying a second reserved number indicating the current number of second special chart reserved numbers (U2) in normal game mode and specific game mode.

Therefore, the reserved display showing the number of reserved first special charts is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B and the first reserved number display area 70E in the normal game state, and in the first reserved number display area 70E in the specific game state. The reserved display showing the number of reserved second special charts is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F in the normal game state, and in the second reserved icon display area 70D and the second reserved number display area 70F in the specific game state.

The first movable member 73 can emit light for special effects by lighting the first movable member LED (full color), which is part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 9), in a specified light emission mode, and can perform special effects by moving vertically between a standby position (origin position) located above and a special effect position located below by the driving force of the first movable member drive motor, which is part of the board drive device 75 (see FIG. 9). The first movable member 73 is detected to be in the origin position by a first position detection sensor (not shown).

The second movable member 74 can emit light for special effects by lighting the second movable member LED (full color), which is part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 9), in a specified light emission mode, and can perform special effects by moving diagonally up and down between a standby position (origin position) located in the upper right and a special effect position located in the lower left by the driving force of the second movable member drive motor, which is part of the board drive device 75 (see FIG. 9). The second movable member 74 is detected to be in the origin position by a second position detection sensor (not shown).

The first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are designed so that their performance positions overlap in part, so that the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 do not move simultaneously and therefore do not collide with each other.

In addition, if the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 do not collide with each other, one movable member may be moved to its performance position when it returns to a position that does not overlap with the performance position of the other movable member.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, there are a payout device 100 for paying out game balls based on the establishment of a predetermined payout condition (prize balls, ball loan), a game ball storage section (not shown) that stores game balls supplied from an island facility and supplies them to the payout device 100, a main control device 110A (not shown) that incorporates a main control board 110 that controls the overall progress of the game, a payout control device 120A (not shown) that incorporates a payout control board 120 that controls the payout device 100 in response to a payout control command from the main control board 110, a performance control device 130A (not shown) that incorporates a performance control board 130 that controls the performance in response to a performance control command from the main control board 110, a power supply device 160A (not shown) that incorporates a power supply board 160 that supplies power supply voltage to various control devices, and a game information output terminal board 90 (not shown) for outputting game information (game signal) to the outside of the game machine (see FIG. 9).

In addition, a door-type cover member is provided that opens and closes in the left-right direction on one side around a rotation axis set on the left or right side to cover the upper part of the main control device 110A and the entire performance control device 130A from the rear, and the performance control device 130A is provided with a changeover switch 22 (see Figure 9) that is covered by the cover member and is used to switch adjustment modes related to adjusting the volume of the performance sound output from the audio output device 9 and the light intensity of the display devices (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76).

On the front side of the main control board 110, there are mounted a main control unit 110m consisting of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, an RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal to clear the memory contents of the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m or to update a setting value which is the stage of the advantageous degree of the game (differentiating the advantageous degree of the game), a setting key switch 112a for inputting a signal to move to a state in which the setting value can be changed by operating the setting key or to a state in which the setting value can be confirmed, and an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values which allow the actual performance of the gaming machine 1 to be grasped.

The information display 113 is used to display set values and performance information (normal base values, described later), and is configured with four 7-segment displays with decimal points DP arranged side-by-side. The two 7-segment displays corresponding to the top two digits form an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type of performance information (data type), and the two 7-segment displays corresponding to the bottom two digits form a numeric segment for displaying numeric information indicating the set value and the numerical value of the performance information.

(Configuration of the back of the game board)
Next, the configuration of the back side of the game board will be described with reference to FIGS.
FIG. 2 is a rear view showing a state in which each unit is assembled to the base frame, and FIG. 3 is a partially exploded perspective view of FIG.

As shown in Figures 2 and 3, a base frame 170 (liquid crystal base frame) with an opening penetrating in the front-to-rear direction is attached to the rear (rear) of the game board 5, and an image display unit (first image display device 70, and image display cover 185) 180 is attached to the rear (rear) side of the base frame 170 so as to cover the opening. A lamp relay board 186 is attached to the rear (rear) side of the image display cover 185 (liquid crystal cover), and a main board case 200 housing the main control device 110A (main control board 110) is attached to the lower rear part of the image display cover 185 below the lamp relay board 186.

The base frame 170 (liquid crystal base) is a substantially rectangular ring-shaped body having an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction, and its ring-shaped front surface 171 is attached and fixed to the rear surface of the game board 5. The rear surface of the base frame 170 has space for arranging various circuit boards and components.
The performance control board 130 is disposed on the rear side of the image display unit 180 (liquid crystal unit) fixed to the rear side of the base frame 170. The image display unit 180 is configured so that it can be freely slidably mounted on the side (left-right direction), up-down direction, or diagonally of the base frame in a gap (storage space) for storing the image display unit provided in front of the performance control board.
The various circuit boards arranged on the rear surface of the base frame are covered with a cover member 190 .

As shown in FIG. 2, at least the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a of the main control board 110 are exposed on the rear side of the main board case 200.
In addition, the information display 113 provided on the main control board 110 can be seen through the transparent main board case 200.
Staff at the gaming facility can open the door of the gaming machine and, while visually checking the information display 113 on the back of the gaming machine, operate the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a to perform operations such as RWM clear, change settings, check settings, and check the performance information of the gaming machine.

The RWM clear switch 111a on the main control board 110 is not directly exposed, and an operating member 685 that can be operated by game arcade staff, etc., protrudes from an opening provided in the main board case 200 at a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 111a.
When a staff member or the like presses the operation member 685, the RWM clear switch 111a is pressed by the pressed operation member 685. This causes the RWM clear switch 111a to be operated.

The setting key switch 112a is a cylindrical member protruding from the main control board 110 and has a keyhole on the end face thereof into which a key is inserted.
The end face of the setting key switch 112 a having a keyhole is exposed from an opening provided in the main board case 200 .
Staff at the gaming establishment can insert a key into the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a to operate it.

(Main board case)
Next, the configuration of the main board case 200 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.
In this embodiment, the game board 5 side is defined as the front side with respect to the main board case 200, and the direction opposite the game board 5 is defined as the rear side. Therefore, the left-right direction in the figure is the left-right direction when the main board case 200 is viewed from the opposite side to the game board 5.

Figure 4 is a diagram illustrating a main board case for one example of this embodiment, Figure 5 is an exploded oblique view including the base of the main board case 200, and Figure 6 is a rear oblique view when the main board case 200 is disassembled.
The main board case 200 of this embodiment is attached to the rear of a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine via a base 280 with the main control board 110 equipped with electronic components housed inside.

The base 280 is a connecting means for attaching the main board case 200 to a gaming machine side holding portion (in this embodiment, the lamp relay board 186) provided on the rear side of the gaming machine main body.
The main board case 200 housing the main control board is assembled with the lower case piece 210 attached to the back of the gaming board of a pachinko machine or the like via a base 280, so that the electronic components mounted on the internal main control board 110 can be seen from the back of the gaming board through the upper case piece 220.

The base 280 is a part used to attach the main board case 200 to the rear of the game board 5. As shown in FIG. 5, the base 280 is formed in a generally rectangular shape with the two sides along the left-right direction longer than the two sides along the top-bottom direction, and has a pair of shafts 281 near both the left and right ends of the lower side, and a plate-shaped portion in the left-right center of the upper side. The axial direction of the shafts 281 coincides with the left-right direction.

The main board case 200 is provided with a pair of hooks 249 that engage with each of the shafts 281. The pair of hooks 249 are provided on the lower side of the upper case piece 220, which will be described later. The hooks 249 are formed in a U-shape that protrudes toward the front.

When attaching the main board case 200 to the base 280, the main board case 200 is positioned so that the hook portions 249 are convex toward the rear side. This allows the hook portions 249 to engage with the shaft portions 281, so the main board case 200 is brought closer to the base 280 and each hook portion 249 is engaged with each shaft portion 281.

Then, once the hook portion 249 engages with the shaft portion 281, the free end side of the main board case 200 is rotated upward around the shaft portion 281, and the main board case 200 is placed on the base 280. At this time, the plate-shaped hook 282 provided on the upper edge of the base 280 is caught in the recess D provided on the upper edge of the main board case 200. Therefore, the main board case 200 is fixed to the base 280 by the engagement between the hook portion 249 and the shaft portion 281 and the engagement between the plate-shaped hook 282 and the main board case 200.

Then, attach the protective cover 229 to the main board case 200. The protective cover 229 covers the lower portion of the main board case 200, including the hook portion 249. In this way, the main control device 110A is attached to the rear side of the game board 5.

The main board case 200 is equipped with two transparent resin case pieces (lower case piece 210, upper case piece 220) that house the main control board 110 (printed circuit board) that is a single-sided mounting type with electronic components arranged on only one side, a cutting member 230 for cutting the anti-opening seal that is held between the edges of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220, and a cap 240 that is detachably attached to the sealing base part 310 of the main board case 200 to which the anti-opening seal 250 described below is adhered.

The main board case 200 houses the main control board 110 with the multiple connectors 771-776 mounted on the main control board 110 exposed. The main board case 200 is formed from a light-transmitting material, such as transparent plastic.

The lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 form a main board case body (sealing body 300).
A protective cover 229 is disposed at the bottom of the upper case piece 220 to cover the connection between the internal connector provided on the internal main control board 110 and the external connector.
In this embodiment, the lower case piece 210 is fixed to the upper case piece 220 by a crimping member, with the main control board 110 sandwiched therebetween.

Crimping fastening parts 291 using crimping members are arranged at appropriate locations along the edge of the main board case 200, and the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are locked in a closed state by driving (locking) the crimping members (locking members) into the crimping fastening holes (sealing parts) provided in the crimping fastening parts 291. By removing (breaking) the crimping members driven (locked) into the crimping fastening holes, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 become openable, detachable, and removable.

In the crimping fastening portion 291 of the main board case 200 of this embodiment, two crimping fastening holes (crimping fastening holes 291A, 291B) are provided.
Each of the crimp fastening holes 291A, 291B is formed by communication between a lower case side fastening hole 292 provided in the lower case piece 210 and an upper case side fastening hole 293 provided in the upper case piece 220.

Note that only one crimp fastening hole is used for fastening the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 at a time. After removing (breaking) the crimping member to release the fastening (after opening the main board case 200), if fastening is to be performed again, the crimping member is driven into the other remaining crimp fastening hole to perform the fastening. In other words, the main board case of this embodiment can be opened up to two times.

The lower case piece 210 is combined with the upper case piece 220 to form an inner container section 581 for containing the main control board 110. The upper case piece 220 is provided on the rear side of the main board case 200, which is the side of the main control unit 110m. The lower case piece 210 is provided on the front side of the main board case 200, which is the side opposite the main control unit 110m.

The lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 each include a control board storage section 211, 221 that stores the main control board 110, and sealing sections 212, 222 that form the sealing base section 310 described below. The control board storage sections 211, 221 each include a plate section 211a, 221a formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and a flange section 211b, 221b that protrudes from the peripheral edge of the plate section 211a, 221a and surrounds one side of each plate section 211a, 221a.

A cylindrical portion 565 is provided on the left side of the plate portion 211a of the lower case piece 210, extending rearward toward the main control board 110. A hole portion 566 is formed in the cylindrical portion 565, extending in the front-to-rear direction. A screw thread is formed on the inside of the hole portion 566. A hole portion 567 is provided in the main control board 110 at a position opposite the cylindrical portion 565.

The main control board 110 is fixed to the lower case piece 210. More specifically, a hole 567 of the main control board 110 is disposed behind a cylindrical portion 565 of the lower case piece 210. The shank of a screw for fixing the main control board 110 is inserted from the rear side of the main control board 110 through the hole 567 into the hole 566 of the cylindrical portion 565. The threads formed in the hole 567 of the cylindrical portion 565 are mated with the threads provided on the shank of the screw. As a result, the main control board 110 is sandwiched between the head of the screw and the rear surface of the cylindrical portion 565, and the main control board 110 is fixed to the lower case piece 210. That is, the main control board 110 is screwed to the lower case piece 210 side.

The flange portion 211b of the control board storage section 211 has three L-shaped hook pieces 211c formed on each of the portions (hereinafter referred to as "male portions") that protrude from the plate portion 211a along the two long sides of the plate portion 211a. On the other hand, the flange portion 221b of the control board storage section 221 has a portion (hereinafter referred to as "female portion") that protrudes from the plate portion 221a along the two long sides of the plate portion 221a. The flange portion 221b of the control board storage section 221 has a double wall shape, and an insertion groove portion 221c into which the male portion of the control board storage section 211 can be inserted is provided between the walls that form the double wall. Also, each insertion groove portion 221c has a hook piece 221d formed therein.

When the lower case piece 210 to which the main control board 110 is screwed is assembled with the upper case piece 220, the male part of the flange part 211b is inserted into the female part of the flange part 221b. Then, the control board storage parts 211, 221 are slid toward each other in the left-right direction indicated by the arrow α in FIG. 6. Then, the hook piece 211c provided on the male part engages with the hook piece 221d, so that the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are assembled together so that they will not come apart unless they move toward each other in the direction opposite to the arrow α.

When combined in this manner, the control board storage sections 211, 221 form a box-shaped inner container section 581 that is shielded from the outside. Since the main control board 110 is stored in the inner container section 581, the possibility of the main control board 110 and main control section 110m, etc. being illegally replaced can be reduced.

The main control board 110 is attached to the inside of the control board storage section 221 before the control board storage sections 211 and 221 are combined. At this time, the ICs and other components mounted on the main control board 110 are attached so as to face the plate section 221a of the control board storage section 221. This is because the plate section 221a is also made of transparent plastic, so that even if the main control board 110 is stored in the main board case 200, it is possible to check from the outside through the plate section 221a whether the electronic components such as the main control section 110m mounted on the main control board 110 have not been illegally replaced. In this embodiment, when the main control device 110A equipped with the main board case 200 is attached to the game board 5, the electronic components mounted on the main control board 110 in the main board case 200 can be seen from the rear side of the game machine 1 through the upper case piece 220.

The right ends of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are provided with sealing parts 212 and 222. As shown in FIG. 34, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are provided with a first screw-fastening piece 91 and a second screw-fastening piece 92 above the sealing parts 212 and 222. When the control board storage parts 211 and 221 are slid and assembled, the sealing base part 310 is formed by the sealing parts 212 and 222 at the longitudinal end of the assembled sealing body 300. When the cap 240 is attached to the sealing body 300 by covering the sealing base part 310, the third screw-fastening piece 393 provided on the cap 240 overlaps with the first screw-fastening piece 91, the second screw-fastening piece 92, and the third screw-fastening piece 393 provided on the cap 240 overlaps with the longitudinal end of the sealing body 300, forming the screw-fastening part 390 for screw fastening.

The sealing parts 212, 222 protrude to the right from the right end of the control board storage parts 211, 221. The sealing parts 212, 222 are formed to have the same height in the left-right direction and the same width in the up-down direction. Each sealing part 212, 222 has a long groove part 212a, 222a formed along the left-right direction. The sealing part 222 has two parallel groove parts 222a formed along the left-right direction at a predetermined distance, and the sealing part 212 has one groove part 212a formed along the left-right direction. When the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are combined, the sealing parts 212, 222 form a sealing base part 310 on the right part of the combined control board storage parts 211, 221. In the sealing base portion 310, the sealing portions 212 and 222 are arranged in parallel at a fixed distance from each other, and an insertion/removal space is formed between the opposing surfaces of the sealing portions 212 and 222.

The open-danger seal 250 is used as a means for sealing the main board case 200, and certifies that it is an authentic product issued by an organization or the like that has certification qualifications. The open-danger seal 250 is made of an easily cuttable material such as paper, with an adhesive surface on one side thereof, and has multiple cuts formed thereon, taking into consideration cuttability. As will be described later, for example, a hologram and a QR code (registered trademark), etc. are printed on the open-danger seal 250. The words "open-danger seal" are also printed on the open-danger seal 250.
The cutting member 230 is formed in a shape having a base portion 230a, a pair of cut portions 361, and a cutting portion 364. The base portion 230a, which forms the base of the cutting member 230, is formed in a substantially rectangular shape. One of the two long sides of the base portion 230a is formed with a cutting portion 364. The cutting portion 364 is a portion where the tip of the base portion 230a is formed in a blade shape. The cut portions 361 are provided on both ends of the base portion 230a in the longitudinal direction, and are formed in a shape that is bent in an overall "L" shape. The left end of the cut portion 361 is called a free end portion 361a.

The cap 240 is formed to a size that can be placed over the sealing base portion 310 to cover the entire sealing base portion 310, and is formed to be detachable from the sealing base portion 310. The cap 240 includes a cap body 241 formed in a bowl shape that covers the sealing base portion 310, and a third screw stop piece 393 formed on one end side of the cap body 241 in the longitudinal direction. A protrusion 382 is provided on the inner surface of the cap body 241 at a position where the free end portion 361a of the pinch portion 361 of the cutting member 230 inserted into the insertion space 310a is caught when the cap 240 is attached to the sealing base portion 310. In addition, a groove portion 386 is formed on the inner surface of the cap body 241.

The cutting member 230 is inserted into the insertion/removal space of the sealing base 310. Then, the open-prohibition seal 250 is affixed. Furthermore, when the cap 240 is placed over the sealing base 310, the groove 386 fits into the part of the cutting member 230 inserted into the insertion/removal space 310a. In addition, the protrusion 382 engages with the free end 361a of the pinch portion 361 of the cutting member 230.

When the cap 240 is placed over the sealing base portion 310, the third screw-fastening piece 393 overlaps the combination of the first screw-fastening piece 91 of the lower case piece 210 and the second screw-fastening piece 92 of the upper case piece 220, forming a screw-fastening portion 390 for screw fastening. When the crimping member 94 is driven into the screw-fastening portion 390, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240 are fixed together.

When the seal of the main board case 200 is to be removed, the crimping member 94 is removed and the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base 310. The same applies when the seal of the main board case 200 is fraudulently removed. The cutting member 230 and the cap 240 are integrated. Therefore, when the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base 310, the cutting member 230 is also removed from the sealing base 310 at the same time. This causes irreparable damage to the open-do-not-tamper seal 250 by the cutting portion 364 etc.

(Main control board)
Next, the configuration of the main control board 110 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
The main control board 110, which controls the game, is equipped with a main control unit 110m, an RWM clear switch 111a, a setting key switch 112a, an information display 113, a number of electronic components 595 (ICs, resistors, connectors, capacitors, coils, etc.) different from the main control unit 110m, and a number of connectors 771, 772, 773, 774, 775, 776, etc.

The main control unit 110m stores memory contents used for controlling the game, and also stores memory contents that affect the outcome of the game.
The main control unit 110m is a one-chip microcomputer that integrates a main CPU 110a, a main ROM 110b, and a main RAM 110c, which will be described later.
The multiple connectors 771 to 776 are lined up in order from left to right on the lower part of the main control board 110. The multiple connectors 771 to 776 are arranged inside six openings 779 provided on the lower part of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200.

Of the multiple connectors 771-776, two connectors 774 and 775 are called detection signal connectors 774 and 775. Signals from at least some of the first start hole detection switch 45a, second start hole detection switch 47a, general prize hole detection switch 43a, and large prize hole detection switch 50a that detect the entrance of a game ball are input to the detection signal connectors 774 and 775. In this embodiment, all signals from the first start hole detection switch 45a, second start hole detection switch 47a, general prize hole detection switch 43a, and large prize hole detection switch 50a that detect the entrance of a game ball are input to the detection signal connectors 774 and 775. The detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are a different color from the other connectors 771, 772, 773, and 776. In this embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are fluorescent, and the other connectors 771, 772, 773, and 776 are a color different from the fluorescent color.

The main control unit 110m includes a plate-shaped main body extending in the left-right direction, and a plurality of signal pins (first signal pins) extending downward from the lower end of the main body and electrically connected to the main control board 110. The signal pins (first signal pins) are mounted (soldered) on the main control board 110 so as to be visible through the main board case 200.
The electronic components 595 each include a signal pin (second signal pin). The signal pin (second signal pin) is mounted (soldered) on the main control board 110 so as to be visible through the main board case 200.

The RWM clear switch 111a will now be described.
4 and 8, the RWM clear switch 111a on the main control board 110 is not directly exposed. A recess 688 is provided in the upper case piece 220 of the board case 200, and an opening 687 is provided in the recess 688.
5, the operating member 685 is provided at a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 111a, and when a staff member or the like presses the operating member 685, the RWM clear switch 111a is pressed by the pressed operating member 685. This causes the RWM clear switch 111a to be operated.
A cover member 686 is provided in the recess 688. The cover member 686 is journaled within the recess 688 so as to be rotatable between a first position where the operating member 685 is covered to make it inoperable, and a second position where the operating member 685 is opened to make it operable.
By moving the operating member 685 to the second position, the RWM clear switch 111a can be operated.
In this way, it is only necessary to provide the substrate case 200 with an opening 687 large enough to insert the operating member 685. Furthermore, the operating member 685 cannot be operated unless the cover member 686 is opened. Therefore, unauthorized access to the inside of the substrate case 200 can be prevented.
The RWM clear switch 111 a may have an end exposed from the opening 687 so that it can be operated directly without being operated using the operating member 685 .

The setting key switch 112a is a cylindrical member protruding from the main control board 110 and has a keyhole on the end face thereof into which a key is inserted.
The end face of the setting key switch 112 a having a keyhole is exposed from an opening 661 provided in the upper case piece 220 of the board case 200 , but is slightly lower than the surface of the board case 200 .
Staff or the like can insert a key into the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a to perform the operation.

(Identification mark)
The following describes the identification markings 520. As shown in FIG. 5, the identification markings 520 are provided on the main control board 110, the main control unit 110m, the lower case half 210, the upper case half 220, and the cap 240.
The identification mark 520 is a mark including information related to the gaming machine 1. In the following description, the identification mark 520 provided on the main control board 110 is referred to as an identification mark 521, and the identification mark 520 provided on the main control unit 110m is referred to as an identification mark 522. The identification mark 520 provided on the upper case piece 220 is referred to as an identification mark 523, the identification mark 520 provided on the lower case piece 210 is referred to as an identification mark 524, and the identification mark 520 provided on the cap 240 is referred to as an identification mark 525.

As shown in Fig. 5, the identification mark 521 is displayed by silk screen printing on the upper part of the rear surface of the main control board 110. The identification mark 521 is an information identification section for displaying specific information. The identification mark 522 is affixed by engraving to the main control section 110m. The identification mark 522 is an information identification section for displaying specific information.
Identification marks 523, 524, and 525 attached to main board case 200 are information identification sections for displaying specific information. Identification mark 524 is formed in the upper right part of the front surface of lower case piece 210 by stamping using a mold for manufacturing lower case piece 210 (see FIG. 33).
The identification mark 525 is formed on the rear surface of the cap 240 by stamping using a mold used to manufacture the cap 240. The display mode of the identification mark 523 will be described later.

The identification indications 521 to 525 are related to each other, and include at least the same identification indication 529. In this embodiment, as an example, the identification indication 521 is the character string "ABCD01", and the identification indication 522 is the character string "ABCD02". The identification indication 523 is the character string "ABCD03", and the identification indication 524 is the character string "ABCD04". The identification indication 525 is the character string "ABCD05". The same identification indication 529 in the identification indications 521 to 525 is "ABCD". The identification indication 529 is, for example, an indication corresponding to the manufacturer name and model name. In this embodiment, as an example, in "ABCD", "AB" represents the manufacturer name, and "CD" represents the model name.

In addition, in the identification displays 521 to 525, the manufacturer name may be displayed as it is, rather than as "AB" included in "ABCD". Also, the model name may be displayed as it is, rather than as "CD" included in "ABCD". Also, the model of the gaming machine may be displayed in the identification displays 521 to 525.

(Sealing member)
5 and 8, a seal member 1560 and a seal member 1561 are attached to the outer surface 531 of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200.

The sealing member 1560 is attached to a position indication portion 561 provided on the lower left side of the upper case piece 220 in the left-right direction, and the sealing member 1561 is attached to a position indication portion 561 provided on the upper right corner of the upper case piece 220.
Both of the sealing members 1560 and 1561 are formed from a material having optical transparency, and in the present embodiment, as an example, they are transparent (made of a transparent material).
Each of the sealing members 1560 and 1561 is disposed across a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 8). Note that various electronic components such as the plurality of electronic components 595 located in front of the sealing members 1560 and 1561 are not shown in FIG.

The seal member 1560 is a seal for managing the main board.
In this example, a watermark for preventing counterfeiting is provided on a seal member main body 1560A (base portion) of the seal member 1560. That is, the seal member 1560 (opener indication seal) is a processed seal in which a watermark processing is applied to the seal member main body 1560A.
A "watermark" is, for example, a display that looks different depending on the viewing angle, and various types can be applied, such as those that use holograms or those that look different depending on their physical shape.
However, although sealing member main body 1560A has been subjected to a predetermined processing (watermark processing), it is transparent and at least has high light transmittance, ensuring a certain degree of visibility.

The seal member 1560 has, on the seal member body 1560A, a white writing area 1570 (writing column), a code portion 1572, and an information display portion 1573 within a frame with a black heading such as "Main Board Control Number."
The writing area 1570, the code portion 1572, the information display portion 1573, and the text display associated with these areas (described later) are each non-translucent areas with low translucency because the transparent material of the sealing member main body 1560A is not exposed.
The sealing member 1560 has a number of non-transparent portions, through which it is difficult to see the main control board 110 inside the main board case 200 .
The code portion 1572 as a non-transparent portion, the information display portion 1573 and the writing area 1570 are provided at positions on the seal member main body 1560A that do not overlap with the main control portion 110m and the information display device 113.

On the other hand, the areas other than the writing area 1570, the code portion 1572, the information display portion 1573, and the areas associated with these areas and containing the text display described below in the sealing member main body 1560A are translucent portions 1574 in which the transparent material of the sealing member main body 1560A is exposed and which have high translucency.
The translucent portion 1574 is the above-mentioned viewing portion through which the electronic components 595 on the main control board 110 in the main board case 200 can be seen through a transparent material.

In the main board case 200, the main control board 110 is visible through the sealing member 1560 and the main board case 200. This allows an inspector to easily check the main control board 110. This allows an inspector to check the main control board 110 through the sealing member 1560 and easily determine whether or not cheating has occurred. This allows players to play with peace of mind. This increases the player's interest.

Furthermore, regardless of whether or not there is a translucent or non-translucent portion, the sealing member 1560 is attached to the sealing member 1562 attached to the main control unit 110m on the main control board 110 in a position that can be seen from all angles.
Furthermore, regardless of whether or not there is a light-transmitting portion or a non-light-transmitting portion, the sealing member 1560, including the writing area 1570, the code portion 1572, and the information display portion 1573, is positioned so that the entire sealing member 1560 does not overlap with the main control unit 110m from any angle.
Therefore, when the main board case 200 is viewed from the front, the main control unit 110m can always be seen through the main board case 200.
Therefore, the inspector can easily check the main control unit 110m. Therefore, the inspector can easily check the main control unit 110m and determine whether or not cheating is occurring. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is increased.
Regardless of whether or not there is a light-transmitting portion or a non-light-transmitting portion, the sealing member 1560, including the writing area 1570, the code portion 1572, and the information display portion 1573, is positioned so that the entire sealing member 1560 does not overlap with the information display device 113 from any angle.
Therefore, when the main board case 200 is viewed from the front, the information display 113 can be seen through the main board case 200.

In FIG. 8, it cannot be said that the sealing member 1560 and the information display 113 are in close proximity to each other. However, if the following conditions are met: the sealing member 1560 does not overlap the main control unit 110m and the information display 113, the information display 113 is located sufficiently separated from the connectors 771 to 776, and the sealing member 1561 does not overlap the information display 113, then the sealing member 1560 and the information display 113 may be in close proximity to each other.

The display contents of the seal member 1560 will be described in detail below.
The writing area 1570 is an area for writing down the person who opened the main board case 200 and the date of opening.
The writing area 1570 is a white base formed on a transparent material on which writing can be performed with a pen or the like.
As an example, six writing areas 1570 are provided, with three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction, allowing three sets of "opener" and "date of opening" to be written.
The writing area 1570 is printed on a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) base.

Above the writing areas 1570, headings such as "Opener" and "Date Opened" are printed in black, and to the left of each writing area, a circled number indicating the number of the writing area is printed.
That is, "Opener" is printed in black above the upper left writing area 1570. "Date Opened" is printed in black above the upper right writing area 1570. A circle 1 is printed to the left of the upper left writing area 1570. A circle 2 is printed to the left of the writing area 1570 in the vertical center on the left side. A circle 3 is printed to the left of the lower left writing area 1570.

For example, when an inspector opens the main board case 200, the inspector writes the inspector's name in the left writing area 1570, and writes the date that the main board case 200 was opened in the right writing area 1570. The inspector may also write in the writing area 1570 the date that the inspector confirmed whether or not any tampering had occurred with the main control board 110.

Code portion 1572 is provided in the upper left part of seal member 1560. Code portion 1572 includes predetermined information. Code portion 1572 is a portion where information can be read by other devices, and for example, a QR code (registered trademark), barcode, etc. is printed in black in a rectangular colored area (white in this embodiment). In this embodiment, as an example, code portion 1572 includes a QR code (registered trademark).

The code portion 1572 is linked to information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 110, which is stored in a device other than the gaming machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as the "other device").
For example, a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), which is information included in the code section 1572, is read by a camera provided on a portable information terminal or the like. The portable information terminal uses the URL to access other devices via a network. As a result of accessing other devices, the information displayed on the portable information terminal includes the delivery destination of the main control board 110 (for example, the name of the store to which the gaming machine 1 was delivered) and information on whether the gaming machine 1 was discarded or not. This allows the inspector to easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 110 and information on whether the gaming machine 1 was discarded or not. Therefore, the inspector can confirm the information on the delivery destination and easily determine whether or not fraud has occurred in which a main control board 110 with a different delivery destination has been installed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

The information display section 1573 includes various information. The information display section 1573 may include, for example, information similar to the identification display 529. In this embodiment, as an example, the information display section 1573 has the character string "EF001" printed in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area. The character string is, for example, the management number of the main control board 110. Using the management number, an inspector can check information such as the delivery destination of the gaming machine 1 and whether the gaming machine 1 has been discarded from information linked to the management number held by the manufacturer. The character string of the information display section 1573 may include information corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, model, etc. In addition, the rectangular area of the information display section 1573 and the rectangular basin of the code section 1572 are connected in the left-right direction.

The light transmitting portion 1574 (viewing portion) of the sealing member 1560 will be described.
The light-transmitting portion 1574 is the area of the seal member main body 1560A other than the writing area 1570, the code portion 1572, the information display portion 1573, the notation "Main board control number", the frame, the notation of the opener, the notation of the opening date, and the notations of circles 1 to 3.
The light-transmitting portion 1574 is, for example, an area extending in the left-right direction between three lines of writing areas 1570 in the vertical direction.
The light-transmitting portion 1574 is an area extending in the left-right direction between the code portion 1572 and the information display portion 1573 arranged side by side, and the two writing areas 1570 on the upper side.
The light-transmitting portion 1574 is also an area extending in the vertical direction between the two horizontal rows of writing areas 1570 .
An inspector can check electronic component 595 (see FIG. 62(a)) through light-transmitting portion 1574. Therefore, compared to a case where light-transmitting portion 1574 is not provided, an inspector can easily check whether or not tampering has occurred with electronic component 595. This reduces the possibility of tampering, allowing players to play with peace of mind. This increases the player's interest.

The seal member 1561 will now be described.
The seal member 1561 is attached to the main control unit 110m on the main control board 110 in a position where it can be seen from all angles.
The seal member 1561 is provided at a position that does not overlap with the main control unit 110m from any angle.
Therefore, when the main board case 200 is viewed from the front, the main control unit 110m can always be seen through the main board case 200.
The seal member 1561 is provided in a position such that it does not overlap with the information display 113 from any angle.
Therefore, when the main board case 200 is viewed from the front, the information display 113 can be seen through the main board case 200.

The seal member 1561 is an information identifying portion for displaying specific information.
For example, at least one of the model name, manufacturer name, rated voltage, and total capacity is printed as the specific information. In this embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR AIU GH101" and manufacturer name "AA Company" are printed. In this embodiment, the part on which this information is printed is also referred to as the printed part 1563. The specific information displayed on the seal member 1561 is referred to as the identification mark 1595. In this embodiment, the identification mark 1595 is the model name including the model number "CR AIU GH101", the manufacturer name "AA Company", the rated voltage, and the total capacity (AC 24V ± 5%, 250VA).
In addition, in the area where the model name is to be displayed, a background is created using a conspicuous color such as red or yellow against the transparent material, and the model name is displayed in white letters on the background.

In addition, a seal member 1562 is attached to the main control unit 110m.
The seal member 1562 is an information identification section for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name is printed as the specific information. In the present embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company" are printed on the seal member 1562 as the predetermined information. The specific information displayed on the seal member 1562 is called an identification display 1596. In the present embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company".
A QR code (registered trademark) showing the information specified by the identification mark 1596 may be displayed on the seal member 1562 .
Furthermore, the seal member 1561 and the seal member 1562 are displayed including at least the same identification marks 1595, 1596. In this embodiment, the type name "CR Aiu", model number "GH101", and manufacturer name "AA Company" in the identification marks 1595, 1596 are all the same, but it is sufficient if only some of them are the same.
Although the identification marks 1595 and 1596 are provided on the main board case 200 and the main control unit 110m, they may be provided on other components. For example, the main control board 110 may be displayed with the same identification marks as the identification marks 1595 and 1596.

As described above, in this embodiment, the sealing members 1560, 1561 are arranged across at least a portion of the multiple electronic components 595 (see FIG. 8), so that, for example, by checking the positional relationship between the sealing members 1560, 1561 and the electronic components 595, an inspector can determine whether or not tampering has occurred with the main control board 110. This reduces the possibility of tampering, allowing players to play with peace of mind. This increases the player's interest.

In addition, since the seal member 1560 is provided with an area 1575, the inspector can write the inspector's name and the date that the main board case 200 was opened in the area 1575 (more specifically, the writing area 1570). The inspector can also write in the area 1575 the date on which it was confirmed whether or not tampering had occurred with the main control board 110. In addition, since the light-transmitting portion 1574 (peeking portion) is provided between the areas 1575, the area 1575 is more noticeable than when only the area 1575 is provided. This makes it easier for the inspector to check the characters and the like written in the area 1575. This reduces the possibility of tampering, and the player can play with peace of mind. This increases the player's interest.

Furthermore, since the sealing member 1560 is provided with the light-transmitting portion 1574 (viewing portion), the inspector can check the electronic component 595 through the light-transmitting portion 1574 (viewing portion). Therefore, compared to a case where the light-transmitting portion 1574 (viewing portion) is not provided, the inspector can easily check whether or not tampering has occurred with the electronic component 595. This reduces the possibility of tampering, allowing the player to play with peace of mind. This increases the player's interest.
Moreover, the code portion 1572 is provided at a position that does not overlap with the main control portion 110m. Therefore, the inspector can easily check the main control portion 110m. Therefore, the inspector can check the main control portion 110m and easily determine whether or not cheating is being performed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is increased.

Furthermore, the code section 1572 is linked to information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 110, which is stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1. This allows an inspector to easily check the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 110 using the code section 1572. Therefore, the inspector can check the delivery destination information and easily determine whether or not fraud has occurred in which a main control board 110 with a different delivery destination has been installed. This allows the player to play with peace of mind. This increases the player's interest.
Also, a seal member 1562 is attached to the main control unit 110m, and predetermined information is displayed on the seal member 1562. Therefore, an inspector can easily check for tampering such as replacing the main control unit 110m by checking the seal member 1562. This reduces the possibility of tampering, allowing players to play with peace of mind. This increases the player's interest.
Furthermore, since at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name is printed on the seal member 1561, the inspector can easily ascertain at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name. Therefore, the inspector can check at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name and easily determine whether or not cheating has occurred. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is increased.

The various information displayed on the seal members 1560 and 1561 may be displayed at an angle that allows the mounting location of the main control unit 110m to be visually recognized.
The main board case 200, particularly the upper case piece 220, does not have any ventilation holes.
The main board case 200 has date marks formed on the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 .
The date mark is a mark for lot management that is added to the case, which is a plastic molded product, during production (molding).
A feature of this embodiment is that no parts are provided near the main control unit 110m that are so high that the seal member 1562 becomes invisible.

As described above, the main control board 110 is mounted with the main control unit 110m that controls the game, the information display 113 that displays the performance of the gaming machine, and other electronic components 595 that are different from these. A transparent seal member 1560 is attached to the main control board 110. This allows the other electronic components 595 to be seen through the transparent seal member 1560 and the main board case 200. In addition, the main control unit 110m and the information display 113 can be directly seen through the main board case 200.

By applying watermarking to the transparent portion of the seal member 1560, which has a transparent portion and multiple non-transparent portions that must be affixed to the main board case 200, it is possible to prevent the seal member 1560 from being copied. In addition, by applying watermarking to the transparent portion of the seal member 1560 so that it does not overlap with the main control unit 110m and the information display 113, it is possible to reliably ensure the visibility of the main control unit 110m, which is an important board component, and the information display 113, which must be read accurately, without being affected by the watermarking or the multiple non-transparent portions.

The state of electronic components 595, which are less important than the main control unit 110m and the information display 113, can be checked through the gaps between the multiple non-transparent parts and the surrounding transparent parts 1574 (viewing parts) via watermark processing. Even if there are multiple non-transparent parts, the transparent parts ensure visibility of the board parts. In addition, the non-transparent parts can display specific information, such as necessary information to identify the main control unit 110m. Different information can be displayed or written in each of the multiple non-transparent parts.

The information display 113 may be disposed on the lower end side instead of the upper end side of the main control board 110. In that case, it is desirable to dispose the connectors 771 to 776 on the upper end side opposite (opposite) the information display 113.
The information display 113 may be disposed on the left or right end side of the main control board 110. In that case, it is desirable that the connectors 771 to 776 are disposed on the end opposite (opposite) the information display 113.
As described above, the information display 113 may be disposed on the inside of the main control board 110 instead of at the end of the board. Even in this case, the information display 113 must be disposed in a position that does not overlap with the cables and harnesses extending from the connectors 771 to 776, the seal member 1560, and the like.

In this embodiment, the RWM clear switch 111a is described as being located on the main control board 110, but this is not limited thereto and it may be provided on the dispensing control board 120. Also, in this embodiment, the setting key switch 112a is described as being located on the main control board 110, but this is not limited thereto. The setting key switch 112a can be located in a different position away from the main control board 110 as long as it is electrically connected to the main control board 110.

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to Fig. 9. Fig. 9 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment.

The main control board 110 controls the overall progress of the game (basic operations). The main control board 110 is equipped with a main control unit 110m as a one-chip microcomputer equipped with a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs, and a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, as well as input and output ports for main control. The main CPU 110a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the programs stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while using the main RAM 110c as a work area, thereby controlling controlled devices (various solenoids and various displays) and sending predetermined commands based on the results of the arithmetic processing to the payout control board 120, the performance control board 130, etc.

Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to allow commands (data) to be communicated in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130 is configured to allow commands (data) to be communicated in only one direction, from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130.

The input port of the main control board 110 is connected to the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the gate detection switch 44a, the first starting hole detection switch 45a, the second starting hole detection switch 47a, the large winning hole detection switch 50a, the out ball detection switch 52a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a, the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, the information display 113, and the payout control board 120. When detection signals from the various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing is performed according to the detection signals.

The output port of the main control board 110 is connected to the second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, the large prize opening opening solenoid 51b, the main information display device 59, the game information output terminal board 90, the payout control board 120, and the performance control board 130. Drive control signals for controlling the various solenoids, display control signals for controlling the various displays, and game information to be notified from the game information output terminal board to the outside of the gaming machine (such as a hall computer) are output via the output port.

The payout control board 120 is a slave control board that controls the payout of game balls based on the payout command received from the main control board 110, and also controls the launch of game balls. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 100 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launch device 26 to control the launch of game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs calculation processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores a payout program, etc., a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and an input port and an output port for payout control. The payout CPU 121a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown) and reads out the payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs calculation processing related to the payout of game balls while using the payout RAM 121c as a work area, controls the payout device 100, and transmits predetermined commands based on the results of the calculation processing to the main control board 110, the performance control board 130, etc.

The input port of the payout control unit 121 is connected to an open detection switch 31a, a tray full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the payout device 100, and a ball presence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit, and the output port of the payout control unit 121 is connected to a payout motor 100b provided in the payout device 100.

When the payout control unit 121 receives a payout command from the main control board 110, it drives the payout motor 100b provided in the payout device 100 to control the payout of a predetermined number of game balls, and ends the control of the payout of game balls when the payout ball detection switch 100a detects that the predetermined number of game balls have been paid out.

The firing control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input port, and an output port (not shown). The input port of the firing control unit 122 is connected to the touch sensor 15a and the firing volume 15b, and the output port of the firing control unit 122 is connected to the ball feed solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b.

When the launch control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15 based on a touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows current to flow to the ball feed solenoid 11b and the launch solenoid 28b, and when it detects a change in the rotation angle of the launch handle 15 based on a detection signal from the launch volume 15b, it drives the ball feed solenoid 11b and drives the launch solenoid 28b to launch the game ball with a launch strength that corresponds to the rotation angle of the launch handle 15.

The launch solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the launch member 28 is directly connected to the rotating shaft. When the rotating shaft rotates, the launch member 28 rotates and launches the game ball A. The operation of the launch solenoid 28b is set to approximately 99.9 (times/minute) based on the frequency based on the output period of the crystal oscillator provided in the launch control unit 122, so the number of game balls launched per minute is approximately 99.9 (pieces/minute). In other words, a game ball is launched approximately every 0.6 seconds.

The performance control board 130 is a slave control board (slave control means) that controls the performance related to the game (performed in the gaming machine 1) based on the reception of performance commands from the main control board 110. The performance control board 130 is equipped with a sub-CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub-ROM 130b that stores a performance control program, a performance control unit 130m that includes a sub-RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, a display control unit 140 that controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), and the sound output device 9 (speaker), a lamp control unit 150 that controls the frame lighting device 10, the button drive device 17b, the board drive device 75, and the board lighting device 76, and input and output ports for performance control.

The sub-CPU 130a receives an operating clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the performance control program stored in the sub-ROM 130b, and performs calculation processing related to the performance while using the sub-RAM 130c as a work area, thereby controlling (outputting data and commands) the various control units (display control unit 140, lamp control unit 150) to execute various performances in response to commands received from the main control board 110 and input signals from the performance button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a.

The input port of the performance control board 130 is connected to the performance button detection switch 17a, the cross key detection switch 19a, and a button position detection sensor (not shown). When the performance button detection switch 17a inputs a performance button detection signal indicating that the performance button 17 has been operated, or when the cross key detection switch 19a inputs a cross key detection signal (up button detection signal, left button detection signal, down button detection signal, right button detection signal) indicating that the cross key 19 has been operated, the performance control board 130 performs processing to execute a performance according to the detection signal.

The display control unit 140 receives commands from the performance control unit 130m and controls the first image display device 70 (main LCD) and the second image display device 71 (sub LCD) to display a specified image, and controls the audio output device 9 to output a specified sound.

The display control unit 140 includes a general control unit 141 that performs general control of image display and audio output based on reception of a performance control command from the performance control unit 130m, an image control unit 145 (VDP) that controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 based on reception of a display control command (display list) from the general control unit 141, a CGROM 146 in which image data and the like are stored, an audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) that controls the audio output device 9 based on reception of an audio control command from the general control unit 141, and an audio ROM 149 in which audio data and the like are stored.

The overall control unit 141 includes an overall CPU 141a that performs calculation processing, an overall ROM 141b in which an overall control program is stored, an overall RAM 141c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports to which an image control unit 145 (VDP) and an audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) are connected.

The general CPU 141a receives an operating clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the general control program stored in the general ROM 141b, and performs calculation processing related to the performance while using the general RAM 141c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing for generating display control commands (display lists) that indicate the performance images to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 and sending them to the display control unit 140, and control processing for generating audio control commands that indicate the performance sounds to be output from the audio output device 9 and sending them to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI).

The VRAM 143 provided in the image control unit 145 (VDP) has a display list storage area that temporarily stores the display list output from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142a), a frame buffer area corresponding to the first image display device 70 (main LCD) and the second image display device 71 (sub LCD), etc.

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying images, and further includes a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area alternate between being a "drawing frame buffer" and a "display frame buffer" each time drawing begins.

Therefore, based on instructions (display list) from the general control unit 141, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 in the "drawing frame buffer" in the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147, reads the drawing data from the "display frame buffer" in the frame buffer area, generates video signals (RGB signals, etc.) based on the read drawing data, and outputs them to the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) to display various images.

The image control unit 145 (VDP) receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, and divides the operating clock to generate synchronization signals (horizontal and vertical synchronization signals) for synchronizing with the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), which are output to the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal). In this embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 seconds = approximately 33 ms) so that 30 drawings (image displays) are performed per second, but it may be 60 fps (1/60 seconds = approximately 16.6 ms) so that 60 drawings (image displays) are performed per second.

The audio control unit 148 is connected to the audio output device 9, and controls the audio output device 9 to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE), etc. in accordance with the display of the first image display device 70 (main LCD) and the second image display device 71 (sub LCD) based on various performance data (including commands) sent from the performance control unit 130m.

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs calculation processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores the lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs calculation processing related to the performance while using the lamp RAM 150c as a work area, thereby controlling (outputting data and commands) the controlled devices such as various lighting devices and various driving devices to perform a specified performance in accordance with the performance instruction commands received from the performance control unit 130m.

The input/output ports of the lamp control unit are connected to the frame lighting device 10, the button driving device 17b, the board lighting device 76, and the sub-information display device 80, and based on various performance data (including commands) sent from the performance control unit 130m (sub-CPU 130a), it controls the lighting of various LEDs in the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 76, and the sub-information display device 80, and controls the driving of drive sources such as the motors and solenoids of the button driving device 17b and the board driving device 75.

The power supply board 160 generates the main power supply (operating power supply) required for the operation of the gaming machine 1 from a power supply supplied from outside the gaming machine 1, and supplies it to the gaming machine 1 (the main control board 110, the payout control board 120, the performance control board 130, and various electronic components). The power supply board 160 is equipped with a power interruption detection circuit 162 that detects whether a power interruption (power outage) has occurred and outputs a power interruption detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of a power interruption (power outage), and a backup power supply circuit 163 that supplies backup power to the main control board 110 in the event of a power interruption (power outage).

The power supply board 160 also has a power switch that can be operated by an arcade staff member to switch between an ON state that supplies main power to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, presentation control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state that stops the supply. When the power switch is turned ON, the supply of main power begins and the gaming machine 1 starts operating. Note that the supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained even when the power switch is turned OFF.

The power interruption detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, outputs a power interruption detection signal to the main control board 110. More specifically, when the power interruption detection signal becomes high level, the main CPU 110a enters an operable state, and when the power interruption detection signal becomes low level, the main CPU 110a enters an inoperative state.

The backup power circuit 163 is equipped with a capacitor that stores electricity when the gaming machine is energized, and in the event of a power outage (blackout), the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is supplied to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. This allows the memory contents of the main RAM 110c and the payout RAM 121c to be retained even in the event of a power outage (blackout), and after recovery from the power outage (blackout), the game control state can be restored to the state before the power outage (blackout). In addition, a backup power source may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130.

(Explanation of game state)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In this embodiment, there are a "low probability state" and a "high probability state" as states related to the jackpot determination of the special symbol, and there are a "non-time-saving state" and a "time-saving state" as states related to the movable member 48 of the second starting hole 47.

In this embodiment, the following three game states are provided.
(1) A low probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state) that is a "low probability state" and a "non-time-saving state"
(2) A low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state) that is a "low probability state" and a "time-saving state"
(3) A high probability time-saving gaming state (probability change gaming state) which is a "high probability state" and a "time-saving state"

The gaming state when the game is started, i.e., the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1, is set to the "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state." In this embodiment, the "low-probability time-saving gaming state" and the "high-probability time-saving gaming state" are sometimes referred to as "specific gaming states" because they are gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

In this embodiment, a "low probability state" refers to a gaming state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is set low at approximately 1/300 when the jackpot determination for a special symbol is performed on the condition that a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47, for example, when the setting value (of the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination), which is the stage of the advantageous degree of the game, is "1." In contrast, a "high probability state" refers to a gaming state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is improved compared to the low probability state, and when the setting value is "1," the probability of winning a jackpot is set high at approximately 1/60.

Specifically, there are four setting values, from "1" to "4." When the setting value is "1," the probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability state is approximately 1/300, and the probability of winning a jackpot in a high probability state is approximately 1/60. When the setting value is "2," the probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability state is approximately 1/295, and the probability of winning a jackpot in a high probability state is approximately 1/59. When the setting value is "3," the probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability state is approximately 1/290, and the probability of winning a jackpot in a high probability state is approximately 1/58. When the setting value is "4," the probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability state is approximately 1/285, and the probability of winning a jackpot in a high probability state is approximately 1/57.

Therefore, it is easier to win a jackpot in a "high probability state" than in a "low probability state." Also, the state changes from the low probability state to the high probability state after the jackpot game described below is completed. Therefore, in this embodiment, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the high probability state is called a "variable jackpot." Also, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the low probability state is called a "normal jackpot."

In this embodiment, the "non-time-saving state" refers to a game state in which, in a winning lottery for a normal symbol, which is held on the condition that a gaming ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 44, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is set longer than in the "time-saving state," and the opening time of the second start hole 47 when a winning lottery is won is likely to be set shorter. For example, when a gaming ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44, a winning lottery for a normal symbol is held, and the normal symbol is displayed fluctuatingly on the normal symbol display 62, but the normal symbol is displayed stopped, for example, 30 seconds after the fluctuating display begins. Then, if the lottery result is a winning lottery, the second start hole 47 is controlled to be in an open state for, for example, 0.2 seconds after the normal symbol is displayed stopped.

In contrast, the "time-saving state" refers to a game state in which the average fluctuation time of the normal pattern corresponding to the lottery result is set shorter than that of the "non-time-saving state" in the normal pattern winning lottery, which is held on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44, and the opening time of the second start hole 47 when a winning lottery is won is set to, for example, 2.5 seconds, longer than that of the "non-time-saving state". Furthermore, in the "non-time-saving state", the probability of winning in the normal pattern winning lottery is set low, for example, 1/128, and in the "time-saving state", the probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery is set high, for example, 127/128. Therefore, in the "time-saving state", when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, the second start hole 47 is more easily controlled to the open state than in the "non-time-saving state". As a result, in the "time-saving state", the player can play advantageously in a state where it is difficult to consume game balls.

In the embodiment, the "time-saving state" is set to be more favorable than the "non-time-saving state" in terms of the normal symbol change time, the opening time of the second start port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery. However, the "time-saving state" may be set to be more favorable in terms of only one of the normal symbol change time, the opening time of the second start port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery. In addition, in the non-time-saving state, the probability of winning in the normal symbol winning lottery may be, for example, 0/128.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot in a high probability state is 5 times (regardless of the set value) the probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability state. The probability of determining a jackpot is not limited to 5 times, and may be set to any value up to 10 times, such as 3 times or 8 times.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot determination is made so that a small prize, which is less advantageous to the player than a big prize, cannot be won, but it may be made so that, for example, there is a probability of about 1/100 of winning a small prize. In this case, it is preferable to make the probability of a small prize the same regardless of whether the setting value is "1" to "4."

In addition, the larger the set value, the more advantageous it is for the player (the higher the probability of winning the jackpot), but conversely, it may be set so that the smaller the set value, the more advantageous it is for the player (the higher the probability of winning the jackpot).

Also, the probability of determining that a jackpot occurs in a low probability state and/or a high probability state may be the same for all setting values (1 to 4), or, for example, the probability of determining that a jackpot occurs in a low probability state and/or a high probability state may be the same for two or three setting values (1 and 2, 1 to 3, etc.). Also, although the setting values in this embodiment are set to four levels, 1 to 4, they are not limited to four levels and may be more or less than four levels.

Next, we will explain the details of the various tables stored in main ROM 110b with reference to Figures 10 to 13.

(Big win determination table)
Figure 10 (a) is a jackpot determination table for the first special pattern for determining (jackpot determination) special pattern determination information obtained based on the entry (scoring) of the gaming ball into the first starting hole 45, and Figure 10 (b) is a jackpot determination table for the second special pattern for determining (jackpot determination) special pattern determination information obtained based on the entry (scoring) of the gaming ball into the second starting hole 47.

As shown in Figures 10(a)-(b), the jackpot determination table associates the current setting value, the current probability state, the random number value for jackpot determination, and the jackpot determination result (jackpot, miss), and for reference, the rightmost column lists the approximate probability of winning in the case of a "jackpot."

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 10(a) or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10(b), and determines whether it is a "jackpot" or a "miss" based on the current setting value, the probability state, and the random number value for jackpot determination.

For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 10(a), when the set value is "1" and normal play is in progress, 200 random numbers for jackpot determination from "100" to "299" are determined as "jackpots." Any random number other than those determined as jackpots is determined as a "miss."

The special symbol determination information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 45 is stored in the first special symbol determination information reserve memory area of the main RAM 110c, and the special symbol determination information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 47 is stored in the second special symbol determination information reserve memory area of the main RAM 110c. When a jackpot determination is made, the special symbol determination information stored in the first special symbol determination information reserve memory area or the second special symbol determination information reserve memory area is shifted to the special symbol determination information storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the shifted special symbol determination information is used to make a jackpot determination.

The first special pattern determination information reservation memory area is divided into a first storage section to a fourth storage section, and reservation icons corresponding to the special pattern determination information stored in the first storage section to the fourth storage section are displayed in the first display section 70B1 to the fourth display section 70B4 of the first reservation icon display area 70B, respectively. The second special pattern determination information reservation memory area is divided into a first storage section to a fourth storage section, and reservation icons corresponding to the special pattern determination information stored in the first storage section to the fourth storage section are displayed in the first display section 70D1 to the fourth display section 70D4 of the second reservation icon display area 70D, respectively.

(Special symbol determination table)
FIG. 11(a) is a special pattern determination table for a jackpot for determining the type of special pattern when a jackpot is determined, and FIG. 11(b) is a special pattern determination table for a miss for determining the type of special pattern when a miss is determined.

As shown in Figures 11(a)-(b), the special symbol determination table associates the type of special symbol to be stopped, a random number value for special symbol determination, the special symbol determination result, the stop special symbol data corresponding to the determination result, and the special symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result.

The special symbols "00" and "10" are the losing special symbols that do not trigger a jackpot game. The special symbols "01" and "04" are the jackpot special symbols that trigger the first jackpot game, the special symbols "02" and "05" are the jackpot special symbols that trigger the second jackpot game, and the special symbol "03" is the jackpot special symbol that triggers the third jackpot game.

In the "first jackpot game", the large prize winning hole 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, and then the large prize winning hole 50 is closed for two seconds in a round game that is executed up to six times. Note that in the round game, if a specified number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the large prize winning hole 50 even before the opening time has elapsed, one round game ends. In addition, after the first jackpot game ends, the game is set to a low probability non-time-saving game state (time-saving game state) until the special pattern variation display is performed 100 times.

In the "second jackpot game", the big prize opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, and then the big prize opening is closed for 2 seconds. This round game is played up to 10 times. After the second jackpot game ends, the machine is set to a high probability time-saving game state (probability change game state) until the special pattern variation display is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, based on the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability game state, the next jackpot is almost certain.

In the "third jackpot game", the second jackpot opening 56 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, and then the opening is closed for two seconds in a round game that is played up to four times. After the third jackpot game ends, the game is set to a high probability time-saving game state (probability change game state) until the special symbol variation display is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, based on the probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability game state, the next jackpot is almost guaranteed.

Note that one losing special symbol is associated with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but multiple losing special symbols may be associated with at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in any one of Figures 11(a) to (b), and determines the type of special symbol, the special symbol stop data, and the special symbol designation command based on the type of special symbol to be stopped and the random number value for special symbol determination, and transmits the special symbol designation command to the performance control board 130.

The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 is that the type of the big win special symbol and the type of the losing special symbol are the same and do not change depending on the setting value. This allows the player to play with confidence without complicating the gameplay.

The second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 is that the selection ratios of various special jackpot symbols and various losing symbols are constant and do not change depending on the setting value. This prevents the player's degree of advantage from changing drastically depending on the setting value, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

(Special chart fluctuation pattern determination table)
FIG. 12(a) is a special pattern change pattern determination table for the non-time-saving state for determining the change pattern of the special pattern in the non-time-saving state, and FIG. 12(b) is a special pattern change pattern determination table for the time-saving state for determining the change pattern of the special pattern in the time-saving state.

As shown in FIG. 12, the special pattern change pattern determination table associates the type of special pattern (starting hole) that performs the change display, the jackpot determination result, the special pattern determination result (stop special pattern data), a random number value for reach determination, the first special pattern reserved number (U1) or the second special pattern reserved number (U2), a random number value for special pattern change pattern determination, the special pattern change pattern as the determination result, the special pattern change time, and a special pattern change pattern designation command that indicates the special pattern change pattern.

Therefore, a "special pattern change pattern" can be said to be something that can specify the type of special pattern, the result of the jackpot determination, the type of special pattern, and the change time of the special pattern.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12, and determines the special symbol variation pattern based on the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result (stop special symbol data), the random number value for reach determination, the first special symbol reserved number (U1) or the second special symbol reserved number (U2), and the random number value for special symbol variation pattern determination, and transmits a special symbol variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern to the performance control board 130.

In addition, as described below, the performance control board 130 determines the content (performance mode) of the variable performance accompanied by the variable display of the performance pattern 70a according to the variable pattern designation command (jackpot determination result, special pattern determination result, etc.), so that the rightmost column of the special pattern determination table shown in Figure 12 lists the performance contents that can be executed in the variable performance for reference.

The effect contents shown in the fluctuation pattern determination table in FIG. 12 are "normal fluctuation," "shortened fluctuation," "ultra-shortened fluctuation," and "long fluctuation," which are effects in which the three effect patterns 70a fluctuate independently at high speed and stop without reaching a reach.

"Reach" refers to an effect that makes the player expect a big win game to be played, such as when some of the combinations of effect symbols 70a that indicate a big win temporarily stop and other effect symbols 70a change. For example, when the combination of three effect symbols 70a, "777," is set as the combination of effect symbols 70a that indicate a big win, the same effect symbol 70a temporarily stops at "7" in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect symbols 70a change in the center area.

Note that a "temporary stop" refers to a state in which the performance pattern 70a slightly shakes or deforms, making it appear to the player that the performance pattern 70a is stopped (but is not completely stopped).

"Normal reach" refers to a reach effect in which the same effect symbol 70a temporarily stops in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect symbol 70a fluctuates in the center area, and is the reach effect with the lowest expectation of a jackpot.

In addition, "SP reach" and "special SP reach" are super reach effects that have a higher chance of winning than a normal reach, and are executed after an advanced effect is executed from the normal reach effect. For example, the two effect patterns 70a are reduced in size from their normal size and move to the top of the screen of the first image display device 70 (a pattern change effect is executed in which the effect patterns 70a forming the reach state become smaller than their normal size), and a special reach effect is executed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. Note that a "special SP reach" executes a more special effect than an "SP reach".

"SPSP Reach" and "SPSP "7" Reach" are special reach effects that have a higher chance of winning than a Super Reach, and are executed after a Normal Reach effect or a Super Reach effect. For example, an extension effect is executed from a normal reach effect, and then the three effect symbols 70a are reduced to their minimum size and moved to the upper left corner of the screen of the first image display device 70 (a symbol change effect is executed in which the effect symbols 70a forming the reach state become smaller than normal size), and a more special reach effect than an "SP Reach" is executed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. In an "SPSP Reach", a reach effect is executed with effect symbols 70a other than "7", and in an "SPSP "7" Reach", a reach effect is executed with the symbol "7".

The "full rotation reach" is a reach that guarantees a jackpot, and is executed after a normal reach performance. For example, an advanced performance is executed from a normal reach performance, and then the three performance patterns 70a all move at a slow speed while being identical, and a more special reach performance (a reach performance that guarantees a jackpot) than the "SPSP reach" or "SPSP "7" reach" is performed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70.

In this embodiment, the expected probability of winning a jackpot related to reach effects increases in the following order: normal reach effect < SP reach effect < SPSP reach effect < full rotation reach effect (guaranteed jackpot).

When a shortened or ultra-shortened variation is performed, the three performance symbols 70a start to change (scroll) at the same time in a first start display mode, and the three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop at the same time in a first stop display mode. When other variation effects (normal variation, long variation, normal reach, SP reach, special SP reach, SPSP reach, SPSP "7" reach, full rotation reach) are performed, the three performance symbols 70a start to change (scroll) at the second start display mode, and the three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop at the second stop display mode.

The first feature of the special chart variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 is that the type of special chart variation pattern that is determined is the same and does not change depending on the setting value. This makes it difficult to determine the setting value from the special chart variation pattern, making it possible to provide fair play.

The second feature of the special chart variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 is that the selection ratio of each special chart variation pattern is the same and does not change depending on the setting value. This makes it difficult to determine the setting value from the special chart variation pattern, making it possible to provide fair play.

The third feature of the special symbol change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 is that when the number of reserved first special symbols increases to 2 or 3 during non-time-saving state, shortened change is more likely to be determined as the change pattern of the first special symbol, whereas shortened change is not determined as the change pattern of the second special symbol even if the number of reserved second special symbols increases to 2 or 3 during non-time-saving state. By doing this, it is possible to increase the time efficiency (execution efficiency) of the special symbol change display when hitting left compared to when hitting right during non-time-saving state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the special symbol change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 is that even if the number of reserved first special symbols increases from 1 to 3 during the time-saving state, the (super) shortened change is not determined as the change pattern of the first special symbol, whereas if the number of reserved second special symbols increases from 1 to 3 during the time-saving state, the (long) shortened change is more likely to be determined as the change pattern of the second special symbol. By doing this, it is possible to increase the time efficiency (execution efficiency) of the special symbol change display when hitting from the right compared to when hitting from the left during the time-saving state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 is that a fluctuation display (fluctuation presentation) with the same fluctuation pattern is more likely to be executed (there are fewer types of fluctuation patterns executed) when a missing fluctuation display of the first special symbol (first fluctuation presentation resulting in a miss) is executed during the time-saving state than when a missing fluctuation display of the first special symbol (first fluctuation presentation resulting in a miss) is executed during the non-time-saving state. In this way, it is possible to improve the presentation effect during the non-time-saving state in which the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (first fluctuation presentation) is more likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 is that a fluctuation display (fluctuation presentation) with the same fluctuation pattern is more likely to be executed (there are fewer types of fluctuation patterns executed) when the first special symbol's jackpot fluctuation display (first fluctuation presentation resulting in a jackpot) is executed during the time-saving state than when the first special symbol's jackpot fluctuation display (first fluctuation presentation resulting in a jackpot) is executed during the non-time-saving state. In this way, it is possible to improve the presentation effect during the non-time-saving state in which the first special symbol's fluctuation display (first fluctuation presentation) is more likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 is that a fluctuation display (fluctuation presentation) with the same fluctuation pattern is more likely to be executed (there are fewer types of fluctuation patterns executed) when a miss fluctuation display of the first special symbol (first fluctuation presentation resulting in a miss) is executed during the time-saving state than when a miss fluctuation display of the second special symbol (second fluctuation presentation resulting in a miss) is executed during the time-saving state. In this way, it is possible to improve the presentation effect during the time-saving state in which a miss fluctuation display of the second special symbol (second fluctuation presentation) is more likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 is that a fluctuation display (fluctuation presentation) with the same fluctuation pattern is more likely to be executed (there are fewer types of fluctuation patterns executed) when a jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol (first fluctuation presentation resulting in a jackpot) is executed during the time-saving state than when a jackpot fluctuation display of the second special symbol (second fluctuation presentation resulting in a jackpot) is executed during the time-saving state. In this way, it is possible to improve the presentation effect during the time-saving state in which a fluctuation display of the second special symbol (second fluctuation presentation) is more likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 is that there are more types of fluctuation patterns that are executed when a missing fluctuation display of the second special symbol (second fluctuation display resulting in a miss) is executed during the time-saving state than when a missing fluctuation display of the first special symbol (first fluctuation display resulting in a miss) is executed during the time-saving state. In this way, it is possible to improve the presentation effect during the time-saving state in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (second fluctuation display) is more likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The tenth feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 is that the difference between the average fluctuation time when the number of reserved first special symbols is at its maximum (here, "3") and the average fluctuation time when the number of reserved first special symbols is at its maximum (here, "3") and at its predetermined number (e.g., "1") less than the maximum number when the first special symbol is displayed as a missing fluctuation (the second fluctuation performance resulting in a missing) during the non-time-saving state is smaller than the difference between the average fluctuation time when the number of reserved first special symbols is at its maximum (here, "3") and at its predetermined number (e.g., "1") less than the maximum number when the first special symbol is displayed as a missing fluctuation (the first fluctuation performance resulting in a missing) during the non-time-saving state (strictly speaking, when the first special symbol is displayed as a missing fluctuation during the time-saving state, there is no difference in the average fluctuation time depending on the number of reserved first special symbols). By doing so, it is possible to improve the performance effect during the non-time-saving state and increase the interest in the game.

The eleventh feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 is that the difference between the average fluctuation time when the number of reserved first special symbols is the maximum (here, "3") and the average fluctuation time when the number of reserved first special symbols is a predetermined number (e.g., "1") smaller than ...

When executing a miss-changing display of the first special symbol during the time-saving state (the first change performance resulting in a miss), a difference may be set in the average change time depending on the number of reserved first special symbols. Specifically, when the number of reserved first special symbols is "0" or "1", a long change with a change time of 12 seconds may be executed, and when it is "2" or "3", a normal change with a change time of 10 seconds may be executed. Even in this case, it is preferable that the difference between the average change time when the number of reserved first special symbols is the maximum number (here, "3") and the average change time when the number of reserved first special symbols is a predetermined number less than the maximum number (e.g., "1") when executing a miss-changing display of the first special symbol during the time-saving state is smaller than the difference between the average change time when the number of reserved first special symbols is the maximum number (here, "3") and the average change time when the number of reserved first special symbols is a predetermined number less than the maximum number (e.g., "1").

In addition, when executing a jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol (first fluctuation performance resulting in a jackpot) whether in a non-time-saving state or in a time-saving state, a difference may be set in the average fluctuation time depending on the number of reserved first special symbols. Even in this case, it is preferable to make the difference between the average fluctuation time when the number of reserved first special symbols is at its maximum (here, "3") during the time-saving state and the average time when it is a predetermined number less than the maximum number (e.g., "1") smaller than the difference between the average fluctuation time when the number of reserved first special symbols is at its maximum (here, "3") during a non-time-saving state and the average fluctuation time when it is a predetermined number less than the maximum number (e.g., "1").

The twelfth feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 is that when a first special symbol jackpot fluctuation display (first fluctuation performance resulting in a jackpot) is executed during the time-saving state, it is executed by a fluctuation pattern with a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern with the maximum fluctuation time executed when a first special symbol jackpot fluctuation display is executed during a non-time-saving state or when a second special symbol jackpot fluctuation display is executed during a time-saving state. In this way, it is possible to improve the performance effect during a non-time-saving state in which the first special symbol fluctuation display is likely to be executed and during a time-saving state in which the second special symbol fluctuation display is likely to be executed, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

(Pre-judgment table)
Figure 13(a) is a pre-judgment table for the non-time-saving state for pre-judging (reading ahead) special chart judgment information obtained based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 during the non-time-saving state, and Figure 13(b) is a pre-judgment table for the time-saving state for pre-judging (reading ahead) special chart judgment information obtained based on the winning of a game ball into the second starting hole 47 during the time-saving state.

As shown in FIG. 13, the advance judgment table associates the type of special symbol (starting hole), the jackpot judgment result, the special symbol judgment result, the random number value for reach judgment, the random number value for special symbol fluctuation pattern judgment, the special symbol planned fluctuation pattern as the judgment result, and the look-ahead specification command indicating the special symbol planned fluctuation pattern.

Therefore, the "special symbol planned change pattern" can be said to be something that can identify the type of special symbol, the result of the jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the special symbol change pattern that is planned to be executed.

The main CPU 110a refers to the advance determination table shown in FIG. 13, and determines the planned special symbol variation pattern based on the random number value for determining a jackpot, the random number value for determining a special symbol, the random number value for determining a reach, and the random number value for determining a special symbol variation pattern, and transmits a look-ahead command corresponding to the planned special symbol variation pattern to the performance control board 130.

Next, we will use a flowchart to explain how the game progresses on gaming machine 1.

(Main processing of the main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 14. Fig. 14 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board 110. This main processing is performed when a system reset, which occurs when a power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, is input to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S1, performs initial CPU settings such as setting the built-in registers in step S2, and performs processing to wait for the startup of other boards in step S3. Specifically, it waits for one second for the payout control board 120 and performance control board 130 to start up so that no commands from the main control board 110 are missed.

In step S4, the main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S5, transmits a launch permission command to the payout control board 120. This causes the payout control unit 121 to carry out processing to permit the launch device 26 to launch game balls.

In step S6, the main CPU 110a determines whether a backup flag indicating that power has been restored has been saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag has been saved, it is assumed that power has been restored and the process proceeds to step S7. If the backup flag has not been saved, it is assumed that power has been turned on for the first time and the process proceeds to step S8.

In step S7, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) for the game RWM area (excluding the setting value area) of the main RAM 110c.

In step S8, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are ON. If a setting change operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S9 to transition to setting change mode, and if a setting change operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S10.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process in step S9. Specifically, it displays a status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 indicating that the setting is being changed or confirmed, displays the current setting value saved in the setting value area of the gaming RWM area on one of the 7-segment LEDs of the information display 113, and transmits a setting change command to the performance control board 130.

Furthermore, each time the RWM clear switch 111a is operated, the set value is changed (updated) within the range of "1" to "4" and the updated set value is displayed on the 7-segment LED. When a setting confirmation operation is performed in which the setting key switch 112a is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, the set value is confirmed and the changed (updated) set value is saved in the set value area, the display of the set value on the information display 113 is terminated, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 is terminated, and processing is performed to end the setting change mode.

When the performance control board 130 receives the setting change command, it performs processing to execute a setting change notification to notify the user that the setting value is being changed. Specifically, the image display devices 70, 71 may display a setting change in progress screen indicating that the setting value is being changed, and the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 may be all lit up in a specified light color (e.g., white) throughout the setting change. The audio output device 9 may output a setting change notification sound ("setting change in progress") indicating that the setting is being changed.

In step S10, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it determines whether the checksum saved in the gaming RWM area matches the checksum calculated in step S7. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the gaming RWM area), processing proceeds to step S11. If the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the gaming RWM area), processing proceeds to step S12, assuming that the control state before the power failure cannot be restored normally.

If the backup flag has not been saved, i.e. when the power is turned on for the first time, the checksum will be determined to be abnormal.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the setting value in the setting value area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the setting value in the setting value area is within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S13, and if it is determined that the setting value in the setting value area is not within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S12.

In step S12, the main CPU 110a performs irrecoverable error processing. Specifically, it displays error information "E" indicating an irrecoverable error on the information display 113, sends an irrecoverable error designation command to the performance control board 130 indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred, then sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interruption, clears the output port, and then outputs an irrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an irrecoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, and performs processing to wait until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, the performance control board 130 performs processing to execute an irrecoverable error notification.

An "irrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is no longer performed (there is no transition to game control), and it cannot be released unless a setting change process is performed. Therefore, when an irrecoverable error occurs, the error will not be released even if the power switch on the power supply board 160 is turned OFF and then turned ON without a setting change operation; it is necessary to turn the power switch ON while performing a setting change operation. Note that during an irrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from the various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

In the previous version, the "unrecoverable error" was set to not be cleared unless a setting change process was performed, but it may also be set to be cleared when an RWM clear is performed without a setting change process.

An "irrecoverable error notification" is a notification to make the user aware that an irrecoverable error has occurred, and involves displaying an irrecoverable error screen on the image display devices 70, 71 ("This is an irrecoverable error. Please change the settings"), lighting the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 in a specified light color (e.g. red) until the power is turned off, and outputting an irrecoverable error sound ("This is an irrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) from the audio output device 9 indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred until the power is turned off.
In addition, the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the image display devices 70, 71, and the board lighting device 76 may be collectively referred to as the "performance device."

In step S13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If an RWM clear operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S14 to execute RWM clear, and if an RWM clear operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S16.

The main CPU 110a performs an RWM clear process in step S14. Specifically, it performs a process to initialize the game control state (initialize everything except the setting value area of the game RWM area).

In step S15, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on command to the payout control board 120 and the presentation control board 130, indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a low-probability non-time-limited game state as the normal game state), and moves processing to step S21. As a result, the presentation control board 130 performs processing to execute a power-on notification.

The "power-on notification" is a notification to make the player aware that the game control state has been initialized, and involves displaying the initial screen (background image and initial performance pattern "135") when the power is turned on on the image display devices 70, 71, lighting up the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 in a predetermined light color (e.g., red) for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 60 seconds), and outputting from the audio output device 9 a power-on notification sound ("RWM has been cleared" + buzzer sound) indicating that the RWM area has been initialized for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds).
In addition, in the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, a display notifying that the RWM has been cleared may be displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the setting key switch 112a is ON. If a setting confirmation operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S17 to transition to setting confirmation mode, and if a setting confirmation operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S18 to return the game control state to the state before the power was turned off.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S17. Specifically, the status confirmation display 68 displays a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed or confirmed, and one of the 7-segment LEDs on the information display 113 displays the current setting value saved in the setting value area of the gaming RWM area, and transmits a setting confirmation command to the performance control board 130.

Furthermore, when a confirmation end operation is performed in which the setting key switch 112a is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, the display of the setting value on the information display 113 is ended, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 is ended, and processing is performed to end the setting confirmation mode.

In addition, when the performance control board 130 receives the setting confirmation command, it performs processing to execute a setting confirmation notification to notify that a setting confirmation is being performed. Specifically, a setting confirmation screen indicating that a setting confirmation is being performed may be displayed on the image display devices 70, 71, and the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 may be fully lit in a specified light color (e.g., white) during the setting confirmation. In addition, the audio output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound ("The setting value is being confirmed") indicating that a setting confirmation is being performed.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a clears (clears to 0) the backup flag and checksum saved in the game RWM area, and sets the game RWM area when power is restored. This returns (restores) the game progress state (control state) to the state before the power was cut off, making it possible to resume play from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S19, the main CPU 110a sends a power restoration command to the presentation control board 130, indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power outage occurred. This causes the presentation control board 130 to perform processing to end the setting confirmation notification, etc., described below, and execute the power restoration notification.

A "power restoration notification" is a notification to make the player aware that the game control state has returned to the state before the power was cut off, and involves displaying the initial screen at the time of power restoration (background image and initial performance pattern "135") on the image display devices 70, 71, lighting up the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 in a predetermined light color (e.g. blue) for a predetermined period of time (e.g. 60 seconds), and outputting a power restoration notification sound ("Power has been restored" + buzzer sound) from the audio output device 9 for a predetermined period of time (e.g. 30 seconds) indicating that power has been restored (from a power outage).
In addition, in notifying the restoration of power, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, a display notifying that the power has been restored may be displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a transmits other commands (a special chart reservation number designation command indicating the first special chart reservation number (U1) and the second special chart reservation number (U2), a regular chart reservation number designation command indicating the regular chart reservation number (G), etc.) to the performance control board 130. This enables the performance control board 130 to grasp the special chart reservation number and the regular chart reservation number, and performs processing to display the first reservation icon and the second reservation icon on the first image display device 70.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the performance control board 130. This allows the performance control board 130 to grasp the current setting value. Note that this setting value designation command may be transmitted to the performance control board 130 before the power-on designation command or power-restoration designation command is transmitted. The setting value designation command may also be transmitted each time the display of the special pattern begins to change, or each time a jackpot game begins.

In step S22, the main CPU 110a starts the CTC (counter timer circuit) to generate a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), and in step S23, allows all interrupts.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for special pattern determination, which are used to determine the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the special pattern, and in step S25, performs an initial value random number update process to update the initial value random number value for jackpot determination, the initial value random number value for special pattern determination, the initial value random number value for hit determination, and the initial value random number value for normal pattern determination.

Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether a power interruption (blackout) has occurred in step S26. Specifically, it determines whether a power interruption detection signal has been input from the power interruption detection circuit of the power supply board 160, and if a power interruption detection signal has not been input, it proceeds to step S24, and if a power interruption detection signal has been input, it proceeds to step S27.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a sets an interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, in step S28, it clears the output port, in step S29, it calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c and saves it in the game RWM area, in step S30, it saves a backup flag in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, in step S31, it prohibits RAM access, and waits until the power supply voltage is completely cut off.

In this way, multiple conditions (operations) are set for setting change operations, making it difficult to change settings, which helps to prevent fraudulent activity and improves the security of the gaming machine.

In addition, by having more conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation than for the RWM clear operation or the setting check operation, it is possible to increase security for the event in which fraudulent activity is most likely to occur (setting changes), and to effectively prevent fraudulent activity.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal, an unrecoverable error process is executed to stop the game from progressing, which prevents the gaming machine from performing unexpected operations that cause trouble for gaming facilities and players, thereby improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

In addition, if the value in the setting value area is not within the appropriate range, in other words, if the previous power outage may have occurred while the settings were being changed, an unrecoverable error process is executed and game progress is halted even if the checksum is normal. This prevents game play from progressing with a setting value that the gaming facility did not intend, making it possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

In addition, when the settings are being changed (in setting change mode) or confirmed (in setting confirmation mode), it is possible to know that the settings are being changed on the front (front side) of the gaming machine 1 by checking the status confirmation display 68, image display devices 70, 71, frame lighting device 10, and board lighting device 76, and on the back (rear side) it is possible to know that the settings are being changed by checking the information display 113. In other words, it is possible to know whether the settings are being changed from either the front (front side) or the back (rear side) of the gaming machine 1.

The conditions for the setting change operation, RWM clear operation, and setting confirmation operation may include that the open detection switch 31a is in the ON state. This increases the number of conditions, making it possible to prevent fraudulent activities and further improve the security of the gaming machine.

In addition, if it is determined that there is no backup flag (this is the first time the power has been turned on) and that no setting change operation has been performed, then if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in step S10, an unrecoverable error process is executed. However, at the point where it is determined that there is no backup flag, the game program may initialize (clear to 0) the game RWM area, save the initial value "1" in the setting value area, and move to step S13.

In addition, if it is determined that there is a backup flag (power has been restored) and that no setting change operation has been performed, if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in the subsequent step S10, an unrecoverable error process is executed. However, at the point in time when it is determined that the checksum is abnormal, the game program may initialize (clear to 0) the game RWM area, save the initial value "1" in the setting value area, and move the process to step S13.

In addition, the power-on command and power restoration command are transmitted together with information indicating the current game status, but a game status command indicating the current game status may be transmitted after the power-on command or power restoration command is transmitted.

In addition, when a power outage occurs or when the power is turned on, the game program calculates a checksum for the game RWM area (excluding the setting value area) of the main RAM 110c, but the information program may also calculate the checksum. In this case, it is recommended that the calculated checksum be saved in the information RWM area.

In addition, when a power outage occurs or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the setting value area) is calculated, but it is also possible to calculate the checksum of the entire RWM area, or to calculate the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area separately, and transition to unrecoverable error processing if either checksum is abnormal.

In addition, a setting change command is sent when the setting change process starts, and a power-on command is sent after the setting change process ends, but a setting change start command may be sent instead of the setting change command, and a setting change end command may be sent instead of the power-on command. In this case, the setting change end command may be sent at the end of the setting change process, or after the setting change process ends.

In addition, when settings are changed, the RWM clear process is performed after the settings are changed, but the RWM clear process may be performed before the settings are changed.

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 15. Fig. 15 is a flow chart showing the timer interrupt process executed in the main control board 110 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the registers to a stack area, and in step S110, performs time control processing to update various timer counters such as updating the special symbol time counter, updating the special game timer counter such as the opening time of the special electric role, updating the normal symbol time counter, and updating the opening and closing time of the movable member 48. Specifically, it performs processing to subtract 1 from counters such as the special symbol time counter, special game timer counter, normal symbol time counter, start hole opening timer counter, and start hole closing timer counter.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a performs a specific random number update process to update the random number value for determining a jackpot, the random number value for determining a special symbol, the random number value for determining a special symbol variation pattern, the random number value for determining a win, the random number value for determining a normal symbol, and the random number value for determining a normal symbol variation pattern. Specifically, each random number value and the random number counter are updated by incrementing them by +1. If the incremented random number counter value exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (if the random number counter has completed one cycle), the random number counter is reset to 0, and if the random number counter has returned to the initial value for the cycle, the corresponding initial value random number value is set as a new cycle initial value and the random number value is updated.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a performs an initial random number value update process to update the initial random number value for determining a jackpot, the initial random number value for determining a special symbol, the initial random number value for determining a win, and the initial random number value for determining a normal symbol, in the same manner as in step S30.

In step S200, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been input to various switches such as the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the special winning hole detection switch 50a, the first starting hole detection switch 45a, the second starting hole detection switch 47a, the gate detection switch 44a, and the out ball detection switch 52a, and performs input control processing to set predetermined data if there has been input. This will be described in more detail later with reference to FIG. 16.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol special power control processing to determine the number of reserved special symbols (such as determining a big win), control the display of special symbols, control the opening and closing of the big prize opening 50 (opening and closing member 51), control the game state, etc. Details will be described later using FIG. 18.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs normal symbol and normal power control processing to determine the number of normal symbols stored (such as winning determination), control the display of normal symbols, and control the opening and closing of the second starting hole 47 (movable member 48).

The types of winning and losing normal symbols determined as a result of the normal symbol determination information performed in the normal symbol and normal power control process remain the same regardless of the setting value. This prevents the game from becoming too complicated, allowing players to play with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratios of various winning normal symbols and various losing normal symbols, which are determined as a result of the normal symbol determination information performed in the normal symbol/normal power control process, are fixed and do not change depending on the setting value. By doing this, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the setting value, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

Next, in step S500, the main CPU 110a performs a payout control process to send a payout status confirmation command to the payout control board 120 to check the payout status of the payout control board 120, and to send a payout number specification command corresponding to each winning port to the payout control board 120 by referring to the prize ball counters (3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter) described below. This causes the payout control board 120 to execute control to pay out prize balls from the payout device 100.

In step S600, the main CPU 110a performs magnetic/radio wave abnormality determination processing to determine whether a magnetic anomaly or radio wave abnormality has occurred based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and to transmit a magnetic anomaly error designation command or a radio wave abnormality error designation command to the performance control board 130. When the performance control board 130 receives a magnetic anomaly error designation command or a radio wave abnormality error designation command, it performs control to notify the magnetic anomaly error or the radio wave abnormality error.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a performs a data creation process to create data such as external information data (game information) output from the game information output terminal board 90, start opening/closing data output to the second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, large prize opening opening/closing data output to the large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, special pattern display data output to the first special pattern display 60 and the second special pattern display 61, normal pattern display data output to the normal pattern display 62, special pattern reserved display data output to the first special pattern reserved display 63 and the second special pattern reserved display 64, and normal pattern reserved display data output to the normal pattern reserved display 65.

In step S750, the main CPU 110a performs output control processing to execute a port output process for outputting signals such as the external information data, start gate opening/closing data, and large prize gate opening/closing data created in step S700, a display output process for outputting signals such as special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol reserved display data, and normal symbol reserved display data, a payout command transmission process for transmitting commands set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120, and a performance command transmission process for transmitting commands set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the performance control board 130.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs processing when an information program is called. Specifically, after prohibiting interrupts, the flag register is saved to the game RWM area, and processing is performed to call the target information program using the CALL command.

In step S810, the main CPU 110a performs game ball counting processing (information program). Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs processing to count the normal payout number, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of game balls into various winning ports (general winning port, large winning port, start port) during the normal game state, the normal out number, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a during the normal game state, and the total out number, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a regardless of the game state.

The total number of outs, number of payouts during normal play, and number of outs during normal play are game information that are not affected by changes to the setting value (are unrelated to the setting value), so by counting these, it is possible to calculate performance information that eliminates the influence of the setting value (the normal base value, described below), which can be useful in understanding the performance of gaming machine 1.

In step S830, the main CPU 110a performs a performance information calculation process (information program). Specifically, it calculates the normal base value ((normal payout number ÷ normal out number) × 100) in the current play section, which is divided by the total number of outs, and performs a process of saving the normal base value rounded off to the first decimal place in the first area of the base memory area set in the information RWM area.

The play section is updated every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000, and the base memory area is provided with a first area in which the normal base value for the current play section is stored, a second area for storing the normal base value for the play section one period before, a third area for storing the normal base value for the play section two periods before, and a fourth area for storing the normal base value for the play section three periods before, and the base values for four play sections including the current one are saved in each area.

In step S850, the main CPU 110a performs a performance display data setting process (information program). Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process of setting performance display data for displaying on the information display 113 the normal base values (performance information) for the four play intervals calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base memory area while switching them every five seconds.

In step S870, the main CPU 110a performs a test data creation process (information program). Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process to create test data (test information) to be output to the test equipment used when testing the gaming machine 1.

In step S880, the main CPU 110a performs output control processing (information program). Specifically, it performs display output processing to output signals such as the performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 above to various displays, and processing to output signals such as the test data created in step S870 above.

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs processing for returning to the game program. Specifically, it performs processing to return the flag register from the game RWM area, permit interrupts, and return to the game program.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a and ends this timer interrupt process.

In this way, since timer interrupts are not executed during the setting change process, RWM clear process, and setting confirmation process, the number of payouts and the number of outs are not counted, the performance information of the gaming machine is not calculated, and the performance information of the gaming machine is not displayed, which makes it possible to reduce the control burden on the main control board 110.

In the above, the performance information calculation process is performed in the timer interrupt process of the main control board 110, but it may be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. The game ball counting process may also be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. Specifically, it may be performed between step S25 and step S26.

(Input control processing of main control board)
The input control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 16. Fig. 16 is a flow chart showing the input control process in the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a performs a general prize opening detection switch input process in step S210. In this general prize opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the general prize opening detection switch 43a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the general prize opening 43. If there is no detection signal input from the general prize opening detection switch 43a, the process proceeds to step S220.

When a detection signal is input from the general prize opening detection switch 43a, the prize ball counter for the general prize opening used for prize balls (5 prize ball counter) is updated by adding data indicating 5 prize balls, and the prize ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the prize opening is updated by adding "1" (D←D+1), and then the general prize opening detection switch input process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs a special prize opening detection switch input process in step S220. In this special prize opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the special prize opening detection switch 50a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the special prize opening 50. If there is no detection signal input from the special prize opening detection switch 50a, the process proceeds to step S230.

When a detection signal from the large prize opening detection switch 50a is input, the prize ball counter for the large prize opening (15 prize ball counter) used for prize balls is updated by adding data indicating 15 prize balls, the prize ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the prize opening is updated by adding "1" (D←D+1), and it is determined whether or not a large prize game (special game) is currently in progress. If a large prize game is currently in progress, the round prize counter (C) for counting the game balls that have entered the large prize opening 50 is updated by adding "1" (C←C+1), and the large prize opening detection switch input process is terminated.

If the current game state is not a special game state, the illegal winning ball counter (E), which indicates the number of game balls that have won (entered) a specific winning port (second start port 47, large winning port 50) outside the winning period, is updated by adding "1" (E←E+1), and a determination is made as to whether the value of the illegal winning ball counter (E) is greater than a specified number (e.g., 10 balls), and if the value of the illegal winning ball counter (E) is equal to or less than the specified number, the large winning port detection switch input process is terminated.

If the value of the illegal winning ball counter (E) is greater than the specified number, it is determined that an illegal winning (illegal winning) has occurred in which a game ball wins (enters the ball) outside the winning period, and an illegal winning error designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area. This causes the illegal winning error designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, which then issues an illegal winning error notification to notify the user that an illegal winning has occurred.

Then, external information data (output data) for outputting an illegal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 is set in a specified area of the main RAM 110c, the illegal winning ball counter (E) is cleared, and the large winning port detection switch input process is terminated. As a result, an illegal winning signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and an external device can grasp (identify) that an illegal winning has occurred.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first start hole detection switch input process. In this first start hole detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a, i.e., whether the game ball has entered the first start hole 45. This will be described in more detail later with reference to FIG. 17.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second start hole detection switch input process. In this second start hole detection switch input process, processing is performed that is substantially the same as the first start hole detection switch input process shown in FIG. 17, which will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250. In this gate detection switch input processing, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 44a, i.e., whether the game ball has passed through the normal gate 44. If a detection signal has not been input from the gate detection switch 44a, the input control processing is terminated.

When a detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, it is determined whether the number of reserved regular symbols, which is the number of reserved regular symbols stored in the reserved regular symbol memory area, is less than 4. If the number of reserved regular symbols is not less than 4, the input control process is terminated.

If the number of reserved regular symbols is less than four, the number is updated by adding "1", regular symbol determination information (random number value for winning determination, random number value for determining regular symbol pattern, random number value for determining regular symbol variation pattern) is obtained, and the available memory units are searched in order starting from the first memory unit in the regular symbol reserved memory area, the obtained regular symbol determination information is stored in the available memory unit, and the input control process is terminated.

(First start port detection switch input processing of the main control board)
The first start hole detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 17. Fig. 17 is a flowchart showing the first start hole detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a (a game ball has entered the first start hole 45). If a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a, the process proceeds to step S230-2, and if a detection signal has not been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a, the current first start hole detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 3 prize ball counter used for prize balls by adding data indicating 3 prize balls, and in step S230-3, obtains special symbol determination information (random number value for determining a jackpot, random number value for determining special symbols, random number value for determining reach, random number value for determining special symbol fluctuation pattern).

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of first special symbols reserved (U1) stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area is less than 4. If the number of first special symbols reserved (U1) is less than 4, the process proceeds to step S230-5, and if the number of first special symbols reserved (U1) is not less than 4, the first start hole detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the first special chart reserved number (U1) by adding "1" (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, sets a first special chart reserved number designation command corresponding to the updated first special chart reserved number (U1) in the performance transmission data storage area. This causes the first special chart reserved number designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, making it possible for the performance control board 130 to grasp the first special chart reserved number.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a stores the acquired special symbol determination information in the first special symbol reserved memory area. Specifically, since the first special symbol reserved memory area is divided into the first memory section to the fourth memory section, the available memory sections are searched in order starting from the first memory section, and the acquired special symbol determination information is stored in the available memory section.

As a result, the first reserved memory consisting of special pattern determination information (random number values for determining a jackpot, random number values for determining special patterns, random number values for determining reach, and random number values for determining special pattern change patterns, etc.) is stored in a specified memory section of the first special pattern reserved memory area.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the current game state is a non-time-saving game state. If it is, the process proceeds to step S230-9. If it is not, the process ends the first start hole detection switch input process.

The main CPU 110a performs a first advance judgment process in step S230-9. In this first advance judgment process, the advance judgment table (not shown) is referenced, and the currently acquired special pattern judgment information (first reserved memory) is judged before the special pattern fluctuation display based on the judgment information is performed, and a planned fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern scheduled to be executed, is determined.

In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first look-ahead designation command corresponding to the expected fluctuation pattern determined in the first advance judgment process in step S230-8 above in the performance transmission data storage area, and ends this first start port detection switch input process.

As a result, the first look-ahead specification command is sent to the performance control board 130, and the performance control board 130 can execute a look-ahead preview performance that executes a predetermined preview performance over one or more variable displays executed before the start of the variable display of the special pattern corresponding to the first look-ahead specification command. The look-ahead preview performance is performed using one or more of the image display device, audio output device 9, frame lighting device 10, first movable member 73, second movable member 74, and board lighting device 76.

In addition, with regard to the second start hole detection switch input processing, the first start hole detection switch 45a, the first start hole 45, the first special symbol reserved memory area, the first reserved memory, the first special symbol reserved number (U1), the first special symbol reserved number designation command, the first advance judgment processing, and the first look-ahead designation command can be read as the second start hole detection switch 47a, the second start hole 47, the second special symbol reserved memory area, the second reserved memory, the second special symbol reserved number (U2), the second special symbol reserved number designation command, the second advance judgment processing, and the second look-ahead designation command, respectively.

(Special diagram special electric control processing of the main control board)
The special pattern special voltage control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 18. Fig. 18 is a flowchart showing the special pattern special voltage control process of the main control board 110.

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special chart special power processing data, and in step S302, references the branch destination address from the loaded special chart special power processing data, executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address, and ends the current special chart special power control process.

Specifically, if the special symbol special electric processing data = 0, the display of the special symbol changes based on the judgment result of the reserved memory (special symbol judgment information) is started, the change time is set, and a special symbol memory judgment process (step S310) is executed to perform processing for sending start commands (special symbol memory designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) to the performance control board 130 and processing for changing the special symbol special electric processing data to "1". Details of the special symbol memory judgment process will be described later.

If the special pattern special electric processing data = 1, the special pattern changing process (step S320) is executed to stop the changing display of the special pattern as the change time elapses, set the stop time (e.g., 0.5 seconds), and send a stop command (special pattern stop command) to the performance control board 130 and change the special pattern special electric processing data to "2", etc.

If the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, then after the stop time (0.5 seconds) of the special symbol has elapsed, if it is a losing special symbol, the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "0", and if it is a jackpot special symbol, the opening time of the jackpot game is set, and a process is executed to send an opening designation command to the performance control board 130 and a special symbol stop process (step S330) is executed to change the special symbol special electric processing data to "3".

If the special symbol special electric processing data = 3, the jackpot game process (step S340) is executed to perform processes such as starting a round game as the opening time of the jackpot game elapses and sending a round number designation command to the performance control board 130, setting the ending time of the jackpot game based on the end of the final round game and sending an ending designation command to the performance control board 130, and changing the special symbol special electric processing data to "4".

If the special symbol special electric processing data = 4, the jackpot game end process (step S350) is executed to perform a process to end the jackpot game due to the passage of the ending time, a process to set the game state after the jackpot ends (low probability time-saving game state, high probability time-saving game state, high probability number of times, number of time-saving times), a process to change the special symbol special electric processing data to "0", etc.

In addition, the number of times the variable display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) is executed after the end of the jackpot game state is counted (regardless of whether the game is in a normal game state, a time-saving game state, or a special probability game state), and if the game is not in a special probability game state when the variable display of the special patterns is stopped a predetermined number of times (for example, 800 times), the first special time-saving state (time-saving game state) may be generated for a predetermined number of times (for example, until the variable display of the special patterns is executed 600 times). In this first special time-saving state, the same various tables (jackpot determination table, special symbol determination table, special symbol change pattern determination table, advance determination table, etc.) as in the normal time-saving game state are used, but it may be made more disadvantageous to the player than in the normal time-saving game state; for example, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery may be made lower than in the normal time-saving game state (127/128) (for example, 100/128, which is a higher probability than in the non-time-saving state, or 1/128, which is the same probability as in the non-time-saving state), and the average change time of the normal symbols may be made the same as in the normal time-saving game state.

In addition, a special miss different from a normal miss may be provided as a result of the jackpot determination, and if the special miss special symbol stops as a result of the variable display of the special symbol that was selected by the special miss, the second special time-saving state (time-saving state) may be generated for a predetermined number of times (for example, until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 50 times). In this second special time-saving state, the same various tables (jackpot determination table, special symbol determination table, special symbol variable pattern determination table, advance determination table, etc.) as in the normal time-saving state are used, but it may be made more disadvantageous to the player than in the normal time-saving state. For example, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery may be made lower than in the normal time-saving state (127/128) (for example, 100/128, which is a higher probability than the non-time-saving state, or 1/128, which is the same probability as the non-time-saving state), and the average variable time of the normal symbol may be made the same as in the normal time-saving state.

In addition, if a special miss is won during the normal time-saving game state and the special miss special symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal time-saving game state and the second special time-saving state may be overlapped, in which case it is advisable to maintain the performance of the normal time-saving game state (the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery, the (average) fluctuation time of the normal symbol, etc.).

In addition, if the normal time-saving game state and the second special time-saving game state occur at the same time, the performance of the normal time-saving game state (the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery, the (average) change time of the normal symbol, etc.) should be maintained, and if the normal time-saving game state ends first and the second special time-saving game state occurs, the performance of the normal time-saving game state (the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery, the (average) change time of the normal symbol, etc.) should be inherited.

In addition, if a special miss is won during the first special time-saving state and the special miss symbol is displayed, the first special time-saving state and the second special time-saving state may be overlapped, or the first special time-saving state may be maintained and the second special time-saving state may not be generated.

In addition, the probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery in the non-time-saving state and in the various time-saving states (normal time-saving game state, first special time-saving state, second special time-saving state) may be set to the same (for example, 120/128), and the (average) change time of the normal patterns in the various time-saving states may be made shorter than in the non-time-saving state.

(Special pattern memory determination process of the main control board)
The special symbol memory determination process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 19. Fig. 19 is a flow chart showing the special symbol memory determination process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a changing state. If the special symbol is being displayed in a changing state, the main CPU 110a ends the current special symbol memory determination process, and if the special symbol is not being displayed in a changing state, the process proceeds to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of reserved second special drawings (U2) is 1 or greater. If the number of reserved second special drawings (U2) is 1 or greater, the process proceeds to step S310-3. If the number of reserved second special drawings (U2) is not 1 or greater, the process proceeds to step S310-4.

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a updates the second special symbol reserved number (U2) by subtracting "1", and in step S310-6, sets a special symbol storage command corresponding to the second special symbol reserved number (U2) after subtraction in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to update the reserved icon displayed on the first image display device 70 and the display of the icon.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, shifts the data stored in the second special pattern determination information reserve memory area, shifting the special pattern determination information stored in the first memory unit to the fourth memory unit to the previous memory unit.

For example, the special pattern determination information stored in the fourth memory section of the second special pattern determination information holding memory area is shifted to the third memory section of the second special pattern determination information holding memory area. In addition, the special pattern determination information stored in the first memory section of the second special pattern determination information holding memory area is shifted to the zeroth memory section, which is the special pattern determination information execution memory area, and the special pattern determination information used in the previous game that was stored in the zeroth memory section is erased.

On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of reserved first special drawings (U1) is 1 or more. If the number of reserved first special drawings (U1) is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-5, and if the number of reserved first special drawings (U1) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S319-1.

The main CPU 110a updates the first special symbol reserved number (U1) by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and sets a special symbol storage command corresponding to the first special symbol reserved number (U1) after subtraction in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S310-6. This causes the special symbol storage command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to update the reserved icon and the display of the icon displayed on the first image display device 70.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, shifts the data stored in the first special symbol reserve memory area, shifting the special symbol determination information stored in the first memory unit to the fourth memory unit to the previous memory unit.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth memory section of the first special symbol reserve memory area is shifted to the third memory section of the first special symbol reserve memory area. In addition, the special symbol determination information stored in the first memory section of the first special symbol reserve memory area is shifted to the zeroth memory section, which is the special symbol determination information execution memory area, and the special symbol determination information used in the previous game that was stored in the zeroth memory section is erased.

In addition, in conjunction with the shifting process of the special symbol determination information in step S310-8, special symbol reserved display data indicating the first special symbol reserved number (U1) and the second special symbol reserved number (U2) after subtraction is set in a specified area of the main RAM 110c. This updates the display contents of the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 and the second special symbol reserved indicator 64.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second special chart determination information reserve memory area is shifted with priority over the first special chart determination information reserve memory area in steps S310-2 to S310-8 (the second special chart reserved number is subtracted with priority over the first special chart reserved number), but the first special chart determination information reserve memory area or the second special chart determination information reserve memory area may be shifted in the order in which the game ball enters the starting hole (the first special chart reserved number and the second special chart reserved number are subtracted in the order of winning), or the first special chart determination information reserve memory area may be shifted with priority over the second special chart determination information reserve memory area (the first special chart reserved number is subtracted with priority over the second special chart reserved number).

The main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination process in step S311. Specifically, the main CPU 110a checks the special symbol determination information (random number value for jackpot determination) stored in the 0th memory section, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, against the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 10 to determine whether or not a jackpot has occurred. In addition, the main CPU 110a checks the special symbol determination information (random number value for special symbol determination) stored in the 0th memory section, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, against the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 to determine the type of special symbol to be stopped.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the big win determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the special symbol designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to determine the performance symbol 70a that will be displayed in a stopped state as a result of the variable performance.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a performs a special pattern change pattern determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a compares the special pattern determination information stored in the 0th memory unit, which is the special pattern determination information execution memory area, with the special pattern change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 15 to perform a process of determining the special pattern change pattern (change time), which is the change pattern of the special pattern.

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special pattern change pattern designation command corresponding to the type of special pattern change pattern determined in the special pattern change pattern determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the special pattern change pattern designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to determine the change performance pattern, which is the performance mode of the change performance performed during the special pattern change display.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol fluctuation time (counter value) corresponding to the type of special symbol fluctuation pattern determined in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316 starts displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol. As a result, the data creation process in step S700 creates LED lighting data for displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process in step S800, thereby displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag to end the customer waiting state, and in step S318, sets the special symbol special signal processing data to "1" and ends this special symbol memory determination process.

In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a customer waiting state flag indicating a customer waiting state is set in the main RAM 110c. If the customer waiting state flag is set, the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and if the customer waiting state flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S319-2. Note that the customer waiting state refers to a state in which the special symbol changing display and special game (jackpot game) are not being executed, but the requirement may also include that the normal symbol changing display and auxiliary game are not being executed.

In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a specified area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S319-3, sets a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the machine is in a customer waiting state in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends this special symbol memory determination process. This causes the customer waiting state designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute a customer waiting demo performance to encourage the player to play.

(Main processing of the production control section)
Next, the main processing of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 20. Fig. 20 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the performance control unit 130m.

When power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub-CPU 130a, and the sub-CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

In step E10, the sub-CPU 130a sets interrupt inhibition to inhibit timer interrupts, and in step E20, performs initialization processing. Specifically, in response to power-on, the sub-CPU 130a reads the main processing program from the sub-ROM 130b, initializes flags and the like stored in the sub-RAM 130c, and performs processing such as initial settings.

In step E30, the sub-CPU 130a sets an interrupt permission to allow a timer interrupt, and in step E40, performs a sub-random number update process. Specifically, it performs a process to update various random numbers stored in the sub-RAM 130c. Thereafter, the process of step E40 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of the production control unit)
The timer interrupt process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 21. Fig. 21 is a flow chart showing the timer interrupt process executed in the performance control unit 130m at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

In step E100, the sub-CPU 130a saves the information stored in the registers of the sub-CPU 130a to the stack area, and in step E120, performs a timer update process. In this timer update process, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

In step E130, the sub-CPU 130a performs input control processing. Specifically, it determines whether or not there has been input to various switches such as the performance button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, and if there has been input, it performs processing to set predetermined data.

In step E150, the sub-CPU 130a performs command analysis processing. Specifically, it determines whether various commands have been sent from the main control board 110, and if various commands have been sent, it stores the received commands in the receive buffer of the sub-RAM 130c.

The sub-CPU 130a performs setting change/confirmation processing in step E170. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a setting change designation command or a setting confirmation designation command has been received, and if a setting change designation command has been received, the sub-CPU 130a performs processing to execute the setting change notification described above, and if a setting confirmation designation command has been received, the sub-CPU 130a performs processing to execute the setting confirmation notification described above.

The sub-CPU 130a performs power-on processing in step E200. Specifically, it refers to the receive buffer in the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a power-on command has been received, and if so, performs processing to execute a power-on notification. More specifically, it sends a power-on notification command to the display control unit 140, causing the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) to display a power-on screen and causes the audio output device 9 to output a power-on sound.

In step E250, the sub-CPU 130a performs power outage recovery processing. Specifically, it refers to the receive buffer in the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a power restoration designation command has been received, and if so, performs processing to execute a power outage recovery notification. More specifically, it sends a power restoration notification command to the display control unit 140, causing the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) to display a power restoration screen, and causes the audio output device 9 to output a power restoration sound.

In step E300, the sub-CPU 130a performs customer waiting performance processing. Specifically, it refers to the receiving buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a customer waiting state designation command has been received, and if so, performs processing to perform a customer waiting demo performance after a predetermined time has elapsed. In more detail, it sends a customer waiting performance command to the display control unit 140 to cause the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) to display a customer waiting demo screen and to output a customer waiting demo sound from the audio output device 9. Details of the customer waiting performance processing will be described later.

In step E350, the sub-CPU 130a performs a game status update process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a game status designation command has been received, and if so, performs a process to update the game status information stored in the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E400, the sub-CPU 130a performs a reserved information update process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a special reserved number designation command or a regular reserved number designation command has been received, and if so, performs a process to update the first special reserved number, second special reserved number, regular reserved number, etc. stored (knowledged) in the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E500, the sub-CPU 130a performs look-ahead performance processing. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a look-ahead specification command or a special chart change pattern specification command has been received, and if so, performs processing related to the look-ahead performance, such as icon change performance, continuous preview performance, and lamp change performance. Details of the look-ahead performance processing will be described later.

An "icon change effect" is a type of pre-reading preview effect that changes the reserved icon and the display mode of the icon to give the player hope that a jackpot game will be executed. Note that in this embodiment, an icon change effect for a reserved icon may be referred to as a "reserved icon change effect," and an icon change effect for the icon in question may be referred to as a "respective icon change effect."

The "continuous preview performance" is a type of anticipatory preview performance that makes the player anticipate the execution of a jackpot game by executing a predetermined performance over one or more variable performances.
The "lamp change effect" is a type of anticipatory preview effect that changes the lighting state of the winning port lamp over one or more variable effects, giving the player the expectation that a jackpot game will be executed.

In step E600, the sub-CPU 130a performs special symbol special electric effect processing. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a special symbol designation command, a special symbol variation pattern designation command, a special symbol stop designation command, a jackpot opening designation command, a round number designation command, and a jackpot ending designation command have been received, and if so, performs processing to execute the effect corresponding to the received command.

In step E700, the sub-CPU 130a performs normal symbol and normal power presentation processing. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a normal symbol designation command, a normal symbol variation pattern designation command, a normal symbol stop designation command, a winning opening designation command, and a winning ending designation command have been received, and if so, performs processing to execute the presentation corresponding to the received command.

In step E800, the sub-CPU 130a performs a presentation mode update process. Specifically, for the presentation mode (presentation stage) in which presentation elements (background image, presentation image, presentation sound, BGM, etc.) in the sound output device 9, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, etc. are specified, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not an update condition (change in game state, winning the mode update lottery at the start of the variable presentation, the start of the variable presentation after the execution of the SP/SPSP reach presentation that results in a loss, etc.) has been met according to the progress of the game, and performs a process to update the presentation mode to one of the multiple presentation modes if the update condition has been met.

The "presentation modes" are presentation modes A to C that are set in the normal game state (low probability non-time-saving game state), presentation modes D to E that are set in the probability variable game state (high probability time-saving game state), and presentation modes F to G that are set in the time-saving game state (low probability time-saving game state: including the first special time-saving state and the second special time-saving state described above). Note that the presentation mode that is initially set when the game is controlled to the normal game state when the power is turned on (for example, after changing the setting, clearing the RWM, checking the setting, etc.) is always presentation mode A, the presentation mode that is initially set when the game is controlled to the probability variable game state when the power is turned on is always presentation mode D, and the presentation mode that is initially set when the game is controlled to the time-saving game state when the power is turned on is always presentation mode F.

In addition, in presentation modes A to C, the presentation pattern 70a is composed of numbers (identification characters) + characters (decorative part) corresponding to the numbers + a pattern effect image (decorative part) that decorates the background of the numbers and characters, and the designs of the numbers and characters differ between presentation modes. In presentation modes D to F, the presentation pattern 70a is composed of numbers (identification characters) only, and the design of the numbers is the same between presentation modes. In addition, in presentation modes A to F, the background image corresponding to each presentation mode scrolls left and right (reciprocating motion).

In addition, regardless of the presentation mode, it is possible for the presentation pattern 70a to be displayed in a reduced size (preparatory action) before being scrolled (updated to another presentation pattern) at the start of the variable presentation; however, in presentation modes A to C (normal game state), if the first variable presentation (variable display of the first special pattern) starts when the first special pattern reserved number is "1" or "2", the presentation pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size (preparatory action) before the scroll display, whereas if the first variable presentation (variable display of the first special pattern) starts when the first special pattern reserved number is "3" or "4", the presentation pattern 70a is not displayed in a reduced size (preparatory action) before the scroll display; and in presentation modes D to G (specific game state), if the first variable presentation (variable display of the first special pattern) starts when the first special pattern reserved number is "1" to "4", the presentation pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size (preparatory action) before the scroll display. In other words, the rate at which the reduced display (preparatory action) of the presentation pattern 70a is executed differs between when the first variable presentation is executed during a normal game state and when the first variable presentation is executed during a specific game state. Therefore, the presentation mode at the start of the first variable presentation can be changed depending on the game state (presentation mode), making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in the performance modes D to G (specific game state), when the first variable performance (display of the variable first special pattern) is executed from the state where the first special pattern reserved number is "1" to "4", the display of the reduced performance pattern 70a (preparation operation) is performed before the scroll display, and when the second variable performance (display of the variable second special pattern) is executed from the state where the second special pattern reserved number is "1", the display of the reduced performance pattern 70a (preparation operation) is performed before the scroll display, while when the second variable performance (display of the variable second special pattern) is executed from the state where the second special pattern reserved number is "2" to "4", the display of the reduced performance pattern 70a (preparation operation) is not performed before the scroll display. In other words, the ratio at which the reduced display (preparation operation) of the performance pattern 70a is executed differs between the case where the first variable performance is executed during the specific game state and the case where the second variable performance is executed during the specific game state. This allows the presentation style at the start of the first variable presentation to be changed depending on the game state (presentation mode), making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the preparatory action before scrolling the performance pattern 70a may be an enlarged display rather than a reduced display, or a floating display that rises upward from the stopped position. Also, in performance modes D to G (specific game states), when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special pattern) is started, the preparatory action of the performance pattern 70a may not be performed before the scrolling display.

In addition, if the performance pattern 70a performs a preparatory operation at the start of the variable performance, the three performance patterns 70a may start scrolling in the order of left, center, and right, and if no preparatory operation is performed, the three performance patterns 70a may start scrolling simultaneously.

In addition, with regard to the update conditions for the presentation mode, it is more difficult to win the mode update lottery and it is more difficult to execute an SP/SPSP reach effect that results in a loss when a variable effect (first variable effect) corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern (first variable effect) is executed during a specific game state than when a variable effect (first variable effect) corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern is executed during a normal game state, so the update conditions for the presentation mode are more difficult to meet than in the former case. This makes it possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal game state, where the variable display of the first special pattern is more likely to be executed, and to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, since it is easier to win the mode update lottery and it is easier to execute an SP/SPSP reach effect that results in a loss when a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) is executed during a specific game state than when a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) is executed during a specific game state, it is easier for the latter to establish the update conditions for the presentation mode than the former. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in a specific game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is more likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The display mode of the first hold icon is the same in presentation modes A to C, but the display mode of the first hold icon may be different for each presentation mode, so that the first hold icon is displayed in three different display modes in the normal game state. Also, the display mode of the second hold icon is the same in presentation modes D to G, but the display mode of the second hold icon may be different between presentation modes D to E and presentation modes F to G, so that the second hold icon is displayed in two different display modes in the specific game state.

In addition, the presentation mode (background image, display mode of presentation patterns, background music, etc.) is updated according to the progress of the game, but the player may be able to change the presentation mode (background image, display mode of presentation patterns, background music, etc.) by operating the presentation button 17 while waiting for customers or during a variable presentation. In addition, if a change operation for the presentation mode is performed during a variable presentation, the presentation mode may be changed at the time the change operation is performed, or the presentation mode may be changed when the variable presentation currently being performed ends, or the presentation mode may be changed when the next variable presentation starts.

For example, in normal game mode, if an operation to change the presentation mode is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable presentation), the presentation mode (background image, display mode of the presentation symbol, BGM, etc.) will be changed even if the next display to be executed is the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable presentation). Also, in normal game mode, if an operation to change the presentation mode is performed during the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable presentation), the presentation mode will be changed even if the next display to be executed is the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable presentation). In this way, it is possible to improve the convenience for the player regarding the change of presentation mode (presentation elements used in the variable presentation), and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in a specific game state, if an operation to change the presentation mode is performed during the variable display of the first special pattern (first variable presentation), the presentation mode (background image, display mode of the presentation pattern, BGM, etc.) will be changed even if the next display to be executed is the variable display of the second special pattern (second variable presentation). In addition, in a specific game state, if an operation to change the presentation mode is performed during the variable display of the second special pattern (second variable presentation), the presentation mode will be changed even if the next display to be executed is the variable display of the first special pattern (first variable presentation). In this way, it is possible to improve the convenience for the player regarding the change of presentation mode (presentation elements used in the variable presentation), and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In step E850, the sub-CPU 130a performs error notification processing. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether an error specification command or an error cancellation specification command has been received, and if so, performs processing to execute an error notification effect corresponding to the received error specification command, or performs processing to end the error notification effect corresponding to the received error cancellation specification command.

In step E900, the sub-CPU 130a performs output control processing. Specifically, it performs processing to output signals such as predetermined data, and to transmit various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150.

In step E950, the sub-CPU 130a restores the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub-CPU 130a and ends this timer interrupt process.

(Customer waiting performance processing by the performance control unit)
The customer waiting performance processing of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 22. Fig. 22 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting performance processing in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E300-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a customer waiting state designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the customer waiting state designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step E300-4. If the customer waiting state designation command has been received, in step E300-2, a demo waiting time determination table (see FIG. 23) is selected to determine the waiting time until the start of the customer waiting demo performance. Details of the demo waiting time determination table will be described later.

In step E300-3, the sub-CPU 130a determines the demo waiting time and sets it in the demo waiting timer. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 23, and determines one demo waiting time from among multiple demo waiting times based on the current game state and the current state.

In step E300-4, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a demo is in standby. Specifically, it determines whether the demo standby timer is set. If the demo is not in standby, the customer waiting demo performance is not executed and the customer waiting performance processing is terminated. If the demo is in standby, the demo standby timer is updated by -1 in step E300-5.

In step E300-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the demo waiting timer = 0. If the demo waiting timer = 0, the sub-CPU 130a ends the current customer waiting performance processing, assuming that the customer waiting demo performance has not yet been executed. If the demo waiting timer = 0, in step E300-7, the sub-CPU 130a sets a customer waiting demo performance command in the transmission buffer, and ends the current customer waiting performance processing. As a result, the customer waiting demo performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a customer waiting demo performance is executed to appeal to the player to play the game.

(Demo waiting time determination table)
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a demo waiting time determination table which is referred to when determining the waiting time until the start of the customer waiting demo performance.

The demo waiting time determination table in FIG. 23 associates the game state, the current state, and the demo waiting time to be selected. Four types of demo waiting times ranging from 30 seconds to 80 seconds are set for the demo waiting time in the normal game state, and four types of demo waiting times ranging from 35 seconds to 85 seconds are set for the demo waiting time in the specific game state.

The first feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 23 is that the demo waiting time from when the performance pattern is statically displayed on the image display device immediately after power is turned on, the demo waiting time from when the performance pattern is statically displayed on the image display device immediately after power is restored, the demo waiting time from when the performance pattern's variable display ends (the variable time has passed) and the performance pattern is statically displayed, and the demo waiting time from when the performance pattern is statically displayed after the customer waiting demo performance ends are different. Therefore, the customer waiting demo performance can be executed at an appropriate time according to the current state, which makes it possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The second feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 23 is that the demo waiting time from when the display of the dynamic effect symbols ends (the dynamic time has passed) and the static effect symbols are displayed is longer than the demo waiting time from when the display of the dynamic effect symbols is statically displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is turned on. Therefore, the customer waiting demo effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the likelihood that the player is playing, which makes it possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The third feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 23 is that the demo waiting time from when the static display of the performance symbols on the image display device immediately after power is restored is longer than the demo waiting time from when the display of the dynamic performance symbols ends (the dynamic time has passed) and the static display of the performance symbols occurs. Therefore, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demo performance at an appropriate time according to the likelihood that the player is playing, which makes it possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The fourth feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 23 is that the demo waiting time from when the static display of the performance pattern on the image display device immediately after power is restored is longer than the demo waiting time from when the static display of the performance pattern on the image display device immediately after power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demo performance at an appropriate time according to the likelihood that the player is playing, which makes it possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The fifth feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 23 is that the demo waiting time from when the performance pattern is statically displayed after the customer waiting demo performance ends is the shortest. This makes it possible to effectively increase the appeal of the game to players and improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The sixth feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 23 is that the waiting time for each demo in a specific game state (low probability time-saving game state, high probability time-saving game state) is longer than the waiting time for each demo in a normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to execute a customer waiting demo performance at an appropriate time according to the likelihood that the player is playing, which makes it possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

(Preview processing of the performance control unit)
The look-ahead performance processing of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 24. Fig. 24 is a flowchart showing the look-ahead performance processing in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E510, the sub-CPU 130a performs an icon change performance determination process to determine whether or not to execute an icon change performance and the performance mode of the icon change performance. The icon change performance determination process will be described in detail later.

In step E520, the sub-CPU 130a performs an icon change performance execution process to execute the icon change performance determined to be executed in the icon change performance determination process (changing the display mode of the pending icon or the icon that is already displayed). Details of the icon change performance execution process will be described later.

In step E530, the sub-CPU 130a performs a continuous preview performance determination process to determine whether or not to execute a continuous preview performance and the performance mode of the continuous preview performance. The details of the continuous preview performance determination process will be described later.

In step E540, the sub-CPU 130a performs a continuous preview performance execution process to execute the continuous preview performance that was determined to be executed in the continuous preview performance determination process. The details of the continuous preview performance determination process will be described later.

In step E550, the sub-CPU 130a performs a lamp change effect execution process to execute a lamp change effect (lighting up the winning slot lamp NR so that the light emission mode corresponds to the icon whose display mode has changed), and ends this pre-reading effect process. Details of the lamp change effect execution process will be described later.

(Icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit)
The icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 25. Fig. 25 is a flowchart showing the icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m.

In step E510-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a look-ahead designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If a look-ahead designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E510-2, and if a look-ahead designation command has not been received, the current icon change performance determination process ends.

In step E510-2, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the received look-ahead command and determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, the type of jackpot game, and the presentation content (planned variation pattern).

In step E510-3, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not the current time is a period during which an icon change performance can be performed. If the current time is a period during which an icon change performance can be performed, the process proceeds to step E510-4. If the current time is not a period during which an icon change performance can be performed, the process proceeds to step E510-7.

The "period during which the icon change effect can be executed" refers to a period when a jackpot game is not being executed, when an icon change effect is not being executed, or when an icon change effect is not scheduled to be executed. Note that it is also possible to set only one or two of the above three conditions. It is also possible to set a normal game state when the received look-ahead designation command is based on winning at the first start port 45, and a specific game state (low-probability time-saving game state, high-probability time-saving game state) when the received look-ahead designation command is based on winning at the second start port 47.

In step E510-4, the sub-CPU 130a acquires a random number value for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), and in step E510-5, selects an icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 26) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

In step E510-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines the final icon display mode. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 26, and determines one of the multiple final icon display modes based on the expected change pattern indicated by the look-ahead specification command and the selection rate (%) of each final icon display mode.

In step E510-7, the sub-CPU 130a determines the normal icon (white icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E510-8, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the determined final icon display mode is a display mode (special icon) that executes an icon change performance. If it is a display mode that executes an icon change performance, the process proceeds to step E510-9, and if it is not a display mode that executes an icon change performance, the process proceeds to step E510-12.

In step E510-9, the sub-CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 24) for determining the change scenario of the icon change presentation. Details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from when the reserved icon appears to when it disappears.

In step E510-10, the sub-CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c corresponding to the reserved number counter. Specifically, the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 24 is referenced, and one change scenario is determined from among multiple change scenarios based on the final icon display state, the reserved number of special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario.

In step E510-11, the sub-CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the icon display mode that will be displayed first on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) from the determined change scenario, sets the icon display command for that winning icon in the transmission buffer, and ends this icon change presentation determination process. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and a pending icon in a display mode that corresponds to the icon display command for the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and a specified sound effect is output.

In step E510-12, the sub-CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which no icon change performance is performed, and sets this in the pre-read information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c corresponding to the pending number counter.

In step E510-13, the sub-CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer and ends the icon change presentation decision process. This causes the icon display command to be sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a reserved icon with a display mode corresponding to the icon display command for the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) and a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) is output.

(Icon Final Display Mode Determination Table)
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table which is referred to when determining the icon final display mode.

The icon final display mode determination table associates the expected change pattern indicated by the look-ahead command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the selected icon final display mode, and for reference, the type of notification sound when each icon type is generated is also listed.

The final icon display modes are set to a white icon as a normal icon, and blue, red, and rainbow icons as special icons that give the expectation that a jackpot game will be played (indicating that a jackpot game may be played).

The likelihood of winning the jackpot for special icons increases in the following order: (white icon <) blue icon < red icon < rainbow icon, with the rainbow icon being the icon that guarantees a jackpot.

The image display device is configured so that when a white icon is displayed on the image display device, a first occurrence alert sound is output, when a blue icon is displayed, a second occurrence alert sound is output, when a red icon is displayed, a third occurrence alert sound is output, and when a rainbow icon is displayed, a fourth occurrence alert sound is output.

When a game ball enters the first start hole 45 in normal game mode, one of the first to fourth generated notification sounds is output according to the display mode at the start of the display of the first hold icon based on the winning. However, when a game ball enters the second start hole 47 in normal game mode, none of the first to fourth generated notification sounds is output.

In addition, when a game ball enters the second start hole 47 in a specific game state, one of the second to fourth generated alert sounds is output depending on the display mode at the start of the display of the second reserved icon based on that winning (the first generated alert sound is not output in the case of a white icon), but when a game ball enters the first start hole 45 in a specific game state, none of the first to fourth generated alert sounds is output.

The first feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 26 is that the selection rate of the icon final display mode is varied depending on the expected change pattern. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the expected change pattern is an SP reach or SPSP reach, the special icon is selected at a higher rate than when the expected change pattern is a normal change, shortened change, or normal reach that does not result in a reach. Therefore, the display mode of the reserved icon can heighten the player's expectations, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

A second feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 26 is that the generated notification sound is more likely to be output when the game ball enters the first start hole 45 during the normal game state than when the game ball enters the first start hole 45 during the specific game state. This makes it possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal game state, where the game ball is more likely to enter the first start hole 45 than in the specific game state where right-handed play is performed, and to increase the interest in the game.

A third feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 26 is that the notification sound is more likely to be output when the game ball enters the second start hole 47 during a specific game state than when the game ball enters the first start hole 45 during a specific game state. This makes it possible to improve the presentation effect in a specific game state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second start hole 47, thereby making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, in the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 26, in the case of a jackpot, the normal icon (white icon) is not selected as the icon final display mode, but it may be selected instead.

In addition, while a different notification sound was set for each of the multiple icon display modes (four types), it would also be possible to have two types: a notification sound when a white icon appears and a change notification sound when the icon changes to a blue icon, red icon, or rainbow icon. Alternatively, no notification sound could be output when a white icon appears, and a notification sound could be output only when the icon changes to one of the modes. Also, for the rainbow icon, which is confirmed to be a jackpot, a dedicated notification sound could be provided, making it three types.

In addition, rather than not outputting the generated alarm sound when a game ball enters the second start hole 47 in the normal game state, the generated alarm sound may be output at a lower rate than when a game ball enters the first start hole 45, and rather than not outputting the generated alarm sound when a game ball enters the first start hole 45 in the specific game state, the generated alarm sound may be output at a lower rate than when a game ball enters the second start hole 47.

(Change Scenario Decision Table)
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a variation scenario determination table which is referred to when determining a variation scenario.

The change scenario determination table associates the final display mode of the icon, the reserved number of special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the change scenario to be selected, and for reference, the prior changes in each change scenario and the update mode of the icon in that change are listed.

"Pre-change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information that was stored before the special chart determination information that corresponds to the newly received look-ahead command, and "the change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information that corresponds to the newly received look-ahead command.

The change scenarios include scenarios (e.g., scenario 01, etc.) in which the display mode of the icon does not change while the pre-change is being performed (the pending icon change performance is not executed) but changes while the change is being performed (the relevant icon change performance is executed), scenarios (e.g., scenario 02, etc.) in which the display mode of the icon changes while the pre-change is being performed (the pending icon change performance is executed) but does not change while the change is being performed (the relevant icon change performance is not executed), and scenarios (e.g., scenario 15, etc.) in which the display mode of the icon changes while the pre-change is being performed and while the change is being performed (the pending icon change performance and the relevant icon change performance are executed).

In the change scenario determination table of this embodiment, a scenario for changing the display mode of the icon is determined regardless of whether or not a reach performance (which may be a reach other than a normal reach performance) is executed in the pre-variation, but a scenario for changing the display mode of the icon may be determined by a change scenario determination table in which a reach performance that suggests the possibility of a jackpot game being executed in the pre-variation is used as a determination factor. When using such a change scenario determination table, it is preferable to set various scenarios so that the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of a pre-variation in which a reach performance is executed, and the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of a pre-variation in which a reach performance is not executed. In addition, various scenarios may be set so that the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of a pre-variation in which a reach performance is executed and a pre-variation in which a reach performance is not executed, but the display mode of the icon changes at a higher rate during the execution of a pre-variation in which a reach performance is not executed than during the execution of a pre-variation in which a reach performance is executed.

(Icon change performance execution process of the performance control unit)
The icon change effect execution process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 28. Fig. 28 is a flowchart showing the icon change effect execution process in the effect control unit 130m.

In step E520-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a special chart variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If a special chart variation pattern designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E520-2, and if a special chart variation pattern designation command has not been received, the process for executing the icon change effect is terminated.

In step E520-2, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the icon change scenario stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, and in step E520-3, determines whether there is a reserved icon that will change (update) the display mode in the current variation performance. If there is a reserved icon that will change the display mode, the process proceeds to step E520-4, and if there is no reserved icon that will change the display mode, the process proceeds to step E520-7.

In step E520-4, the sub-CPU 130a selects a hold icon change pattern determination table (see FIG. 29) for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the hold icon to be changed. Details of the hold icon change pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E520-5, the sub-CPU 130a determines the pending icon change pattern. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the pending icon change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 29, and determines one pending icon change pattern from among multiple pending icon change patterns based on the manner in which the pending icon changes in the current variation performance and the selection rate (%).

In step E520-6, the sub-CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined pending icon change pattern in the transmission buffer. This causes the change effect command to be transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the display state of the pending icon displayed on the first image display device 70 changes according to the change timing corresponding to the pending icon change pattern and the change stage at the change timing, or a predetermined sound effect (change sound) is output.

In step E520-7, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a scenario (change scenario, non-change scenario) for the icon is stored in the pre-read information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c. If a scenario for the icon is stored, the process proceeds to step E520-8; if a scenario for the icon is not stored, the current icon change performance execution process is terminated.

In step E520-8, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed (updated). If there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process proceeds to step E520-9. If there is no icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process for executing the icon change effect is terminated.

In step E520-9, the sub-CPU 130a selects, from among a plurality of icon change pattern determination tables for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the icon to be changed, a change pattern determination table (see FIG. 30) for the icon corresponding to the change stage at which the icon will change in the current change performance. Details of the change pattern determination table for the icon corresponding to the change stage will be described later.

The sub-CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in step E520-10. Specifically, it refers to the change pattern determination table for the selected icon shown in FIG. 30, and determines one icon change pattern from among the multiple icon change patterns based on the state of the icon change in the current variation performance and the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern.

In step E520-11, the sub-CPU 130a sets the change performance command corresponding to the determined icon change pattern in the transmission buffer and ends the current icon change performance execution process. This causes the change performance command to be transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the display state of the icon displayed on the first image display device 70 changes according to the change timing corresponding to the icon change pattern and the change stage at the change timing, or a specified sound effect (change sound) is output.

(Change pattern determination table for hold icon)
FIG. 29 shows a hold icon change pattern determination table that is referenced when determining a hold icon change pattern.

The pending icon change pattern determination table associates the manner in which the pending icon changes in the current change presentation, the selection rate (%) of each pending icon change pattern, and the selected pending icon change pattern, and for reference, the timing at which the pending icon change presentation occurs and the change stage for each pending icon change pattern are also listed.

The reserved icon change patterns include a normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the reserved icon changes with the output of a sound effect when the reserved icon shifts (when the change begins) in response to the disappearance of the icon, a normal change pattern 02 in which the display mode of the reserved icon changes while changing with the output of a sound effect, a character effect change pattern 01 in which a character appears and an action effect is performed on the icon starting from the character, changing the display mode of the icon, and a pattern effect change pattern 01 in which a change notification pattern indicating that the display mode of the icon will change as a result of the change effect is temporarily displayed and an action effect is performed on the reserved icon starting from the change notification pattern, changing the display mode of the reserved icon.

The timing of the pending icon change effect is classified according to the progress of the change effect, and includes when the change effect starts (change start time), when the change effect is in progress (changing), and when the effect pattern 70a temporarily stops ((temporarily) stopped).

The pending icon change stages are set to 1UP, which changes the display mode of the jackpot winning expectation to one level higher (for example, changing from a white icon to a blue icon, or from a blue icon to a red icon), and 2UP, which changes the jackpot winning expectation to two levels higher (for example, changing from a white icon to a red icon).

The timing for the change effect of the reserved icon to occur is the three mentioned above, but it is not limited to these timings and other timings may be provided. For example, it may occur during the execution of the change effect until a reach is achieved (during the change), during the execution of a normal reach, or during the execution of an SP (SPSP) reach, etc.

(Change pattern determination table for the icon)
Figure 30 shows a change pattern determination table for the icon which is referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon, where Figure 30(a) is a table which is referred to when the display mode of the icon is changed by one stage, and Figure 30(b) is a table which is referred to when the display mode of the icon is changed by two stages.

The icon change pattern determination table associates the mode of the icon change in the current change performance, the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern, and the icon change pattern that will be selected, and for reference, the timing at which the icon change performance occurs in each icon change pattern and the change stage are also listed.

The icon change patterns include normal change pattern 01, in which the display mode of the reserved icon changes when the change starts accompanied by the output of a sound effect, normal change pattern 02, in which the display mode of the reserved icon changes during the change accompanied by the output of a sound effect, and character action change pattern 01, in which a character appears and an action performance is performed on the icon starting from the character, changing the display mode of the icon.

The timing of the icon change effect is classified according to the progress of the change effect, and includes when the change effect starts (change start time), when the change effect is in progress (changing), and when the effect pattern 70a temporarily stops ((temporarily) stopped).

The icon change stages are set to 1UP, which changes the probability of winning the jackpot to a display mode that is one level higher (for example, changing from a white icon to a blue icon, or changing from a blue icon to a red icon), and 2UP, which changes the probability of winning the jackpot to a display mode that is two levels higher (for example, changing from a white icon to a red icon, or changing from a blue icon to a rainbow icon).

In the change pattern determination table for the icon in this embodiment, the pattern action change pattern 01 cannot be selected, but it may be selected. For example, in a change performance that performs a pseudo consecutive performance, the change notification pattern may be temporarily stopped when the performance pattern 70a before the pseudo change is temporarily stopped.

"Pseudo consecutive performance" refers to a special mode of performance pattern change display in which all performance patterns 70a temporarily stop and then start changing again once or multiple times within the special pattern change time determined for a single winning (ball entry) into a start port (first start port 45, second start port 47) in order to make it look as if the performance pattern change display has been executed multiple times in response to a jackpot determination based on a winning (ball entry) into one start port (first start port 45, second start port 47). In addition, a flame effect is displayed around the performance pattern 70a when the performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, and the color of the flame effect changes from blue to red each time the temporary stop and re-change are repeated.

The timing for the icon change effect to occur is the two mentioned above, but is not limited to these timings and other timings may be provided. For example, it may occur during the execution of the change effect until a reach is achieved (during the change), during the execution of a normal reach, or during the execution of an SP (SPSP) reach, etc.

(Continuous preview performance decision process of the performance control unit)
The continuous preview performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 31. Fig. 31 is a flowchart showing the continuous preview performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E530-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a look-ahead designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If a look-ahead designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E530-2, and if a look-ahead designation command has not been received, the process for determining the continuous preview performance is terminated.

In step E530-2, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the received look-ahead command and determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, the type of jackpot game, and the presentation content (planned variation pattern).

In step E530-3, it is determined whether or not the current period is one in which a continuous preview performance can be executed. If the current period is one in which a continuous preview performance (pre-reading action performance, pre-reading effect performance, pre-reading vibration performance, pre-reading zone performance, pre-reading chance eye performance) can be executed, processing proceeds to step E530-4. If the current period is not one in which a continuous preview performance can be executed, processing proceeds to step E530-18, assuming that the continuous preview performance based on the currently received pre-reading designation command will not be executed.

The "anticipatory action effect" is an effect that intermittently indicates the likelihood of a special game being played by executing an action effect (preview effect) that operates the second movable member 74 in a predetermined manner immediately after the start of one or more variable effects.

The "pre-reading effect" is an effect that intermittently suggests the likelihood of a special game being played by executing an effect effect (pre-notice effect) that displays an effect image of a predetermined color around the effect pattern 70a immediately after the start of one or more variable effects (during the preparation operation, before scrolling).

The "predictive vibration effect" is an effect that intermittently indicates the likelihood of a special game being played by executing a vibration effect (preview effect) that vibrates the effect button 17 in a predetermined manner immediately after the start of one or more variable effects.

The "pre-reading zone effect" is an effect that continuously suggests the likelihood of a special game being played by executing a zone in-effect (pre-notice effect) that displays a zone image (zone background image) from a specific timing in one or more variable effects.

The "predictive chance effect" is an effect that intermittently suggests the likelihood of a special game being played by displaying the effect symbols 70a in a fixed, regular arrangement in one or more variable effects.

The "period during which the consecutive preview performance can be executed" includes the following: there is no item in the advanced reserve that executes the consecutive preview performance; a jackpot game is not in progress; a normal game state is in effect when a look-ahead command based on a win at the first start port 45 is received; a specific game state (low-probability time-saving game state, high-probability time-saving game state) is in effect when a look-ahead command based on a win at the second start port 47 is received; etc.

In step E530-4, the sub-CPU 130a selects a continuous preview type determination table (see Figures 32 and 33) corresponding to the current presentation mode, and in step E530-5, refers to the continuous preview type determination table to determine the continuous preview type (whether or not to execute a continuous preview presentation, and the type of continuous preview presentation to be executed). Details of the continuous preview type determination table will be described later.

In step E530-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the continuous preview type is one that will execute a continuous preview performance. If a continuous preview performance is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step E530-18. If a continuous preview performance is to be executed, in step E530-7, a continuous preview scenario determination table (see Figures 34 and 35) corresponding to the current performance mode is selected. Details of the continuous preview scenario determination table will be described later.

In step E530-8, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a continuous preview type for executing a look-ahead action performance has been determined. If a look-ahead action performance is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step E530-10. If a look-ahead action performance is to be executed, in step E530-9, the continuous preview scenario determination table is referenced to determine a preview scenario for the look-ahead action performance and set it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-10, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether a continuous preview type for executing a look-ahead effect performance has been determined. If a look-ahead effect performance is not to be executed, processing proceeds to step E530-12. If a look-ahead effect performance is to be executed, in step E530-11, the continuous preview scenario determination table is referenced to determine a preview scenario for the look-ahead effect performance and set it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-12, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a continuous preview type for executing a look-ahead vibration performance has been determined. If a look-ahead vibration performance is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step E530-14. If a look-ahead vibration performance is to be executed, in step E530-13, the continuous preview scenario determination table is referenced to determine a preview scenario for the look-ahead vibration performance and set it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-14, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a continuous preview type for executing a look-ahead zone performance has been determined. If a look-ahead zone performance is not to be executed, processing proceeds to step E530-16. If a look-ahead zone performance is to be executed, in step E530-15, the continuous preview scenario determination table is referenced to determine a preview scenario for the look-ahead zone performance and set it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-16, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a continuous preview type for executing a look-ahead chance eye performance has been determined. If a look-ahead chance eye performance is not to be executed, the current continuous preview performance determination process is terminated. If a look-ahead chance eye performance is to be executed, in step E530-17, the continuous preview scenario determination table is referenced to determine a preview scenario for the look-ahead chance eye performance and set it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, and the current continuous preview performance determination process is terminated.

In step E530-18, the sub-CPU 130a determines a non-preview scenario for the consecutive preview performance (a preview scenario indicating that the consecutive preview performance will not be executed), sets this in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, and ends this consecutive preview performance determination process.

The preview scenario or non-preview scenario set in the pre-read information storage area of sub-RAM 130c is referenced in the continuous preview performance execution process of step E540 described above, and processing for executing the continuous preview performance or processing for not executing the continuous preview performance is performed.

In this way, according to the continuous preview performance determination process shown in FIG. 31, since the pre-reading operation performance is not executed in the variable display (variable performance) of the second special pattern in the normal gaming state, the second movable member 74 is more likely to operate (move) when the variable display (variable performance) of the first special pattern is executed than when the variable display (variable performance) of the second special pattern is executed in the normal gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect related to the variable display (variable performance) of the first special pattern in the normal gaming state, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the continuous preview performance determination process shown in FIG. 31, a look-ahead effect performance (a performance in which an effect image is displayed around the performance pattern 70a) can be executed in the variable display of the first special pattern (first variable performance) in the normal game state, whereas a look-ahead effect performance is not executed in the variable display of the first special pattern (first variable performance) in the specific game state. Therefore, the rate at which the look-ahead effect performance is executed differs between the case in which the variable display of the first special pattern (first variable performance) is executed during the normal game state and the case in which the variable display of the first special pattern (first variable performance) is executed during the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to create a difference in the performance effect at the start of the first variable performance in the normal game state and the specific game state, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the continuous preview effect determination process shown in FIG. 31, while the look-ahead effect effect (the effect in which an effect image is displayed around the effect pattern 70a) is not executed in the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable display) in the specific game state, the look-ahead effect effect can be executed in the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable display), so the rate at which the look-ahead effect effect is executed differs between the case in which the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable display) is executed during the specific game state and the case in which the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable display) is executed during the specific game state. Therefore, in the specific game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed, the effect of the display related to the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable display) can be enhanced, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, a look-ahead effect may be executed when the first special symbol is displayed (first change effect) in a specific game state, and in this case, the rate may be set to be lower than when the second special symbol is displayed (second change effect).

In addition, according to the process for determining the consecutive preview effects shown in FIG. 31, since the pre-reading vibration effect is not executed in the variable display (variation effect) of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state, in the normal gaming state, the vibration effect is more likely to be executed when the variable display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed than when the variable display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the effect of the effect of the variable display (variation effect) of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state can be enhanced, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the process for determining the consecutive preview effects shown in FIG. 31, since the pre-reading action effect is not executed in the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol in the specific game state, the second movable member 74 is more likely to operate (move) in the specific game state when the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol is executed than when the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is executed. Therefore, the effect of the effect of the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol in the specific game state can be enhanced, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the process for determining the consecutive preview effects shown in FIG. 31, since the pre-reading vibration effect is not executed in the variable display (variation effect) of the first special symbol in the specific game state, in the specific game state, the vibration effect is more likely to be executed when the variable display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed than when the variable display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the variable display (variation effect) of the second special symbol in the specific game state, and to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the continuous preview performance determination process shown in FIG. 31, while the look-ahead zone performance (background change) can be executed in the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) in the normal game state, the look-ahead zone performance (background change) is not executed in the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) in the specific game state, so that the look-ahead zone performance (background change) is more difficult to execute when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) is executed in the specific game state than when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) is executed in the normal game state. Therefore, in the normal game state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is easily executed, the performance effect related to the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) can be enhanced, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the continuous preview performance determination process shown in FIG. 31, while the look-ahead zone performance (background change) is not executed in the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) in the specific game state, the look-ahead zone performance (background change) can be executed in the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance). Therefore, the look-ahead zone performance (background change) is more likely to be executed when the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance) is executed in the specific game state than when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, in the specific game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed, the performance effect related to the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance) can be enhanced, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the look-ahead zone effect may be executed when the first special symbol changing display (first changing display) is executed in a specific game state, and in this case, the rate may be set to be lower than when the second special symbol changing display (second changing display) is executed.

According to the continuous preview effect determination process shown in FIG. 31, while the look-ahead chance eye effect can be executed in the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) in the normal game state, the look-ahead chance eye effect is not executed in the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) in the specific game state, so the look-ahead chance eye effect is more likely to be executed when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) is executed in the normal game state than when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, in the normal game state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is more likely to be executed, the effect of the effect of the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) can be enhanced, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the continuous preview performance determination process shown in FIG. 31, while the look-ahead chance eye performance is not executed in the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) in the specific game state, the look-ahead chance eye performance can be executed in the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance), so the look-ahead chance eye performance is more likely to be executed when the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance) is executed during the specific game state than when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) is executed during the specific game state. Therefore, in the specific game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed, the performance effect related to the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance) can be enhanced, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, when the first special symbol is displayed in a specific game state (first display), the pre-reading chance eye display may be executed. In this case, the rate may be set to be lower than when the second special symbol is displayed in a specific game state (second display).

(Continuous notice type determination table)
Figure 32 is a diagram showing a successive preview type determination table that is referenced to determine the type of successive preview in presentation modes A to C (normal game playing state), and Figure 33 is a diagram showing a successive preview presentation determination table that is referenced to determine the type of successive preview in presentation modes D to G (specific game playing state).

As shown in Figures 32 and 33, the consecutive preview type determination table associates look-ahead designation commands (planned change patterns), the selection rate (%) of each consecutive preview type, and the consecutive preview type to be selected. The consecutive preview types include "not executed," which does not execute a consecutive preview performance; "look-ahead action performance," "look-ahead effect performance," "look-ahead vibration performance," "look-ahead zone performance," "look-ahead chance eye performance," and "look-ahead effect performance & look-ahead vibration performance," which execute two of the multiple types of consecutive preview performances; and "look-ahead action performance & look-ahead zone performance."

For example, if the look-ahead command (scheduled change pattern) in presentation modes A to C (normal game state) is a miss and the SP reach presentation is to be executed, there is a 79% chance that "not executed" will be determined, a 6% chance that "look-ahead effect presentation" will be determined, a 5% chance that "look-ahead chance eye presentation" will be determined, a 4% chance that "look-ahead action presentation" will be determined, a 3% chance that "look-ahead vibration presentation" will be determined, a 2% chance that "look-ahead zone presentation" will be determined, and a 1% chance that "look-ahead effect presentation & look-ahead vibration presentation" will be determined.

(Continuous preview performance scenario decision table)
Figure 34 is a diagram showing a successive preview scenario determination table for presentation modes A to C (normal game playing states), and Figure 35 is a diagram showing a successive preview scenario determination table for presentation modes D to G (specific game playing states).

The consecutive preview scenario determination table associates the number of reserved special symbols, the look-ahead command (planned change pattern), the selection rate (%) of each preview scenario, and the selected preview scenario, and for reference, lists the pre-changes in each scenario (4 changes before, 3 changes before, 2 changes before, 1 change before) and the presentation style of the consecutive preview performance in that change.

"Pre-change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information that was stored before the special chart determination information that corresponds to the newly received look-ahead command, and "the change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information that corresponds to the newly received look-ahead command.

The "weak notice" has different presentation modes depending on the type of continuous notice. In the case of a look-ahead action presentation, the second movable member 74 performs a weak action by emitting blue light and a weak action sound effect is output. In the case of a look-ahead effect presentation, a blue effect image is displayed around the presentation pattern 70a and a blue effect sound effect is output. In the case of a look-ahead vibration presentation, the vibrator for vibrating the presentation button 17 vibrates weakly for one second and the presentation button 17 flashes white. In the case of a look-ahead zone presentation, a blue zone image (zone background image) is displayed and a zone sound effect is output. In the case of a look-ahead chance eye presentation, the presentation pattern 70a is displayed stopped in a predetermined arrangement of even number symbols (for example, "224" or "668").

The "strong notice" has different presentation modes depending on the type of continuous notice. In the case of a look-ahead action presentation, the second movable member 74 performs a strong action by emitting red light and a strong action sound effect is output. In the case of a look-ahead effect presentation, a red effect image is displayed around the presentation pattern 70a and a red effect sound effect is output. In the case of a look-ahead vibration presentation, the vibrator for vibrating the presentation button 17 vibrates strongly for three seconds and the presentation button 17 flashes red. In the case of a look-ahead zone presentation, a red heat zone image (zone background image) is displayed and a heat zone sound effect is output. In the case of a look-ahead chance eye presentation, the presentation pattern 70a is displayed stopped in a predetermined arrangement of odd numbers (for example, "335" or "779").

The continuous preview performance scenarios include a scenario in which a weak or strong preview is not executed during the pre-change but is executed during the change itself (e.g., scenario 11), and a scenario in which a weak or strong preview is executed both during the pre-change and during the change itself (e.g., scenario 22).

The first feature of the various tables related to the consecutive preview performances shown in Figures 32 to 35 is that the likelihood of a big win is higher when multiple types of consecutive preview performances are performed than when one type of consecutive preview performance is performed. This effectively heightens the player's sense of expectation, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The second feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview effects shown in Figures 32 to 35 is that the continuous preview effects are more likely to be executed (the execution rate is higher) in presentation modes D to G (specific game states) than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states), meaning that the expectation of a big win when the continuous preview effect is executed is lower. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of presentation mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of differentiating the execution rate of the consecutive preview performance between presentation modes A to C and presentation modes D to G, the execution rate of the consecutive preview performance may be different between presentation modes A to C, for example, by making the consecutive preview performance easier to execute in presentation mode B than in presentation mode A, or the execution rate of the consecutive preview performance may be different between presentation modes D to G, for example, by making the consecutive preview performance easier to execute in presentation mode E than in presentation mode D. In this way, the probability of a big win in the consecutive preview performance changes between presentation modes, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview performances shown in Figures 32 to 35 is that the continuous preview performances (here, the look-ahead effect performance, the look-ahead chance eye performance, and the look-ahead action performance) are more likely to be executed when a normal reach performance is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result) in performance modes D to G (specific game states) than when a normal reach performance is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result) in performance modes A to C (normal game states). Therefore, in specific game states where (super) shortened fluctuations are more likely to occur than in performance modes A to C (normal game states), it is possible to prevent the variable performances from becoming monotonous, making the game more interesting.

The fourth feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview effects shown in Figures 32 to 35 is that the continuous preview effects (here, the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead action effect, and look-ahead zone effect) are more likely to be executed when an SP reach effect is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result) in presentation modes D to G (specific game states) than when an SP reach effect is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result) in presentation modes A to C (normal game states). Therefore, in specific game states where (ultra) shortened fluctuations are more likely to occur than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states), it is possible to prevent the variable effects from becoming monotonous, making the game more interesting.

The fifth feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview effects shown in Figures 32 to 35 is that continuous preview effects (here, pre-reading effect effects, pre-reading chance eye effects, pre-reading action effects, and pre-reading zone effects) are more likely to be executed when an SPSP reach effect is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result) in presentation modes D to G (specific game states) than when an SPSP reach effect is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result) in presentation modes A to C (normal game states). Therefore, in specific game states where super-shortened fluctuations are more likely to occur than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states), it is possible to prevent the fluctuation effects from becoming monotonous, making the game more interesting.

The sixth feature of the various tables relating to the continuous preview effects shown in Figures 32 to 35 is that the continuous preview effects (here, the look-ahead action effect and the look-ahead zone effect) are more likely to be executed in presentation modes D to G (specific game states) when a full rotation reach effect is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result) than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states) when a full rotation reach effect is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result). Therefore, in specific game states where super-shortened fluctuations are more likely to occur than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states), it is possible to prevent the fluctuation effects from becoming monotonous, making the game more interesting.

The seventh feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview effects shown in Figures 32 to 35 is that the predictive vibration effect (vibration effect without the effective period of the effect button 17 or the display of the operation prompt image) is more likely to be executed (higher execution rate = different expectation of big win) in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) than in the effect modes D to G (specific game state). Therefore, in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), where the stay period is more likely to be longer than in the effect modes D to G (specific game state), it is possible to make the predictive vibration effect more easily experienced by the player, which makes it possible to increase the interest in the game. Also, in the effect modes D to G (specific game state), where the fluctuation time is more likely to be shorter than in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), it is possible to give the predictive vibration effect a rarity, which makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The look-ahead vibration effect may be executed more easily (at a higher execution rate) in presentation modes D to G than in presentation modes A to C. In addition, in the normal game state, the look-ahead continuous effect may be executed more easily in presentation mode A than in presentation modes B or C, thereby making the execution rate of the look-ahead vibration effect different between presentation modes A to C, and in the specific game state, the look-ahead vibration effect may be executed more easily in presentation mode D than in presentation modes E to G, thereby making the execution rate of the look-ahead vibration effect different between presentation modes D to G. In this way, it is possible to differ the probability of a jackpot when the look-ahead vibration effect is executed between presentation modes, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview effects shown in Figures 32 to 35 is that the look-ahead vibration effect is less likely to be executed (the execution rate is lower) in presentation modes D to G (specific game states) when a specific reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result) than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states) when a specific reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result). Therefore, in presentation modes D to G (specific game states), where the fluctuation time is more likely to be shorter than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states), the look-ahead vibration effect can be made rare, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The ninth feature of the various tables relating to the continuous preview effects shown in Figures 32 to 35 is that the look-ahead action effect is more likely to be executed (higher execution rate) in presentation modes D to G (specific game states) than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states). Therefore, in presentation modes D to G (specific game states), in which the fluctuation time is more likely to be shorter than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states), it is possible to give the look-ahead vibration effect a sense of rarity, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The tenth feature of the various tables relating to the continuous preview performances shown in Figures 32 to 35 is that when a continuous preview performance that ends with one variable performance is executed in performance modes D to G (specific game state), it is less likely (lower rate of execution) that a reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) will be executed in the variable performance that is the subject of the preview of the continuous preview performance, compared to when a continuous preview performance that ends with one variable performance is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of performance mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The eleventh feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview performances shown in Figures 32 to 35 is that when a continuous preview performance that ends with two variable performances is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state), it is more likely that a reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) will be executed in the variable performance that is the subject of the preview of the continuous preview performance, than when a continuous preview performance that ends with two variable performances is executed in performance modes D to G (specific game state). Therefore, the playability can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The twelfth feature of the various tables relating to the continuous preview performance shown in Figures 32 to 35 is that when the continuous preview performance can be executed over multiple variable performances (number of reserved times is 2 to 4), it is more difficult to execute a reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) in the variable performance that is the subject of the preview of the continuous preview performance when the continuous preview performance with only one variable performance is executed in performance modes D to G (specific game state) than when the continuous preview performance with only one variable performance is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state). Therefore, the playability can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The thirteenth feature of the various tables relating to the continuous preview performances shown in Figures 32 to 35 is that when a continuous preview performance spanning three variable performances is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state), it is more likely that a reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) will be executed in the variable performance that is the subject of the preview of the continuous preview performance, than when a continuous preview performance spanning three variable performances is executed in performance modes D to G (specific game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of performance mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourteenth feature of the various tables relating to the continuous preview performances shown in Figures 32 to 35 is that when a continuous preview performance spanning three variable performances is executed in performance modes D to G (specific game state), it is more likely that a reach performance with a high probability of winning (for example, an SP reach performance, an SPSP reach performance) will be executed in the variable performance that is the subject of the preview of the continuous preview performance, compared to when a continuous preview performance spanning three variable performances is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of performance mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fifteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview performance shown in Figures 32 to 35 is that although it is possible to execute the look-ahead action performance using the same movable member (second movable member 74) in performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance modes D to G (specific game state), the expectation of a big win when the look-ahead action performance is executed differs between performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance modes D to G (specific game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of performance mode, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The 16th feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview performance shown in Figures 32 to 35 is that when a look-ahead action performance is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance modes D to G (special game state), the rate at which the second movable member 74, which is not used in the deciding performance, is operated (100%) is higher than the rate at which the first movable member 73, which is used in the deciding performance described below, is operated (0%). This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of mistaking the execution of a look-ahead action performance for a jackpot, and makes the game more interesting.

In addition, in the strong notice of the look-ahead action performance, the first movable member 73 may be operated instead of the second movable member 74. Even in this case, when executing the look-ahead action performance in performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance modes D to G (special game state), it is preferable to operate the second movable member 74 more frequently than the first movable member 73.

The 17th feature of the various tables relating to the continuous preview effects shown in Figures 32 to 35 is that when a look-ahead vibration effect is executed in effect modes A to C (normal game state) and effect modes D to G (special game state), the percentage of effect button 17 in the normal state (0%) is higher than the percentage of effect button 17 in the protruding state (0%). This ensures the rarity of effect button 17 being in the protruding state (it is protruding only in the deciding effect described below), making the game more interesting.

In addition, in the strong notice of the pre-reading vibration effect, the effect button 17 may be vibrated in a protruding state rather than being vibrated in a normal state. Even in this case, when executing the pre-reading vibration effect in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (special game state), it is preferable to make the proportion of the effect button 17 in the normal state higher than the proportion of the effect button in the protruding state.

The 18th feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview performance shown in Figures 32 to 35 is that during a predetermined period (from the start of the fluctuation to the first high-speed fluctuation period of the performance pattern 70a) after the start of the fluctuation performance that is the subject of the continuous preview performance, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when a weak notice of a pre-reading vibration performance (weak vibration of the performance button 17 for one second) that is executed without displaying an operation prompting image is executed than when a weak notice of a pre-reading action performance (weak movement of the first movable member 73 + blue light emission) or a weak notice of a pre-reading effect performance (display of a blue effect image around the performance pattern 70a) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the player's sense of expectation using an operating means that the player can operate, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The 19th feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview performance shown in Figures 32 to 35 is that during a specified period (from the start of the fluctuation to the first high-speed fluctuation period of the performance pattern 70a) after the start of the fluctuation performance that is the subject of the continuous preview performance, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when a strong notice of the look-ahead vibration performance (strong vibration of the performance button 17 for 3 seconds) is executed than when a strong notice of the look-ahead action performance (strong movement of the first movable member 73 + red light emission) or a strong notice of the look-ahead effect performance (display of a red effect image around the performance pattern 70a) is executed. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation can be effectively increased using an operating means that the player can operate, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

(Continuous preview performance execution process of the performance control unit)
The continuous preview performance execution process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 36. Fig. 36 is a flowchart showing the continuous preview performance execution process in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E540-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a special chart variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If a special chart variation pattern designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E540-2, and if a special chart variation pattern designation command has not been received, the process for executing the current continuous preview performance is terminated.

In step E540-2, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the preview scenario of the continuous preview performance (preview action performance, preview effect performance, preview vibration performance, preview zone performance) stored in the preview information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, and in step E540-3, determines whether or not a preview scenario of the continuous preview performance is stored. If a preview scenario is stored, the process proceeds to step E540-4, and if no preview scenario is stored, the current continuous preview performance execution process is terminated.

In step E540-4, the sub-CPU 130a determines the preview pattern (type of continuous preview performance, weak preview, strong preview) to be executed in the current variable performance according to the preview scenario stored in the preview information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, and in step E540-5, sets the continuous preview performance command corresponding to the determined preview pattern in the transmission buffer. This causes the continuous preview performance command to be transmitted to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and the continuous preview performance corresponding to the determined preview pattern is executed. When this process ends, the current continuous preview performance execution process ends.

(Lamp change performance execution process of the performance control unit)
The lamp change performance execution process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 37. Fig. 37 is a flowchart showing the lamp change performance execution process in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E550-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether an icon change scenario is stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c. If an icon change scenario is stored, the process moves to step E550-2 assuming that an icon change performance will be executed, and if an icon change scenario is not stored, the process moves to step E550-6 assuming that a command abnormality has occurred in which the scenario is not stored in the look-ahead information storage area due to failure to properly receive power recovery or winning commands (special chart reservation number designation command, look-ahead designation command) that would clear the change scenario from the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E550-2, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether it is time for the icon to change. If it is time for the icon to change, the process proceeds to step E550-3. If it is not time for the icon to change, the process for executing the lamp change effect ends.

In step E550-3, the sub-CPU 130a sets a lamp effect command corresponding to the color of the icon after the change in the transmission buffer. This causes the lamp effect command to be sent to the lamp control unit 150, and the lamp change effect is executed by changing the light emission mode (light emission color, lit/blinking) of the winning port lamp NR in response to the color change of the icon.

In step E550-4, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether a lamp changing flag, which indicates that a lamp changing performance is being executed, is set in the sub-RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the current lamp changing performance execution process is terminated, and if the lamp changing flag is not set, the lamp changing flag is set and the current lamp changing performance execution process is terminated.

In step E550-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the lamp changing flag is set in the sub-RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the process proceeds to step E550-7. If the lamp changing flag is not set, the process ends for this lamp change effect execution.

In step E550-7, the sub-CPU 130a clears the lamp change in progress flag set in the sub-RAM 130c, and in step E550-8, sets a lamp performance end command in the transmission buffer and ends the current lamp change performance execution process. This causes the lamp performance command to be sent to the lamp control unit 150, and the lamp change performance that was being executed ends.

In this way, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 37, the lamp change effect is executed by changing the light emission mode (light emission color, on/off) of the winning slot lamp NR in response to the change of the icon in the icon change effect. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by a synergistic effect with the icon change effect, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 37, unlike the icon change effect and the continuous preview effect, even if the power is restored while the lamp change effect is being executed, the lamp change effect will not be executed again. This makes it possible to ensure the rarity of the lamp change effect while reducing the control burden, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

When power is restored, as in the case of an icon change effect, the lamp change effect may be executed again in the variable effect that begins after power is restored. In this case, it is advisable to execute the lamp change effect so that it corresponds to the icon change effect that begins after power is restored.

In addition, instead of executing a lamp change performance in response to an icon change performance, the final light emission mode of the winning port lamp NR, the light emission scenario from the previous change to the actual change, etc. may be determined by lottery to execute the lamp change performance.

(Variable performance pattern determination process of the performance control unit)
The variable performance pattern determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 38. Fig. 38 is a flowchart showing the variable performance pattern determination process in the performance control unit 130m, and this process is executed in the special chart special electric performance process described above.

First, in step E610-1, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the received variable pattern designation command, and in step E610-2, selects a variable presentation pattern determination table (FIGS. 39 and 40) that corresponds to the current presentation mode. Details of the variable presentation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E610-3, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the selected variable performance pattern determination table to determine one variable performance pattern from among the multiple variable performance patterns, and sets it in a specified area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E610-4, the sub-CPU 130a sets the variable performance pattern instruction command corresponding to the determined variable performance pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and ends this variable performance pattern determination process. This causes the variable performance pattern instruction command to be sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the variable performance.

(Variable performance pattern determination table)
Figure 39 is a diagram showing a variable presentation pattern determination table for presentation modes A to C that is referenced to determine the variable presentation pattern in presentation modes A to C (normal game state), and Figure 40 is a diagram showing a variable presentation pattern determination table for presentation modes D to G (specific game state) that is referenced to determine the variable presentation pattern in presentation modes D to G.

As shown in Figures 39 and 40, the variable presentation pattern determination table associates the special chart variable presentation pattern designation command, the selection rate (%) of each variable presentation pattern, and the selected variable presentation pattern, and for reference, the presentation configuration for each variable presentation pattern is listed.

"Variation" in the performance configuration column indicates that a normal variation display is executed in which no reach state is formed by the performance pattern 70a.
"Shortened variation" indicates that a shortened variation display is executed that is shorter than the normal variation display and does not result in a reach state.
"L fluctuation" indicates that a long fluctuation display is executed in which a reach state is not formed for longer than in the normal fluctuation display.

"Pseudo failure" refers to the execution of a pseudo consecutive failure effect in which the pseudo consecutive effect is not executed after a performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped during the display of a single changing special pattern and then changed again, which indicates whether or not the pseudo consecutive effect will be executed.
"Pseudo success" indicates that after a presentation is performed to tease out whether or not a pseudo consecutive performance will be performed, a pseudo consecutive success performance is performed, which results in the pseudo consecutive performance being performed.
"(Variation → Pseudo Success) x 2" indicates that two sets of effects are performed, one of which is a teasing effect to hint at whether or not a pseudo consecutive performance will be executed, followed by a pseudo consecutive success performance that results in a pseudo consecutive performance.
"(Variation → Pseudo Success) x 3" indicates that three sets of effects are performed, each of which involves a teasing effect to hint at whether or not a pseudo consecutive performance will be performed, followed by a pseudo consecutive success performance that results in a pseudo consecutive performance being performed.

"N Reach" indicates that the above-mentioned normal reach presentation is executed.
"N "7"Reach" indicates that the above-mentioned normal reach effect is executed when a reach state is formed by the "7" effect pattern 70a.
"SP Reach" indicates that the above-mentioned SP Reach performance is executed.
"Special SP reach" indicates that the above-mentioned special SP reach performance is executed.
"SPSP reach" indicates that the above-mentioned SPSP reach performance is executed.
The "full rotation reach" indicates that the full rotation reach presentation described above is executed.

"SP Development" indicates that a development effect is executed which suggests that an SP reach effect will be executed.
"SPSP Development" indicates that a development effect is executed, which suggests that an SPSP reach effect will be executed.
"Full rotation development" indicates that a development performance is executed that suggests that a full rotation reach will be executed.

"CI" indicates that one of a number of cut-in effects with different odds of winning will be executed depending on whether the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period or the valid period has elapsed.
"Decision" indicates that a decision effect indicating whether or not a jackpot game will be played is executed depending on the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period or the lapse of the valid period.
"Failure" indicates that a failed decision effect is executed as a result of the decision effect, which suggests that a big win game will not be executed.
"Success" indicates that a successful winning effect is executed as a result of the winning effect, which suggests that a big win game will be executed.

"Miss" refers to the formation of a losing result (a losing display pattern such as "358" or "948" that is different from the initial result described below) by the performance pattern 70a consisting of only numbers and no characters, and then temporarily stopping.
"C pattern miss" indicates that the display pattern 70a including a character forms a missing result (a missing display pattern such as "358" or "948" that is different from the initial result described below) and temporarily stops.
"IC" indicates that an eye-catching effect (stop suggestion effect) is executed in which an eye-catching image suggesting that the effect pattern 70a will stop is displayed on the image display device.
The "pattern matching" refers to a temporary stop of a jackpot result (a jackpot display pattern such as "222" or "777") formed by a performance pattern 70a consisting of numbers only and no characters.
The "c pattern alignment" indicates that a jackpot result (a jackpot display pattern such as "222" or "777") is formed and temporarily stopped by the performance pattern 70a in a display pattern including a character.

"Re-draw" refers to the execution of a re-draw effect in which a promotion success effect that results in a favorable jackpot outcome is performed or a promotion failure effect that does not result in a favorable jackpot outcome is performed after inducing whether the performance pattern 70a that has been provisionally stopped at the jackpot outcome (jackpot display mode) will be a favorable jackpot outcome for the player (whether it will change from an even performance pattern that results in a normal jackpot to an odd performance pattern that results in a special jackpot outcome, or a "7" performance pattern that results in the most favorable jackpot game).

"Strong vibration for 4 seconds" indicates that a strong vibration effect (a vibration effect that guarantees a big win) will be executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 will vibrate strongly for 4 seconds.
"Strong vibration for 1 second" indicates that a strong vibration effect (a big win confirmation vibration effect) will be executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 will vibrate strongly for one second.

In the variable presentation pattern determination table for presentation modes A to C (normal game state) shown in Figure 39, when the special pattern is 00 (miss) and the variable presentation patterns are 03 (normal reach presentation) and 05 to 06 (SP reach presentation), the probability that a reach presentation will be performed with an even-numbered presentation pattern 70a is 70%, and the probability that a reach presentation will be performed with an odd-numbered presentation pattern 70a other than "7" is 30%.
In the case of special pattern 00 (miss) and variable presentation pattern 07 to 11 (SP reach presentation or SPSP reach presentation), the probability that a reach presentation will occur with an even presentation pattern 70a is 65%, the probability that a reach presentation will occur with an odd presentation pattern 70a other than "7" is 30%, and the probability that a reach presentation will occur with the "7" presentation pattern 70a is 5%.

In the case of the special pattern 01 (normal big win) and the variable presentation patterns 12 to 17 (normal reach presentation, SP reach presentation, SPSP reach presentation), the rate at which the reach presentation occurs with the even-numbered presentation pattern 70a is 100%.
In the case of the special symbol 02 (certain jackpot) and the variable performance pattern 18 to 19 (SP reach performance), the rate at which the reach performance is performed with the even performance symbol 70a is 60%, and the rate at which the reach performance is performed with the odd performance symbol 70a other than "7" is 40%.

In the case of special pattern 02 (probable jackpot) and variable presentation patterns 20 to 22 (SPSP reach presentation), the rate at which the reach presentation is performed with the even presentation pattern 70a is 6%, the rate at which the reach presentation is performed with the odd presentation pattern 70a other than "7" is 4%, and the rate at which the reach presentation is performed with the "7" presentation pattern 70a is 90%.
In the case of the special symbol 03 (certain special jackpot) and variable presentation patterns 12 to 17 (normal reach presentation, SP reach presentation, SPSP reach presentation), the rate at which the reach presentation is performed with the even presentation symbol 70a is 60%, and the rate at which the reach presentation is performed with the odd presentation symbol 70a other than "7" is 40%.

In the case of the special symbol 10 (miss) and the variable presentation pattern 26 to 27 (special SP reach presentation), the rate at which the reach presentation occurs with the even presentation symbol 70a is 100%.
In the case of the special symbols 04 (normal jackpot) & 05 (certain jackpot) and the variable presentation pattern 27 (special SP reach presentation), the rate at which the reach presentation occurs with the even presentation symbols 70a is 100%.

In the variable presentation pattern determination table for presentation modes D to G (specific game states) shown in Figure 40, when the special pattern is 00 (miss) and the variable presentation pattern is 32 (special SP reach presentation), the probability that a reach presentation will be performed with an even-numbered presentation pattern 70a is 100%.
In the case of the special symbols 01 (normal jackpot), 02 (probable jackpot), and 03 (probable jackpot) and the variable presentation pattern 33 (special SP reach presentation), the rate at which the reach presentation occurs with the even-numbered presentation symbols 70a is 100%.

In the case of special pattern 10 (miss) and variable presentation pattern 36 (normal reach presentation), 38 to 42 (SP reach presentation, SPSP reach presentation), the probability that a reach presentation will occur with an even presentation pattern 70a is 60%, and the probability that a reach presentation will occur with an odd presentation pattern 70a other than "7" is 40%.
In the case of the special symbol 04 (normal big win) and the variable presentation patterns 43 to 48 (normal reach presentation, SP reach presentation, SPSP reach presentation), the rate at which the reach presentation occurs with the even-numbered presentation symbols 70a is 100%.

In the case of the special symbol 05 (certain jackpot) and the variable performance pattern 49 to 50 (SP reach performance), the rate at which the reach performance is performed with the even performance symbol 70a is 60%, and the rate at which the reach performance is performed with the odd performance symbol 70a other than "7" is 40%.
In the case of special symbol 05 (certain jackpot) and variable presentation patterns 51 to 53 (SPSP reach presentation), the rate at which the reach presentation is performed with the even presentation symbol 70a is 3%, the rate at which the reach presentation is performed with the odd presentation symbol 70a other than "7" is 2%, and the rate at which the reach presentation is performed with the "7" presentation symbol 70a is 95%.
In the case of special symbol 05 (certain jackpot) and variable presentation pattern 54 to 55 (full rotation reach presentation), the probability of a reach presentation being performed with even-numbered presentation symbol 70a is 20%, the probability of a reach presentation being performed with odd-numbered presentation symbol 70a other than "7" is 30%, and the probability of a reach presentation being performed with "7" presentation symbol 70a is 50%.

The first feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 39 and 40 is that when an SP reach presentation (excluding special SP reach presentation) or an SPSP reach presentation is executed, an eye-catching presentation is executed to suggest that the presentation pattern 70a will stop and the presentation pattern 70a returns to a display state including the character. This makes it less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable about the change in the display state of the presentation pattern 70a, and it is possible to suggest in advance that the presentation pattern 70a will stop, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The second feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 39 and 40 is that, in the case of a jackpot, there are variable presentation patterns in which a successful winning presentation is executed and the symbols line up, and variable presentation patterns in which a successful winning presentation is executed after the symbols line up. This makes it possible to enhance the presentation effect in the case of a jackpot, and to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 39 and FIG. 40 is that in a variable presentation pattern that results in a jackpot, when a presentation pattern 70a that does not include a character is aligned, a strong vibration presentation (a jackpot confirmation vibration presentation) is executed in which the presentation button 17 is strongly vibrated for four seconds. This makes it possible to effectively present a jackpot, which increases the excitement of the game.

The fourth feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 39 and 40 is that when the presentation pattern 70a including the character is aligned (pattern c), a strong vibration presentation (big win confirmation vibration presentation) is executed in which the presentation button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second. This makes it possible to effectively present the big win, which increases the excitement of the game.

The fifth feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 39 and 40 is that the rate at which reach presentations (normal reach presentations, SP reach presentations, SPSP reach presentations) are produced with even presentation patterns 70a (presentations that result in a normal jackpot when the presentation is a jackpot) is higher than the rate at which reach presentations (normal reach presentations, SP reach presentations, SPSP reach presentations) are produced with odd presentation patterns 70a other than "7" (presentations that result in a jackpot when the presentation is a jackpot). This effectively stirs up the player's joy when a jackpot is produced with an odd presentation pattern 70a other than "7", making it possible to increase the excitement of the game.

The sixth feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 39 and 40 is that the rate at which reach presentations (normal reach presentations, SP reach presentations, SPSP reach presentations) are performed with a "7" presentation pattern 70a (a presentation pattern that results in the most favorable guaranteed jackpot when it becomes a jackpot) is lower than the rate at which reach presentations are performed with an even presentation pattern 70a (a presentation pattern that results in a normal jackpot when it becomes a jackpot). This effectively stirs up the player's joy when a jackpot is achieved with the "7" presentation pattern 70a, making it possible to increase the excitement of the game.

The seventh feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 39 and 40 is that the rate at which reach effects (normal reach effects, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects) are produced with the "7" presentation pattern 70a (the presentation pattern that results in the most favorable probability jackpot when it becomes a jackpot) is lower than the rate at which reach effects (normal reach effects, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects) are produced with odd presentation patterns 70a other than "7" (presentation patterns that result in a probability jackpot when it becomes a jackpot). Therefore, it is possible to effectively stir up the joy of the player when a jackpot is produced with the "7" presentation pattern 70a, and to increase the excitement of the game.

The eighth feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 39 and 40 is that the likelihood of a big win is higher when the reach effect is executed with the "7" presentation pattern 70a than when the reach effect is executed with an even presentation pattern 70a or an odd presentation pattern 70a other than "7". This increases the player's sense of expectation as to which type of presentation pattern will result in the reach effect, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

The ninth feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 39 and 40 is that presentation modes D to G (specific game states) are more likely to execute a reach presentation (SPSP reach presentation) with the presentation pattern 70a of "7" (the presentation pattern that results in the most favorable probability jackpot when it becomes a jackpot outcome) when the most favorable probability jackpot is reached in the most favorable probability jackpot in presentation modes D to G (specific game states) than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states). Therefore, the presentation effect in presentation modes D to G (specific game states) can be improved, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The tenth feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 39 and 40 is that in presentation modes A to C (normal game state), even if a reach effect is executed with the presentation pattern 70a of "7", a jackpot is not confirmed, but in presentation modes D to G (specific game state), if a reach effect is executed with the presentation pattern 70a of "7", a jackpot is confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in presentation modes D to G (specific game state), and to increase the interest in the game.

The eleventh feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 39 and FIG. 40 is that in presentation modes A to C (normal game state), an eye-catching presentation (stop suggestion presentation) can be executed in the first variable presentation (variable display of the first special symbol), while in presentation modes D to G (specific game state), an eye-catching presentation (stop suggestion presentation) is not executed in the first variable presentation, so that the rate at which the eye-catching presentation (stop suggestion presentation) is executed differs between when the first variable presentation (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed during the normal game state and when the first variable presentation (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed during the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to create a difference in the presentation effect of the first variable presentation in the normal game state and the specific game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The twelfth feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 39 and FIG. 40 is that in presentation modes D to G (specific game states), when the first variable presentation (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed, the eye-catching presentation (stop suggestion presentation) is not executed, whereas when the second variable presentation (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed, the eye-catching presentation (stop suggestion presentation) can be executed, so that the rate at which the eye-catching presentation (stop suggestion presentation) is executed differs between when the first variable presentation is executed during a specific game state and when the second variable presentation is executed during a specific game state. Therefore, in a specific game state in which the second variable presentation (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, the presentation effect of the second variable presentation can be enhanced, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The thirteenth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 39 and FIG. 40 is that in performance modes A to C (normal game state), when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed, the pseudo consecutive teasing performance and the pseudo consecutive performance (a performance in which a flame effect is displayed around the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a) can be executed, while in performance modes D to G (specific game state), when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed, the pseudo consecutive teasing performance and the pseudo consecutive performance are not executed, so that the ratio of the pseudo consecutive teasing performance and the pseudo consecutive performance is different between the case where the first variable performance is executed during the normal game state and the case where the first variable performance is executed during the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to make a difference in the performance effect of the first variable performance in the normal game state and the specific game state, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The 14th feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 39 and FIG. 40 is that in performance modes D to G (specific game state), when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed, the pseudo consecutive teasing performance and the pseudo consecutive performance (the performance in which a flame effect is displayed around the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a) are not executed, while when the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed, the pseudo consecutive teasing performance and the pseudo consecutive performance can be executed, so that the ratio of the pseudo consecutive teasing performance and the pseudo consecutive performance is different between the case where the first variable performance is executed during the specific game state and the case where the second variable performance is executed during the specific game state. Therefore, in the specific game state in which the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, the performance effect related to the second variable performance can be enhanced, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The fifteenth feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 39 and 40 is that in presentation modes A to C (normal game play state), when the first variable presentation (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed, a deciding presentation (a valid suggestion presentation that suggests that operation of the presentation button 17 may be effective) can be executed, whereas when the second variable presentation (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed, a deciding presentation (a valid suggestion presentation that suggests that operation of the presentation button 17 may be effective) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal game play state in which the first variable presentation (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The 16th feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 39 and 40 is that in presentation modes D to G (specific game states), when the first variable presentation (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed, the deciding presentation (effective suggestion presentation suggesting that operation of the presentation button 17 may be effective) is not executed, whereas when the second variable presentation (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed, the deciding presentation (effective suggestion presentation suggesting that operation of the presentation button 17 may be effective) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the specific game state in which the second variable presentation (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The 17th feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 39 and 40 is that in presentation modes A to C (normal game play state), when the first variable presentation (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed, the re-lottery presentation is more likely to be executed than when the second variable presentation (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal game play state in which the first variable presentation (variable display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The 18th feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 39 and 40 is that in presentation modes D to G (specific game states), the re-draw presentation is more likely to be executed when the second variable presentation (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed than when the first variable presentation (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the specific game state in which the second variable presentation (variable display of the second special symbol) is more likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Note that, although a reach effect is always executed in a variable performance pattern in which a pseudo consecutive performance is executed, a variable performance pattern in which a reach effect is not executed even if a pseudo consecutive performance is executed may be set.

In addition, if the reel stops provisionally on a losing number after a cut-in or failed-to-win effect, a loss is confirmed, but a revival effect may be executed after a cut-in or failed-to-win effect to confirm a big win.

In addition, an eye-catching effect (stop suggestion effect) may be executed when the first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in a specific game state, and in this case, the rate may be set to be lower than when the second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed.

In addition, instead of executing only the eye-catching effect as the stop indication effect, a light-emitting effect effect may be executed in which a light-emitting effect is displayed on the effect pattern 70a when the C symbols are aligned, to indicate that the effect pattern 70a will stop. In this case, when the first variable effect is executed in the specific game state, the light-emitting effect effect may not be executed when the losing effect pattern temporarily stops, and the light-emitting effect effect may be executed when the jackpot effect pattern temporarily stops. When the second variable effect is executed in the specific game state, the light-emitting effect effect may not be executed when the losing effect pattern temporarily stops without a reach effect, and the light-emitting effect effect may be executed when the losing effect pattern temporarily stops or the jackpot effect pattern temporarily stops after a reach effect is executed.

In addition, when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in a specific game state, a pseudo consecutive effect (a flame effect is displayed around the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a) may be executed, and in this case, the rate may be set to be lower than when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed.

(Timer effect determination process)
Next, the timer effect determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 41. Fig. 41 is a flowchart showing the timer effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m.

First, in step E620-1, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the current variable performance pattern, and in step E620-2, determines whether or not a reach performance equal to or greater than the SP reach performance (SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, full rotation reach performance) will be executed. If a reach performance equal to or greater than the SP reach performance is executed, the process moves to step E620-3, and if a reach performance equal to or greater than the SP reach performance is not executed, the current timer performance determination process ends.

In step E620-3, the sub-CPU 130a uses an event timer count determination table (see FIG. 42) to determine the number of event timer effects to be executed during the current variable effect ("0 times" to "2 times"). Specifically, the event timer count determination table is collated with the jackpot lottery results, variable effect patterns, etc. Details of this event timer count determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

The event timer effect is an effect that indicates the occurrence of one of several suggestive events (excluding icon changes) that raises the expectation of a jackpot game being played during the execution of the variable effect, and also indicates the timing at which the suggestive event will occur. However, it is difficult for the player to determine the type of suggestive event at the time the event timer effect is executed, but the type of suggestive event can be determined at the time the suggestive event occurs.

Suggested events include normal reach effects, pseudo consecutive hits, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects, full rotation reach effects, valid periods, and jackpot symbol stops.

In step E620-4, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the determined number of times for the event timer performance is such that an event timer performance will be executed. If the event timer performance is to be executed (the number of times for the event timer performance is "1 time" or "2 times"), the process proceeds to step E620-5, and if the event timer performance is not to be executed (the number of times for the event timer performance is "0 times"), the current timer performance determination process ends.

In step E620-5, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the determined number of times for the event timer effect is 1. If it is 1, the process proceeds to step E620-6, and if it is 2 instead of 1, the process proceeds to step E620-9.

In step E620-6, the sub-CPU 130a uses a suggestive event determination table for one timer (see FIG. 43) to determine the suggested event to be suggested by the event timer presentation and the timer type classified according to the type and length of the timer. Specifically, the suggestive event determination table for one timer is compared with the variable presentation pattern, etc. Details of this suggestive event determination table for one timer will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

Timer types include short timers, which are a classification of short timer times, middle timers, which are a classification of longer timer times, and long timers, which are a classification of long timer times. Note that the timer times set by the three timer types are short timers < middle timers < long timers.

In step E620-7, the sub-CPU 130a uses the update pattern determination table (see FIG. 45) to determine the timer update pattern (presentation mode) for the event timer presentation. Specifically, the update pattern determination table is collated with the timer type, the jackpot lottery result, etc. Details of this update pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 45.

In step E620-8, the sub-CPU 130a sets the suggested event and the timer performance pattern command indicating the update pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and ends this timer performance decision process. This causes the timer performance pattern command to be transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the event timer performance during the variable performance.

In step E620-9, the sub-CPU 130a uses the first suggestive event determination table for two timers (see FIG. 44(a)) to determine the suggestive event suggested by the first event timer presentation, and the timer type classified according to the type and length of the timer. Specifically, the first suggestive event determination table for two timers is compared with the variable presentation pattern, etc. Details of this first suggestive event determination table for two timers will be described later using FIG. 44(a).

In step E620-10, the sub-CPU 130a uses the update pattern determination table (see FIG. 45) to determine the timer update pattern (presentation mode) for the first event timer presentation. Specifically, the update pattern determination table is collated with the timer type, the jackpot lottery result, etc. Details of this update pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 45.

In step E620-11, the sub-CPU 130a sets the suggested event and a timer effect designation command indicating the update pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c. This causes the timer effect designation command to be sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the first event timer effect during the variable effect.

In step E620-12, the sub-CPU 130a uses the second suggestive event determination table for two timers (see FIG. 44(b)) to determine the suggestive event suggested by the second event timer presentation, and the timer type classified according to the timer length. Specifically, the second suggestive event determination table for two timers is compared with the variable presentation pattern, etc. Details of this second suggestive event determination table for two timers will be described later with reference to FIG. 44(b).

In step E620-13, the sub-CPU 130a uses the update pattern determination table (see FIG. 45) to determine the timer update pattern (presentation mode) for the second event timer presentation. Specifically, the update pattern determination table is collated with the timer type, the jackpot lottery result, etc. Details of this update pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 45.

In step E620-14, the sub-CPU 130a sets the suggested event and the timer performance pattern command indicating the update pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c, and ends this timer performance decision process. This causes the timer performance designation command to be sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the second event timer performance during the variable performance.

(Event timer count determination table)
42 is a diagram showing an event timer count determination table that is referenced when determining the number of times the event timer effect is executed during the variable effect. The event timer count determination table associates the big win lottery result, the variable effect pattern, the allocation ratio (%) for each number of times the event timer effect is executed, and the number of times the event timer effect is determined.

There are three options for the number of times the event timer effect will be performed: "0 times", which means the event timer effect will not be performed; "1 time", which means the event timer effect will be performed once; and "2 times", which means the event timer effect will be performed twice.

The first feature of the event timer count determination table shown in FIG. 42 is that the event timer effect is more likely to be executed when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot than when it is a miss, and the event timer effect is more likely to be executed when a reach effect with a high jackpot expectation is executed than when a reach effect with a low jackpot expectation is executed. This makes it possible to build up the player's anticipation for the execution of a jackpot game, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The second feature of the event timer count determination table shown in FIG. 42 is that the event timer effect is more likely to be executed more times when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot than when it is a miss. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the number of times the event timer effect is executed, thereby making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The third feature of the event timer count determination table shown in FIG. 42 is that the number of times the event timer effect is executed is more likely to be greater when a reach effect with a high probability of winning a jackpot is executed than when a reach effect with a low probability of winning a jackpot is executed. This makes it possible to build up the player's anticipation for the execution of a jackpot game, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The fourth feature of the event timer count determination table shown in Figure 42 is that it is more difficult to execute a timer effect (update effect) during a variable effect when a special SP reach effect is executed than when a reach effect other than a special SP reach effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect) is executed.

In other words, when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed during the normal game state, a reach performance other than the special SP reach is executed, whereas when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed during the specific game state, a reach performance other than the special SP reach is executed, and the special SP reach performance is executed. Therefore, it is more difficult to execute the timer performance (update performance) when the first variable performance resulting in a miss is executed during the specific game state than when the first variable performance resulting in a miss is executed during the normal game state. In this way, it is possible to enhance the performance effect related to the first variable performance during the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the timer effect (update effect) is less likely to be executed when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed during a specific game state than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed during a normal game state. By doing this, it is possible to enhance the effect of the first variable effect during the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed during a specific game state, a special SP reach performance is executed without execution of reach performances other than the special SP reach, whereas when the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed during a specific game state, a reach performance other than the special SP reach is executed, so that the timer performance (update performance) is more likely to be executed when the second variable performance is executed during a specific game state than when the first variable performance is executed during the specific game state. In this way, during a specific game state in which the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is more likely to be executed, the performance effect of the second variable performance can be enhanced, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Note that, when the special SP reach effect is executed, the timer effect is executed, but when the special SP reach effect is executed, the timer effect may not be executed. In this case, when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed during the normal game state, and when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed during the specific game state, the timer effect will not be executed.

(Suggested event decision table for one timer)
43 is a diagram showing a suggested event determination table for one timer, which is referenced when determining a suggested event and a timer type when an event timer effect is executed once during a variable effect. The suggested event determination table for one timer corresponds to a variable effect pattern, an allocation ratio (%) for each suggested event, a determined suggested event, and a timer type.

There are seven types of suggested events: normal reach, pseudo consecutive, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect, valid period, and jackpot symbol stop.

There are three types of timers: short timers, which are a category of short timer times; middle timers, which are a category of longer timer times; and long timers, which are a category of long timer times. The timer times set by the three timer types are short timers < middle timers < long timers.

The first feature of the suggestive event determination table for one timer shown in Figure 43 is that the type of suggestive event is set to differ depending on the variable presentation pattern. This can increase the variety of timer presentations, preventing players from getting bored and increasing their interest in the game.

The second feature of the suggestive event determination table for one timer shown in FIG. 43 is that, as a one-time event timer effect executed during a variable effect, an event executed early in the variable effect (e.g., pseudo consecutive hits, normal reach) is more likely to be determined as a suggestive event than an event executed later in the variable effect (e.g., SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect, valid period, jackpot symbol stop). In this way, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for a long period of time, and to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the suggestive event determination table for one timer shown in Figure 43 is that the higher the probability of a jackpot, the more likely it is that events that occur later in the variable presentation (e.g., SP reach presentation, SPSP reach presentation, full rotation reach presentation, valid period, jackpot symbol stop) are determined to be suggestive events than events that occur earlier in the variable presentation (e.g., pseudo consecutive, normal reach). In this way, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for a long period of time, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The fourth feature of the suggestive event determination table for one timer shown in FIG. 43 is that the higher the expectation of a jackpot for a variable presentation pattern, the more likely it is that a timer type for which a long timer time will be set is determined (the higher the expectation of a jackpot, the more likely it is that a long timer will be determined as the timer type). In this way, the longer the timer time in the timer presentation, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, so the player will have expectations regarding the length of the timer time, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

A fifth feature of the suggestive event determination table for one timer shown in FIG. 43 is that the effect button 17 is more likely to enter a special state in the final stage (final stage) of the variable effect when an event timer effect suggesting the occurrence of a specific event (valid period) is executed than when an event timer effect suggesting the occurrence of a specific event (for example, normal reach, pseudo consecutive hits, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect, jackpot pattern stop) is executed. In this way, it is possible to build up the player's anticipation as to which type of event is the suggestive event, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The sixth feature of the suggestive event determination table for one timer shown in FIG. 43 is that the effect button 17 is more likely to enter a special state (protruding state) in the final stage (final stage) of the variable effect when a middle timer is determined as the timer type than when a short timer is determined. This makes it possible to build up the player's anticipation regarding the length of the timer time, thereby making the game more interesting.

The seventh feature of the suggestive event determination table for one timer shown in FIG. 43 is that the effect button 17 is more likely to enter a special state (protruding state) in the final stage (endgame) of the variable effect when a long timer is determined as the timer type than when a middle timer is determined. This makes it possible to build up the player's anticipation regarding the length of the timer time, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(Suggested event decision table for two timers)
44 is a diagram showing a suggested event determination table for two timers, which is referenced when determining a suggested event and a timer type when an event timer effect is executed twice during a variable effect. In the suggested event determination table for two timers, a variable effect pattern, an allocation ratio (%) for each suggested event, a determined suggested event, and a timer type are associated with each other.

Note that FIG. 44(a) shows a first suggestion event determination table for a timer that counts two times to determine the type of the first suggestion event and the type of timer type, and FIG. 44(b) shows a second suggestion event determination table for a timer that counts two times to determine the type of the second suggestion event and the type of timer type.

There are seven types of suggested events: normal reach, pseudo consecutive, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, valid period, full rotation reach effect, and jackpot symbol stop.

There are three types of timers: short timers, which are a category of short timer times; middle timers, which are a category of longer timer times; and long timers, which are a category of long timer times. The timer times set by the three timer types are short timers < middle timers < long timers.

The first feature of the suggestive event determination table for two timers shown in Figure 44 is that the type of suggestive event is set to differ depending on the variable presentation pattern. This can increase the variety of timer presentations, preventing players from getting bored and increasing their interest in the game.

A second feature of the suggestive event determination table for two timers shown in FIG. 44 is that, for two event timer effects that are executed during a variable effect, both an event that is executed early in the variable effect and an event that is executed late in the variable effect are likely to be determined as suggestive events. In this way, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for a long period of time, and to increase the interest of the game.

A third feature of the suggestive event determination table for two timers shown in FIG. 44 is that the higher the expectation of a jackpot for a variable presentation pattern, the more likely it is that a timer type for which a long timer time will be set is determined (the higher the expectation of a jackpot, the more likely it is that a long timer will be determined as the timer type). In this way, the longer the timer time in the timer presentation, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, so the player will have expectations regarding the length of the timer time, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

A fourth feature of the suggestive event determination table for two timers shown in FIG. 44 is that the effect button 17 is more likely to enter a special state in the final stage (endgame) of the variable effect when an event timer effect suggesting the occurrence of a specific event (valid period) is executed than when an event timer effect suggesting the occurrence of a specific event (for example, an SPSP reach effect) is executed. This makes it possible to build up the player's anticipation as to which type of event is the suggestive event, thereby making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

A fifth feature of the suggestive event determination table for a two-time timer shown in FIG. 44 is that the effect button 17 is more likely to enter a special state (protruding state) in the final stage (endgame) of the variable effect when a long timer is determined as the timer type than when a short timer or middle timer is determined. This can build up the player's expectations regarding the length of the timer time, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

(Update Pattern Decision Table)
45 is a diagram showing an update pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a timer update pattern (performance mode). In the update pattern determination table, timer types, big win lottery results, allocation ratios (%) for each update pattern, and update patterns to be determined are associated with each other, and for reference, timer times for each update pattern, timer display modes, timer display positions, and the possibility of execution of a standby display that indicates that execution of a timer performance is on standby are described.

The "normal pattern" is a normal update pattern in which the timer displayed in a predetermined area of the first image display device 70 subtracts one second at a time from the initial number of seconds until it reaches zero seconds.
The "special pattern" is a special update pattern in which a timer displayed in a specified area of the first image display device 70 subtracts one from the initial number of seconds until it reaches 0 seconds, and then the timer (number of seconds) is rewound and subtracts one again until it reaches 0 seconds.

The probability of expecting a big win for each update pattern corresponding to the short timer is normal pattern 1<normal pattern 2<normal pattern 3.
The probability of expecting a big win for each update pattern corresponding to the middle timer is normal pattern 11<normal pattern 12<normal pattern 13.
The probability of winning for each update pattern corresponding to the long timer is normal pattern 21<normal pattern 22<normal pattern 23<normal pattern 24<normal pattern 25<special pattern 1<normal pattern 26<normal pattern 27<special pattern 2<normal pattern 28.

Thus, the timer effect has multiple timer times (update patterns) set, but the timer effect counts down to 0 seconds to indicate that a specific event (icon change effect, various reach effects, zone effects, count-up effects, the effective period of the effect button 17, the stopped display of a jackpot pattern, etc.) will occur, and is an effect that suggests the timing at which a specific event will occur, so regardless of the timer time (update pattern), the count value will count up to the final point (0 seconds in this embodiment).

The first feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that, regardless of the timer type, an update pattern with a longer timer time is more likely to be determined when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot than when it is a miss. By doing this, the longer the timer time in the timer presentation, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, so the player will have expectations regarding the length of the timer time, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The second feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that even if the timer time is the same, the probability of winning a jackpot varies depending on the display mode (text color) of the timer. This makes it possible to heighten the player's expectations regarding the display mode of the timer, thereby making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game. Specifically, the probability of winning a jackpot according to the display mode (text color) of the timer is white < blue < red < rainbow (guaranteed jackpot).

A third feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that the longer the timer time determined for a timer type, the more timer display modes (text colors) there are. In this way, it is possible to impress upon the player that the longer the timer time determined for a timer type, the higher the chance of winning, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

Note that while text color has been given as an example of the display mode of the timer, other than text color, font may also be used, or a decorative element may be used to decorate the timer, or a combination of these may also be used.

A fourth feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that a plurality of character colors (white, blue, red, rainbow) are set as the display mode of the timer, and the types of the character colors are set to the same colors as some of the icon colors (white, blue, green, red, zebra, rainbow) set as the final icon display mode. In other words, the icon colors set as the final icon display mode include all of the character colors set as the display mode of the timer. In this way, it becomes easy to know which timer character color has a high probability of winning, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.
In addition, the order of the probability of winning indicated by the color type is the same for the icon color type set as the icon final display mode and the character color type set as the timer display mode.

The text color type set as the timer display mode and the icon color type set as the icon final display mode may be exactly the same type.

In addition to the final icon display mode, a display (light emission) color may be used to indicate the probability of winning (other effects), and all or part of the text color set as the timer display mode may be set to the same color. In this case, the order of the probability of winning indicated by the color type may be common to the timer display color and other effects.
Here, other effects may include, for example, multiple display colors for the lines in a line preview effect, or a step-up preview effect in which the effect color or the light emission color of the frame lighting device 10 changes each time a step progresses; various effects are conceivable.

The fifth feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that the probability of winning a jackpot varies depending on the display position of the timer (the closer to the center of the screen, the higher the probability of winning a jackpot). This makes it possible for the player to become interested in the display position of the timer, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, because the display size of the timer differs depending on the display position of the timer, it can also be said that the likelihood of winning a jackpot differs depending on the display size of the timer (the larger the size, the higher the likelihood of winning a jackpot).

The sixth feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that the likelihood of a big win is higher when the timer starts counting down after the standby display is displayed than when the standby display, which indicates that the timer performance is waiting to be executed, is not displayed. In this way, it is possible to build up the player's sense of anticipation even before the timer is counted down, making the game more enjoyable.

The seventh feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that, if the timer time (total) is the same, the likelihood of winning is higher when the timer is updated with a special pattern than with a normal pattern. This can heighten the player's expectations as to whether or not a special pattern has been reached, making the game more enjoyable.

The eighth feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that the rewind time in the special pattern is more likely to be longer when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot than when it is a miss (the likelihood of winning a jackpot varies depending on the timer time after rewinding). This makes it possible to increase the player's anticipation for the rewind time, making the game more enjoyable.

The ninth feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that the initial timer time in a special pattern is different from the timer time after rewinding (the timer time after rewinding is shorter than the initial timer time). This effectively builds up the player's sense of anticipation until rewinding is complete, making the game more enjoyable.

As described above, in this embodiment, events that are suggested by the timer effects and events that are not suggested (jackpot prediction effects) are set. In this way, it is possible to increase the variety of variable effects, prevent players from getting bored, and increase the fun of the game.

It can also be said that the number of events suggested by the timer effect is different from the number of events not suggested by the timer effect (jackpot prediction effect). Specifically, there are more events suggested by the timer effect than events not suggested by the timer effect (jackpot prediction effect). It is also possible to have more events not suggested by the timer effect than events suggested by the timer effect.

In this embodiment, when the timer effect is executed, it always counts down to "0 seconds", but it may also end midway without counting down to "0 seconds". If it ends midway like this, it is sufficient to not suggest any specific event (a so-called false effect).

In addition, in this embodiment, a timer effect is executed in which the timer (quantity) displayed on the image display device is decremented as an update effect, but it is also possible to execute a count-up effect in which the quantity image displayed on the image display device is incremented and the quantity indicated by the final displayed quantity image indicates the likelihood of a jackpot (for example, the type of reach effect, etc.). Even in this case, whether or not to execute the count-up effect can be determined in the same way as the roulette preview effect (so that in the case of a special SP reach effect, the count-up effect is less likely to be executed than when a reach effect other than a special SP reach effect is executed).

(Jackpot notice performance determination process of the performance control unit)
The big win notice performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 46. Fig. 46 is a flowchart showing the big win notice performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m, and this process is executed after the variable performance pattern determination process (the process of determining the variable performance pattern based on the special chart variable pattern designation command) in the special chart special electric performance process described above.

In step E650-1, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the variable performance pattern to be executed in the current variable performance, and in step E650-2, selects a pre-reach notice determination table (FIGS. 47 and 48) for determining a notice pattern for a pre-reach notice performance that makes the player expect that a jackpot game will be executed in the performance period before the reach (high-speed variable period), and determines the notice pattern. Details of the pre-reach notice determination table will be described later.

In step E650-3, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the pre-reach preview pattern is one that executes a dialogue preview. If it is one that executes a dialogue preview, the process proceeds to step E650-4. If it is not one that executes a dialogue preview, the process proceeds to step E650-6.

The "dialogue preview effect" is a type of jackpot preview effect in which an effective period is generated during the fluctuation effect (high-speed fluctuation period), and depending on whether the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period or the effective time has elapsed, a dialogue image suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot is displayed on the image display device, and sound corresponding to the dialogue image is output from the audio output device 9.

In step E650-4, the sub-CPU 130a selects a dialogue preview pattern determination table (see FIG. 49) for determining the dialogue preview pattern of the dialogue preview performance to determine the dialogue preview pattern, and in step E650-5, sets a dialogue preview performance command corresponding to the dialogue preview pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the dialogue preview performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a dialogue preview performance corresponding to the dialogue preview pattern is executed during the fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation period). Details of the dialogue preview pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the pre-reach preview pattern is one that will execute a step-up preview. If it is one that will execute a step-up preview, the process proceeds to step E650-7. If it is not one that will execute a step-up preview, the process proceeds to step E650-9.

The "step-up preview effect" is a type of jackpot preview effect in which step effects are executed in a predetermined order until one of multiple steps from the first step (first stage) to the fifth step (final stage) is reached, without generating an effective period for the effect button 17 during the fluctuation effect (high-speed fluctuation period).

In step E650-7, the sub-CPU 130a selects a step-up preview pattern determination table (see FIG. 50) for determining the step-up preview pattern of the step-up preview performance to determine the step-up preview pattern, and in step E650-8, sets a step-up preview performance command corresponding to the step-up preview pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the step-up preview performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a step-up preview performance corresponding to the step-up preview pattern is executed during the fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation period). Details of the dialogue preview pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-9, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern that executes a pseudo consecutive presentation. If it is a variable presentation pattern that executes a pseudo consecutive presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-10. If it is not a variable presentation pattern that does not execute a pseudo consecutive presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-12.

In step E650-10, the sub-CPU 130a selects a pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 51) for determining the pseudo-continuous performance pattern of the pseudo-continuous performance to determine the pseudo-continuous performance pattern, and in step E650-11, sets a pseudo-continuous performance command corresponding to the pseudo-continuous performance pattern in the transmission buffer. This causes the pseudo-continuous performance command to be transmitted to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and a pseudo-continuous performance corresponding to the pseudo-continuous performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. The pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table will be described in detail later.

In step E650-12, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern that executes an advanced presentation (SP advanced presentation, SPSP advanced presentation, full rotation advanced presentation). If it is a variable presentation pattern that executes an advanced presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-13, and if it is not a variable presentation pattern that executes an advanced presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-15.

In step E650-13, the sub-CPU 130a selects a development performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 52) for determining the development performance pattern of the development performance to determine the development performance pattern, and in step E650-14 sets a development performance command corresponding to the development performance pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the development performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a development performance corresponding to the development performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. The development performance pattern determination table will be described in detail later.

In step E650-15, the sub-CPU 130a uses a roulette notice determination table (see FIG. 53) for determining whether or not to execute a roulette notice to determine whether or not to execute a roulette notice, and in step E650-16, determines whether or not to execute a roulette notice performance. If a roulette notice performance is to be executed, the process proceeds to step E650-17, and if a roulette notice performance is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step E650-19.

The "roulette preview effect" is an effect in which one of multiple options is selected like a roulette wheel by operating the effect button 17 during the valid period or after the valid period has elapsed before or after the start of the reach effect, and the type of option selected suggests the effect that will be executed next (the effect that will be executed shortly).

In step E650-17, the sub-CPU 130a selects a stop option determination table (see FIG. 54) for determining the stop options of the roulette preview to determine the stop option, and in step E650-18, sets a roulette preview performance command corresponding to the stop option in the transmission buffer. As a result, the roulette preview performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the roulette preview performance corresponding to the stop option is executed during the variable performance. The stop option determination table will be described in detail later.

In step E650-19, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern that executes a reach presentation (post-reach presentation). If it is a variable presentation pattern that executes a reach presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-20, and if it is not a variable presentation pattern that executes a reach presentation, the process for determining the current big win preview presentation ends.

In step E650-20, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variation presentation pattern is a variation presentation pattern that executes a cut-in presentation. If it is a variation presentation pattern that executes a cut-in presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-21, and if it is not a variation presentation pattern that executes a cut-in presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-23.

In step E650-21, the sub-CPU 130a selects a cut-in performance pattern determination table (see Figures 55 and 56) for determining the cut-in performance pattern of the cut-in performance to determine the cut-in performance pattern, and in step E650-22, sets a cut-in performance command corresponding to the cut-in performance pattern in the transmission buffer. This causes the cut-in performance command to be transmitted to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and a cut-in performance corresponding to the cut-in performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. Details of the cut-in performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-23, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern that executes a deciding performance. If it is a variable performance pattern that executes a deciding performance, the process proceeds to step E650-24, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that executes a deciding performance, the process proceeds to step E650-26.

In step E650-24, the sub-CPU 130a selects a final performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 57) for determining the final performance pattern of the final performance to determine the final performance pattern, and in step E650-25 sets a final performance command corresponding to the final performance pattern in the transmission buffer. This causes the final performance command to be transmitted to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and a final performance corresponding to the final performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. Details of the final performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-26, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern that executes a re-draw presentation. If it is a variable presentation pattern that executes a re-draw presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-27, and if it is not a variable presentation pattern that executes a re-draw presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-29.

In step E650-27, the sub-CPU 130a selects a re-lottery presentation pattern determination table (see FIG. 58) for determining the re-lottery presentation pattern of the re-lottery presentation to determine the re-lottery presentation pattern, and in step E650-28, sets a re-lottery presentation command corresponding to the re-lottery presentation pattern in the transmission buffer. This causes the re-lottery presentation command to be transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a re-lottery presentation corresponding to the re-lottery presentation pattern is executed during the variable presentation. The re-lottery presentation pattern determination table will be described in detail later.

In step E650-29, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern capable of executing a definitive presentation that notifies the player that a jackpot will result (a jackpot). If the current variable presentation pattern is capable of executing a definitive presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-30. If the current variable presentation pattern is not capable of executing a definitive presentation, the process for determining the current jackpot advance presentation ends.

In step E650-30, the sub-CPU 130a selects a confirmed performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 59) for determining the confirmed performance pattern of the confirmed performance to determine the confirmed performance pattern, and in step E650-31, sets a confirmed performance command corresponding to the confirmed performance pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the current jackpot preview performance determination process. This causes the confirmed performance command to be transmitted to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and a confirmed performance corresponding to the confirmed performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. The confirmed performance pattern determination table will be described in detail later.

(Pre-reach notice decision table)
Figure 47 is a diagram showing a pre-reach notice determination table which is referenced when determining the notice pattern of the pre-reach notice performance for presentation modes A to C (normal game playing state), and Figure 48 is a diagram showing a pre-reach notice determination table which is referenced when determining the notice pattern of the pre-reach notice performance for presentation modes D to G (specific game playing state).

As shown in Figures 47 and 48, the pre-reach notice determination table associates the presentation mode, the jackpot determination result, the type of variable presentation pattern, the selection rate (%) of each notice pattern, and the selected notice pattern.

There are three types of pre-reach preview patterns: "No Preview", where the pre-reach preview effect is not executed; "Dialogue Preview Effect", where a dialogue preview effect is executed; and "Step-up Preview Effect", where a step-up preview effect is executed. The expected probability of a jackpot game being executed (the rate at which the vibration effect associated with the aforementioned pattern matching is executed) is No Preview < Dialogue Preview Effect < Step-up Preview Effect.

The first feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in Figures 47 and 48 is that the pre-reach notice performance is more likely to be executed when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot than when it is a miss, and the pre-reach notice performance is more likely to be executed when a variable presentation pattern with a high jackpot expectation has been determined than when a variable presentation pattern with a low jackpot expectation has been determined. In this way, it is possible to build up the player's anticipation for the execution of a jackpot game, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The second feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in Figures 47 and 48 is that in presentation modes D to G (specific game states), the pre-reach notice effects (both the dialogue notice effects that can execute a vibration effect with the effective period of the presentation button 17, and the step-up notice effects that can execute a vibration effect without the effective period of the presentation button 17) are less likely to be executed (the execution rate is lower) in the event of a miss, compared to presentation modes A to C (normal game states). Therefore, in presentation modes D to G (specific game states), where the fluctuation time is likely to be short, unnecessary pre-reach notice effects are less likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

A third feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in Figures 47 and 48 is that, even in the case of a jackpot, pre-reach notice effects are less likely to be executed (the execution rate is lower) in presentation modes D to G (specific game states) than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states) when the variable presentation pattern is a pattern that executes a normal reach presentation or a pattern that executes an SP reach presentation. Therefore, in presentation modes D to G (specific game states) where the variable time is likely to be short, unnecessary pre-reach notice effects are less likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in Figures 47 and 48 is that the expectation of a jackpot (the rate at which a vibration effect is executed in conjunction with the aforementioned pattern matching, the rate at which a vibration effect is executed in the deciding effect described below, etc.) is higher when a step-up notice effect that does not involve a valid period for the effect button 17 is executed than when a dialogue notice effect that involves a valid period for the effect button 17 is executed. This makes it possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the types of pre-reach notice effects, thereby making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The fifth feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in Figures 47 and 48 is that during normal gameplay, when the second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (long variation effect pattern, special SP reach effect pattern), it is more difficult (lower rate of execution) to execute a line notice effect (operation effect) that involves the effective period (operation) of the effect button 17 than when the first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (other than the long variation effect pattern and special SP reach effect pattern). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal gameplay state, in which the first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be executed, and to increase the interest in the game.

The sixth feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in Figures 47 and 48 is that, during normal gameplay, when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (special SP reach presentation pattern), it is more difficult (lower rate of execution) to execute a dialogue notice effect (operation effect) that accompanies the effective period (operation) of the presentation button 17 than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (reach presentation pattern other than the long variable effect pattern and the special SP reach presentation pattern) during normal gameplay. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal gameplay state, in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed easily, and to increase the interest in the game.

The seventh feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in Figures 47 and 48 is that the dialogue notice notice effect (operation effect) involving the effective period (operation) of the effect button 17 is less likely to be executed (the rate of execution is lower) when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed during a specific game state (long variation effect pattern, special SP reach effect pattern) than when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed during a normal game state (other than the long variation effect pattern and special SP reach effect pattern). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The eighth feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in Figures 47 and 48 is that the dialogue notice notice effect (operation effect) involving the effective period (operation) of the effect button 17 is less likely to be executed (the rate of execution is lower) when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed during a specific game state (special SP reach presentation pattern) than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed during a normal game state (reach presentation pattern other than the special SP reach presentation pattern). Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and to increase the interest in the game.

The ninth feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in Figures 47 and 48 is that during a specific game state, when a second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (other than the long variation effect pattern and the special SP reach effect pattern), the dialogue notice effect (operation effect) that accompanies the effective period (operation) of the effect button 17 is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) than when a first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (long variation effect pattern, special SP reach effect pattern). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the presentation in a specific game state in which the second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is more likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The tenth feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in Figures 47 and 48 is that, during a specific game state, when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (reach presentation patterns other than the long variable effect pattern and the special SP reach presentation pattern), the dialogue notice effect (operation presentation) that accompanies the effective period (operation) of the presentation button 17 is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (special SP reach presentation pattern). Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in a specific game state in which the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is more likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The eleventh feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in Figures 47 and 48 is that when the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal game state (long variable performance pattern, special SP reach performance pattern), the dialogue notice performance can be executed, but the step-up notice performance is not executed. Therefore, the rate at which the pre-reach performance is executed and the number of types of pre-reach performance that can be executed can be made different between when the first variable performance is executed and when the second variable performance is executed in the normal game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The twelfth feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in Figures 47 and 48 is that when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in a specific game state (long variable performance pattern, special SP reach performance pattern), the dialogue notice performance can be executed, but the step-up notice performance is not executed. Therefore, the rate at which the pre-reach performance is executed and the number of types of pre-reach performance that can be executed can be made different between when the first variable performance is executed and when the second variable performance is executed in a specific game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The expectation of a big win (the rate at which the vibration effect associated with the aforementioned matching of symbols is executed, the rate at which the vibration effect associated with the successful decision effect described below is executed, etc.) may be higher when the dialogue preview effect is executed than when the step-up preview effect is executed. Even in this case, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the type of pre-reach preview effect, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the second variable effect (display of the variable second special symbol) that results in a miss during the normal game state is executed, or when the first variable effect (display of the variable first special symbol) that results in a miss during the specific game state is executed, the dialogue preview effect (operation effect) or step-up preview effect (non-operation effect) may not be executed. Also, when the second variable effect (display of the variable second special symbol) that results in a jackpot during the normal game state is executed, or when the first variable effect (display of the variable first special symbol) that results in a jackpot during the specific game state is executed, the dialogue preview effect (operation effect) or step-up preview effect (non-operation effect) may not be executed.

(Dialogue preview pattern determination table)
FIG. 49 shows a dialogue preview pattern determination table which is referred to when determining the preview pattern for the dialogue preview performance.

As shown in Figure 49, the dialogue preview pattern determination table associates the presentation mode, jackpot determination result, variable presentation pattern type, selection rate (%) of each dialogue preview pattern, and the selected dialogue preview pattern, and for reference, the presentation configuration of each dialogue preview pattern (valid suggestion presentation, valid period, presentation content) is listed.

The "valid suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests the possibility of a valid period occurring, and specifically, it is an effect in which multiple semi-transparent effect button images modeled after effect button 17 are displayed and moved on the first image display device 70, and the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit, 3 seconds)" indicates that the valid period for the dialogue preview effect ends with one operation of the effect button 17 or the elapse of 3 seconds.

The "promotion effect" in the validity period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 during the validity period. Specifically, it is an effect in which an opaque effect button image that resembles the effect button 17 is displayed in a specific position, and a gauge image is displayed that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that the above-mentioned opaque effect button image is displayed as a button image imitating effect button 17 in its normal, non-protruding state, which emits white light, and that effect button 17 emits white light.
"Button state" indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and "normal" in the button state column indicates that the effect button 17 is in its normal state, not protruding.

"Normal dialogue (black)" in the dialogue presentation mode column indicates that normal dialogue that does not suggest the possibility of a jackpot game being played is displayed in black text and that the normal dialogue is output as audio.
"Chance Line (Black)" indicates that a chance line indicating the possibility of a big win game is displayed in black text and the chance line is output as voice.
"Reach line (black)" indicates that a reach line that confirms the execution of a reach effect is displayed in black text and that the reach line is output as voice.
"Reach line (red)" indicates that a reach line that confirms the execution of a reach effect is displayed in red text and that the reach line is output as voice.

"Hot line (red)" indicates that a hot line that indicates a high possibility of a jackpot game being played is displayed in red text and the hot line is output as audio.
"Super Hot Quote (Gold)" indicates that a super hot quote that indicates a very high possibility of winning a jackpot game is displayed in gold letters and the super hot quote is output as voice.
"Determined lines (rainbow)" indicates that the confirmed lines confirming the execution of a jackpot game are displayed in rainbow-colored letters and the confirmed lines are output as voice.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column indicates that a weak vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for 1 second from the time the dialogue starts to be displayed (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends).
"Strong vibration (1 second)" indicates that a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 1 second from the time the dialogue starts to be displayed (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends).

The probability of winning for each dialogue effect is: "Normal dialogue" < "Chance dialogue (black)" < "Reach dialogue (black)" < "Reach dialogue (red)" < "Hot dialogue (red)" < "Super hot dialogue (gold)" < "Definite dialogue (rainbow)". Also, the probability of winning for each vibration effect is: "Weak vibration effect" < "Strong vibration effect".

The first feature of the dialogue preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that it is possible to execute a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 when a dialogue with a high probability of winning (a hot dialogue or higher) is displayed. This makes it possible to effectively inform the player that a jackpot is highly likely to occur, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The second feature of the line preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that the vibration effect of the effect button 17 (operation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (higher execution rate) when a line preview effect of a super hot line, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a hot line, is executed than when a line preview effect of a hot line is executed, and the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed than when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is not executed when a line preview effect of a hot line is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's anticipation as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 17 will be executed when the line preview effect is executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the dialogue preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that the vibration effect that is executed when a dialogue with a high probability of winning (a hot dialogue or higher) is displayed is relatively short in duration. This makes it possible to execute an effect with a high production effect while suppressing the inconvenience of making the player mistakenly believe that a jackpot game has been played, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the dialogue preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that there are two types of vibration intensity for the vibration effect that is executed when a dialogue with a high probability of a jackpot (a hot dialogue or higher) is displayed, depending on the probability of a jackpot. Therefore, the vibration intensity of the vibration effect can indicate the probability of a jackpot, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the dialogue preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that in the normal game state, when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (other than the special SP reach effect pattern), vibration (vibration effect) of the effect button 17 can be executed in the dialogue preview effect, whereas when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (special SP reach effect pattern), vibration (vibration effect) of the effect button 17 is not executed in the dialogue preview effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The sixth feature of the dialogue preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that in the normal game state, when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (a reach performance pattern other than the special SP reach performance pattern), vibration (vibration performance) of the performance button 17 can be executed in the dialogue preview performance, whereas when the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (a special SP reach performance pattern), vibration (vibration performance) of the performance button 17 is not executed in the dialogue preview performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The seventh feature of the dialogue preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that in the normal game state, when the first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (other than the special SP reach performance pattern), vibration (vibration performance) of the performance button 17 can be executed in the dialogue preview performance, whereas in the specific game state, when the first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (long variation performance pattern, special SP reach performance pattern), vibration (vibration performance) of the performance button 17 is not executed in the dialogue preview performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The eighth feature of the dialogue preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that in the normal game state, when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (a reach performance pattern other than the special SP reach performance pattern), vibration (vibration performance) of the performance button 17 can be executed in the dialogue preview performance, whereas in the specific game state, when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (a special SP reach performance pattern), vibration (vibration performance) of the performance button 17 is not executed in the dialogue preview performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The ninth feature of the dialogue preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that in a specific game state, when the first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (long variation effect pattern, special SP reach effect pattern), vibration (vibration effect) of the effect button 17 is not executed in the dialogue preview effect, whereas when the second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (other than the long variation effect pattern and special SP reach effect pattern), vibration (vibration effect) of the effect button 17 can be executed in the dialogue preview effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in a specific game state in which the second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The tenth feature of the dialogue preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that in a specific game state, when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (special SP reach performance pattern), vibration (vibration performance) of the performance button 17 is not executed in the dialogue preview performance, whereas when the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (reach performance pattern other than the long variable performance pattern and the special SP reach performance pattern), vibration (vibration performance) of the performance button 17 can be executed in the dialogue preview performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in a specific game state in which the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Note that, although there are weak and strong vibration effects as vibration effects executed in the dialogue preview effect, it is also possible to have only weak vibration effects or only strong vibration effects, or to make the vibration time of the strong vibration effect longer than that of the weak vibration effect.

In addition, the probability of winning a jackpot when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed during the dialogue preview effect is the same in effect modes A to C (normal game state) and effect modes D to G (specific game state), but the probability of winning a jackpot may be made higher in effect modes A to C (normal game state), or the probability of winning a jackpot may be made higher in effect modes D to G (specific game state). In this way, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of effect mode, and it is also possible to increase the player's expectations in effect modes D to G, which are advantageous to the player, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the effective period ends when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective time has elapsed, and the dialogue preview effect is executed, but if the effective period ends when the effective time has elapsed, the dialogue preview effect may not be executed.

In addition, although the dialogue preview performance is executed by generating an effective period, the dialogue preview performance may be executed without generating an effective period, and in that case, the vibration performance executed may be only a weak vibration performance for 1 second or only a strong vibration performance for 1 second.

In addition, when the second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a miss is executed during normal gameplay, the effect button may be vibrated (vibration effect) during the dialogue preview effect, but even in this case, it is preferable to set the rate to be lower than when the first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed during normal gameplay.

In addition, when the second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed during normal game mode, the effect button may be vibrated (vibration effect) during the dialogue preview effect, but even in this case, the rate should be lower than when the first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed during normal game mode, and higher than when the second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a miss is executed during normal game mode.

In addition, when the first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed during the specific game state, the effect button may be vibrated (vibration effect) during the dialogue preview effect, but even in this case, it is preferable to set the rate to be lower than when the second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a miss is executed during the specific game state.

In addition, when a first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot during a specific game state is executed, the effect button may be vibrated (vibration effect) during the dialogue preview effect, but even in this case, the rate should be lower than when a second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot during a specific game state is executed, and higher than when a first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss during a specific game state is executed.

(Step-up notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 50 shows a step-up preview pattern determination table which is referenced when determining the preview pattern of the step-up preview performance.

As shown in Figure 50, the step-up preview pattern determination table associates the presentation mode, jackpot determination result, variable presentation pattern type, selection rate (%) of each step-up preview pattern, and the selected step-up preview pattern, and for reference, the presentation configuration of each step-up preview pattern (step-up (SU) presentation mode, button vibration) is listed.

"1→2" in the step-up performance mode column indicates that the first and second step performances are executed in order.
"1→2→3" indicates that the first to third step performances are executed in order.
"1→2→3→4" indicates that the first to fourth step performances are executed in order.
"1→2→3→4→5" indicates that the first to fifth step performances are executed in order.
"1→2→3→5" indicates that after the first to third step performances are executed in order, the fourth step performance is skipped and the fifth step performance is executed.
In each step-up performance mode, the performance time of the step performance before the final step performance is 1 second, and the performance time of the final step performance is 3 seconds.

In the button vibration column, "Weak vibration at '5' (1 second)" indicates that a weak vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for 1 second from the start of the 5th step effect.

The probability of winning for each step-up performance is "1→2" < "1→2→3" < "1→2→3→4" < "1→2→3→4→5" < "1→2→3→5".

The first feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that when a step effect (fifth step effect) with a high probability of winning is performed, it is possible to execute a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 without generating an effective period for the effect button 17. This makes it possible to effectively inform the player that the probability of winning is high, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The second feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that the vibration effect that is executed when the step effect (fifth step effect) with a high probability of winning is displayed is relatively short. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect with a high performance while suppressing the inconvenience of making the player mistakenly believe that a winning game has been confirmed, and to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that the vibration mode (vibration strength, vibration duration) of the vibration effect executed when the step effect (fifth step effect) with a high probability of winning is displayed is only one predetermined type (weak vibration (1 second)). Therefore, in the step-up notice effect where the player does not operate the effect button 17 and therefore it is difficult to understand the type of vibration effect, it is possible to prevent the effect mode from becoming complicated, making the game more interesting.

The fourth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that in the case of a jackpot, step-up notice effects with a low expectancy are less likely to be executed (the execution rate is lower) in presentation modes D to G (specific game states) than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states). This makes it possible to vary the gameplay depending on the type of presentation mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that weak vibration effects are more likely to be executed (higher execution rate) when a jackpot occurs in presentation modes D-G (specific game states) than in presentation modes A-C (normal game states). This allows the gameplay to be varied depending on the type of presentation mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that the expectation of a big win is higher in presentation modes D to G (specific game states) than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states) when a vibration presentation of the presentation button 17 that is not accompanied by an effective period (display of an operation prompting image) is executed in the step-up notice presentation. Therefore, the playability can be varied depending on the type of presentation mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the step-up preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that during normal gameplay, vibration (vibration effect) of the effect button 17 is less likely to be executed (the rate of execution is lower) in the dialogue preview effect when the second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (long variation effect pattern, special SP reach effect pattern) than when the first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (other than the long variation effect pattern and special SP reach effect pattern). Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal gameplay state, where the first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be executed, and to increase the interest in the game.

It is also possible to set the expectation of a big win higher in presentation modes A to C (normal game state) than in presentation modes D to G (specific game state) when a vibration presentation of the presentation button 17 that is not accompanied by an effective period (display of an operation prompting image) is executed in the step-up preview presentation. Even in this case, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of presentation mode, and it is easier to increase the player's expectations in presentation modes D to G that are advantageous to the player, making it possible to increase the fun of the game.

(Pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 51 shows a pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table that is referenced when determining the performance pattern of the pseudo consecutive performance.

As shown in FIG. 51, the pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table associates the performance mode, the jackpot determination result, the type of variable performance pattern, the selection rate (%) of each pseudo consecutive performance pattern, and the selected pseudo consecutive performance pattern, and for reference, the performance configuration of each pseudo consecutive performance pattern (valid suggestion performance, valid period, performance content) is listed.

The "valid suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests the possibility of a valid period occurring, and specifically, it is an effect in which multiple semi-transparent effect button images modeled after effect button 17 are displayed and moved on the first image display device 70, and the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit, 3 seconds)" indicates that the valid period in the pseudo consecutive performance ends with one operation of the performance button 17 or the passage of 3 seconds.

The "promotion effect" in the validity period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 during the validity period. Specifically, it is an effect in which an opaque effect button image that resembles the effect button 17 is displayed in a specific position, and a gauge image is displayed that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that the above-mentioned opaque effect button image is displayed as a button image imitating effect button 17 in its normal, non-protruding state, which emits white light, and that effect button 17 emits white light.
"White protruding button" indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits white light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above, and that the effect button 17 emits white light.

The "Button Status" in the Validity Period column indicates the status of the effect button 17 during the validity period, and "Normal" in the Button Status column indicates that the effect button 17 is in its normal state, where it is not protruding, and "Protruding" indicates that the effect button 17 is in its protruding state.

"Pseudo failure" in the pseudo consecutive performance mode column indicates that a pseudo consecutive failure performance is executed in which the normal performance pattern 70a temporarily stops without the pseudo pattern suggesting the execution of a pseudo consecutive performance as the central performance pattern 70a temporarily stopping, and a failure sound effect is output.
"Pseudo success" indicates that the central performance pattern 70a, which indicates the execution of a pseudo consecutive hit, temporarily stops, a success sound effect is output, and the second movable member 74 weakly moves, thereby executing a pseudo consecutive hit success performance.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column indicates that a weak vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for 1 second from the time when the pseudo pattern is temporarily stopped (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends).
"Strong vibration (1 second)" indicates that a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 1 second from the time when the pseudo pattern is temporarily stopped (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends).

The probability of winning for each promotion effect is "normal white button" < "protruding white button." In addition, the probability of winning for each button state is "normal" < "protruding." In addition, the probability of winning for each vibration effect is "weak vibration effect" < "strong vibration effect."

The first feature of the pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is that when a pseudo consecutive success performance is performed in a variable performance pattern with a high probability of winning, a vibration performance may be executed in which the effective period of the performance button 17 is generated and the performance button 17 is vibrated. This makes it possible to effectively inform the player that the probability of winning is high, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The second feature of the pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is that the vibration performance executed when the pseudo consecutive success performance is executed in a variable performance pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot is relatively short. Therefore, it is possible to execute a performance with a high performance effect while suppressing the inconvenience of mistaking the execution of the jackpot game for a confirmed one, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is that there are two types of vibration intensity of the vibration performance executed when a pseudo consecutive successful performance is performed in a variable performance pattern with a high probability of winning. This means that the vibration intensity of the vibration performance can suggest the probability of winning, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is that, although it is possible to execute a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive successful performance) using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) in performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance modes D to G (specific game state), the expectation of a big win is higher when a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive successful performance) using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed in performance modes D to G (specific game state) than in performance modes A to C (normal game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of performance mode, and it is easier to increase the player's expectations in performance modes D to G, which are advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is that there are cases where the pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive success performance) is performed using the second movable member 74, and cases where the pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive success performance) is performed using the button vibration motor that vibrates the second movable member 74 and the performance button 17. This makes it possible to enhance the performance effect of the pseudo consecutive performance, and to increase the interest of the game.

Note that, in a variable presentation pattern with a high probability of winning, the presentation button 17 may be in a protruding state during the valid period when a pseudo consecutive successful presentation is performed, but it may be configured not to be in a protruding state.

In addition, the vibration effects executed in the pseudo consecutive success effect include weak vibration effects and strong vibration effects, but it is also possible to have only weak vibration effects or only strong vibration effects.

In addition, although a valid period is generated to execute the pseudo consecutive success or failure effect, it is also possible to execute the pseudo consecutive success or failure effect without generating a valid period, and the vibration effect executed in the pseudo consecutive success effect may be only a weak vibration effect for 3 seconds or only a strong vibration effect for 3 seconds, or only a weak vibration effect for 1 second or only a strong vibration effect for 1 second.

In addition, the presentation modes A to C (normal game state) may be set to have a higher chance of winning when a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive successful performance) using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed than the presentation modes D to G (specific game state), the presentation modes B or C may be set to have a higher chance of winning when a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive successful performance) using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed than the presentation mode A, and the presentation modes D to F may be set to have a higher chance of winning when a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive successful performance) using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed than the presentation mode G.

In addition, in the pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive successful performance), the action performance is performed using the second movable member 74, but the action performance may also be performed using the first movable member 73. In this case, it is preferable to make the execution rate of the action performance using the second movable member 74 higher than that using the first movable member 73.

(Development performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 52 shows a development effect pattern determination table which is referenced when determining the development effect pattern.

As shown in Figure 52, the development performance pattern determination table associates the performance mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable performance pattern type, the development performance type for which the development performance pattern is determined, the selection rate (%) of each development performance pattern, and the selected development performance pattern, and for reference, the performance configuration of each development performance pattern (valid suggested performance, valid period, performance content) is listed.

The "valid suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests the possibility of a valid period occurring, and specifically, it is an effect in which multiple semi-transparent effect button images modeled after effect button 17 are displayed and moved on the first image display device 70, and the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"None" in the valid suggestion effect column indicates that a valid suggestion effect will not be executed, "Yes (false)" indicates that a valid suggestion effect will be executed but it is a false valid suggestion effect in which no valid period occurs afterwards, and "Yes" indicates that a valid suggestion effect will be executed and then a valid period will occur.

"Valid period (long press for 4 seconds)" indicates that the developing performance progresses gradually by pressing and holding the performance button 17, and that the valid period of the developing performance ends when 4 seconds have elapsed.
The "promotion effect" in the validity period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 during the validity period; specifically, as a result of multiple translucent effect button images gathering at a specific position, an opaque effect button image is displayed at the specific position, and a gauge image is displayed that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that the above-mentioned opaque effect button image is displayed as a button image imitating effect button 17 in its normal, non-protruding state, which emits white light, and that effect button 17 emits white light.
"Normal button red" indicates that the above-mentioned opaque effect button image is displayed as a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal, non-protruding state, emitting red light, and that the effect button 17 emits red light.

The "Button Status" in the Validity Period column indicates the status of the effect button 17 during the validity period, and "Normal" in the Button Status column indicates that the effect button 17 is in its normal state, where it is not protruding, and "Protruding" indicates that the effect button 17 is in its protruding state.

"SP notification" in the development performance mode column indicates that an SP development pattern is displayed indicating development to an SP reach performance as a result of the development performance, and an SP development performance is executed in which the first development sound effect is output.
"SPSP notification" indicates that an SPSP development effect is executed in which an SPSP development pattern is derived and displayed, suggesting development to an SPSP reach effect as a result of the development effect, and a second development sound effect is output.
"Full rotation notification" indicates that a full rotation development pattern is derived and displayed, suggesting development to a full rotation reach performance as a result of the development performance, and a full rotation development performance is executed in which a third development sound effect is output.

"Weak action" in the reel action column indicates that when various patterns are derived and displayed (= at the end of the valid period), the second movable member 74 emits blue light and a weak action with a small operating range is performed.
"Strong action" indicates that when various patterns are derived and displayed (= at the end of the valid period), the second movable member 74 emits red light and a strong action with a large swing range is performed.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column indicates that a weak vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for 1 second from the time when the various development patterns are derived and displayed (= the end of the valid period).
"Strong vibration (1 second)" indicates that a weak vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 1 second from the time when various patterns are derived and displayed (= the end of the valid period).

The probability of winning for each action is "weak action" < "strong action." Also, the probability of winning for each vibration effect is "weak vibration" < "strong vibration."

The first feature of the development presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that when a variable presentation pattern with a high probability of winning is performed and a development presentation with a high probability of winning (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) is performed, a vibration presentation may be executed in which the effective period of the presentation button 17 is generated and the presentation button 17 is vibrated. This makes it possible to effectively inform the player that the probability of winning is high, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The second feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that the vibration effect of the effect button 17 (operation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (higher execution rate) when a full rotation development effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than an SPSP development effect, is executed than when an SPSP development effect is executed, and the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed than when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is not executed when an SPSP development effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 17 will be executed when an SPSP development effect is executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the development presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that the vibration presentation executed when the development presentation (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) with a high expectation of a jackpot is performed in a variable presentation pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot is relatively short in duration. Therefore, it is possible to execute a presentation with a high presentation effect while suppressing the inconvenience of mistaking the execution of a jackpot game for one that has been confirmed, and to increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that there are two types of vibration intensity of the vibration effect that is executed when a development effect (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) is performed, which is a variable effect pattern with a high probability of winning, depending on the probability of winning. Therefore, the vibration intensity of the vibration effect can indicate the probability of winning, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The fifth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that, although development effects (such as SPSP development effects) can be executed using the same presentation device (presentation button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) in presentation modes A to C (normal game state) and presentation modes D to G (specific game state), the expectation of a big win is higher when a development effect using a presentation device (presentation button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed in presentation modes D to G (specific game state) than in presentation modes A to C (normal game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of presentation mode, and it is easier to increase the player's expectations in presentation modes D to G, which are advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the development presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that during normal gameplay, when the first variation presentation (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (other than the special SP reach presentation), vibration (vibration presentation) of the presentation button 17 can be executed in the development presentation, whereas when the second variation presentation (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (special SP reach presentation pattern), vibration (vibration presentation) of the presentation button 17 is not executed in the development presentation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal gameplay state in which the first variation presentation (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The seventh feature of the development presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that in the normal game state, when the first variable presentation (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (other than the special SP reach presentation pattern), vibration (vibration presentation) of the presentation button 17 can be executed in the development presentation, whereas when the second variable presentation (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (special SP reach presentation pattern), vibration (vibration presentation) of the presentation button 17 is not executed in the development presentation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal game state in which the first variable presentation (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed during normal game play (other than the special SP reach effect), vibration (vibration effect) of the effect button 17 can be executed in the development effect, whereas when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed during the specific game play (special SP reach effect), vibration (vibration effect) of the effect button 17 is not executed in the development effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the presentation in the normal game play state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The ninth feature of the development presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that in the normal game state, when the first variable presentation (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (a reach presentation pattern other than the special SP reach presentation pattern), vibration (vibration presentation) of the presentation button 17 can be executed in the development presentation, whereas in the specific game state, when the first variable presentation (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (a special SP reach presentation pattern), vibration (vibration presentation) of the presentation button 17 is not executed in the development presentation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal game state in which the first variable presentation (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The ninth feature of the development presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that in a specific game state, when a first variation presentation (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (special SP reach presentation pattern), vibration (vibration presentation) of the presentation button 17 is not executed in the development presentation, whereas when a second variation presentation (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (other than the special SP reach presentation pattern), vibration (vibration presentation) of the presentation button 17 can be executed in the development presentation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in a specific game state in which the second variation presentation (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The tenth feature of the development presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that in a specific game state, when the first variable presentation (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (special SP reach presentation pattern), vibration (vibration presentation) of the presentation button 17 is not executed in the development presentation, whereas when the second variable presentation (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (reach presentation pattern other than the special SP reach presentation pattern), vibration (vibration presentation) of the presentation button 17 can be executed in the development presentation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in a specific game state in which the second variable presentation (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

Note that, although there are weak vibration effects and strong vibration effects as vibration effects executed in the development effects, it is also possible to have only weak vibration effects or only strong vibration effects.

In addition, the expectation of a jackpot may be higher in presentation modes A to C (normal game state) when an advanced presentation (such as an SPSP advanced presentation) using the same presentation device (such as the presentation button vibration motor, the second movable member 74, etc.) is executed than in presentation modes D to G (specific game state), the expectation of a jackpot may be higher in presentation modes B or C when an advanced presentation using the same presentation device (such as the presentation button vibration motor, the second movable member 74, etc.) is executed than in presentation mode A, and the expectation of a jackpot may be higher in presentation modes D to F when an advanced presentation using the same presentation device (such as the presentation button vibration motor, the second movable member 74, etc.) is executed than in presentation mode G.

In addition, when the second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a miss is executed during normal game play, the effect button may be vibrated (vibration effect) in the advanced effect, but even in this case, it is preferable to set the rate to be lower than when the first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed during normal game play.

In addition, when a second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed during normal gameplay, the effect button may be vibrated (vibration effect) in the advanced effect, but even in this case, the rate should be lower than when a first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed during normal gameplay, and higher than when a second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a miss is executed during normal gameplay.

In addition, when the first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed during the specific game state, the effect button may be vibrated (vibration effect) in the development effect, but even in this case, it is preferable to set the rate to be lower than when the second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a miss is executed during the specific game state.

In addition, when a first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot during a specific game state is executed, the effect button may be vibrated (vibration effect) in the development effect, but even in this case, the rate should be lower than when a second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot during a specific game state is executed, and higher than when a first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss during a specific game state is executed.

(Roulette prediction decision table)
53 is a diagram showing a roulette notice determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not to execute a roulette notice effect that is executed during a variable effect. The roulette notice determination table associates a jackpot lottery result, a variable effect pattern, and an allocation ratio (%) of whether or not to execute a roulette notice effect.

The first feature of the roulette notice determination table shown in Figure 53 is that it is more difficult for a roulette notice effect to be executed during a variable effect when a special SP reach effect is executed than when a reach effect other than a special SP reach effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect) is executed.

In other words, when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed during the normal game state, a reach performance other than the special SP reach is executed, whereas when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed during the specific game state, a reach performance other than the special SP reach is executed, and the special SP reach performance is executed. Therefore, it is more difficult for the roulette notice performance (selection performance) to be executed when the first variable performance resulting in a miss is executed during the specific game state than when the first variable performance resulting in a miss is executed during the normal game state. In this way, the performance effect of the first variable performance can be enhanced during the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, it is more difficult for the roulette preview effect (selection effect) to be executed when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed during a specific game state than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed during a normal game state. By doing this, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the first variable effect during the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed during a specific game state, a special SP reach performance is executed without any reach performance other than the special SP reach, whereas when the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed during a specific game state, a reach performance other than the special SP reach is executed, so that the roulette notice performance (selection performance) is more likely to be executed when the second variable performance is executed during a specific game state than when the first variable performance is executed during a specific game state. In this way, during a specific game state in which the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is more likely to be executed, the performance effect of the second variable performance can be enhanced, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

When the special SP reach effect is executed, the roulette notice effect is executed, but when the special SP reach effect is executed, the roulette notice effect may not be executed. In this case, when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed during the normal game state, and when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed during the specific game state, the roulette notice effect will not be executed.

(Roulette notice stop option decision table)
54 is a diagram showing a roulette notice stop option determination table that is referred to when determining the options to be stopped in the roulette notice effect. In the roulette notice stop option determination table, the change effect pattern, the allocation ratio (%) of the stop options, the stop options to be determined, and the type of options to be displayed are associated with each other.

There are six stop options: "Crap," "Pseudo-consecutive," "Chance," "SP," "SPSP," and "Full Spin."

"Kusu" is not an option that suggests any kind of production, but rather an option that suggests a low probability of winning the jackpot (a miss).
"Pseudo consecutive wins" is an option that suggests that a pseudo consecutive win performance will be executed.
"Chance" is not an option that suggests any kind of performance, but an option that suggests that the probability of winning the jackpot is higher than "Loss".
"SP" is an option that suggests that a SP reach performance will be executed.
"SPSP" is an option that suggests that a SPSP reach performance will be executed.
"Full rotation" is an option that suggests that a full rotation reach effect will be executed.

The first feature of the roulette preview stop option determination table shown in FIG. 54 is that the likelihood of winning varies depending on the type of option displayed. Specifically, the likelihood of winning is higher when "Kasu" is not included than when "Kasu" is included, higher when "Chance" is not included than when "Chance" is included, and higher when "Full Spin" is included than when "Full Spin" is not included. In this way, the player can enjoy predicting the likelihood of winning from the type of option, making the game more interesting.

The second feature of the roulette preview stop option determination table shown in FIG. 54 is that in the normal game state, when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed (other than the special SP reach), the roulette preview effect including an option with a high probability of winning is more likely to be executed (the probability of execution is higher) than when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the presentation in the normal game state, in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The third feature of the roulette preview stop option determination table shown in FIG. 54 is that in the normal game state, when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed (other than special SP reach), the roulette preview effect including an option with a high probability of winning is more likely to be executed (the probability of execution is higher) than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific game state (special SP reach). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the presentation in the normal game state where the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The fourth feature of the roulette preview stop option determination table shown in FIG. 54 is that in a specific game state, a roulette preview effect including an option with a high probability of winning is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed (other than special SP reach) than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed (special SP reach). Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in a specific game state in which the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is more likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The fifth feature of the roulette preview stop option determination table shown in FIG. 54 is that a roulette preview effect including an option with a high probability of winning is more likely to be executed (higher execution rate) when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in a specific gaming state (other than special SP reach) than when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in a normal gaming state (special SP reach). Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in a specific gaming state where the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is more likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

(Cut-in performance pattern determination table)
Figure 55 is a diagram showing a cut-in presentation pattern determination table which is referred to when determining the presentation pattern of the cut-in presentation for presentation modes A to C (normal game play states), and Figure 56 is a diagram showing a cut-in presentation pattern determination table which is referred to when determining the presentation pattern of the cut-in presentation for presentation modes D to G (specific game play states).

As shown in Figures 55 and 56, the cut-in performance pattern determination table associates the performance mode, the jackpot determination result, the type of variable performance pattern, the selection rate (%) of each cut-in performance pattern, and the cut-in performance pattern to be selected, and for reference, the performance configuration of each cut-in performance pattern (valid suggestion performance, valid period, performance content) is listed.

The "valid suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests the possibility of a valid period occurring, and specifically, it is an effect in which multiple semi-transparent effect button images modeled after effect button 17 are displayed and moved on the first image display device 70, and the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit, 4 seconds)" indicates that the valid period in the cut-in effect ends with one operation of the effect button 17 or the passage of 4 seconds.

The "promotion effect" in the validity period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 during the validity period. Specifically, without executing a validity suggestion effect or as a result of executing a validity suggestion effect, an opaque effect button image is displayed in a specific position, and a gauge image is displayed that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that the above-mentioned opaque effect button image is displayed as a button image imitating effect button 17 in its normal, non-protruding state, which emits white light, and that effect button 17 emits white light.
"Red protruding button" indicates that a button image imitating the protruding effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits red light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above, and that the effect button 17 emits red light.
"Protruding button rainbow" indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits rainbow light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above, and that the effect button 17 emits rainbow light.

The "Button Status" in the Validity Period column indicates the status of the effect button 17 during the validity period, with "Normal" indicating that the effect button 17 is in its normal state, not protruding. "Protruding" indicating that the effect button 17 is in its protruding state.

"Blue cut-in" in the cut-in performance mode column indicates that a blue cut-in performance is executed in which a blue frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and the first cut-in sound effect is output.
"Green cut-in" indicates that a green frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and a green cut-in performance is executed in which a second cut-in sound effect is output.
"Red cut-in" indicates that a red frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and a red cut-in performance is executed in which a third cut-in sound effect is output.

"Weak vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column indicates that a weak vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for 3 seconds from the time when the cut-in image begins to be displayed (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends).
"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" indicates that a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 3 seconds from the time when the cut-in image begins to be displayed (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends).

The likelihood of winning for each cut-in is "blue cut-in" < "green cut-in" < "red cut-in." Also, the likelihood of winning for each vibration effect is "weak vibration effect" < "strong vibration effect."

The first feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in Figures 55 and 56 is that when a cut-in image with a high probability of winning is displayed (a cut-in effect is executed), a vibration effect may be executed in which an effective period of the effect button 17 is generated and the effect button 17 is vibrated. This makes it possible to effectively inform the player that the probability of winning is high, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The second feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in Figures 55 and 56 is that the vibration effect that is executed when a cut-in image with a high probability of winning is displayed (a cut-in effect is executed) lasts for a relatively long time. This makes it possible to effectively inform the player that the probability of winning is high, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The third feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in Figures 55 and 56 is that there are two types of vibration intensity for the vibration effect that is executed when a cut-in image with a high probability of winning is displayed (a cut-in effect is executed), depending on the probability of winning. Therefore, the vibration intensity of the vibration effect can indicate the probability of winning, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

The fourth feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in Figures 55 and 56 is that in the normal game state, when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (other than special SP reach), the vibration (vibration effect) of the effect button 17 is more likely to be executed (the probability of execution is higher) in the cut-in effect than when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (special SP reach). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state, in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The fifth feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in Figures 55 and 56 is that in the normal game state, when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (other than special SP reach), the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) in the cut-in effect than when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (special SP reach). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state, where the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The sixth feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in Figures 55 and 56 is that in the normal game state, when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (other than special SP reach), the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) in the cut-in effect than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (special SP reach) in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state, in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The seventh feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in Figures 55 and 56 is that in the normal game state, when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (other than special SP reach), the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) in the cut-in effect than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (special SP reach) in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state, in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The eighth feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in Figures 55 and 56 is that in a specific game state, vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) is more likely to be executed (higher rate of execution) in a cut-in effect when a second variable effect (variable display of second special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (other than special SP reach) than when a first variable effect (variable display of first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (special SP reach). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in a specific game state in which the second variable effect (variable display of second special symbol) is more likely to be executed, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

The ninth feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in Figures 55 and 56 is that in a specific game state, vibration (vibration effect) of the effect button 17 is more likely to be executed (higher rate of execution) in a cut-in effect when a second variable effect (variable display of second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (other than special SP reach) than when a first variable effect (variable display of first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (special SP reach). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in a specific game state in which the second variable effect (variable display of second special symbol) is more likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Note that, although there are weak vibration effects and strong vibration effects as vibration effects executed during cut-in effects, it is also possible to have only weak vibration effects or only strong vibration effects.

Although the cut-in effect is executed by generating a valid period, the cut-in effect may be executed without generating a valid period, and in that case, the vibration effect executed may be only a weak vibration effect for 3 seconds or only a strong vibration effect for 3 seconds, or only a weak vibration effect for 1 second or only a strong vibration effect for 1 second.

In addition, when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a miss during the normal game state is executed, or when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss during the specific game state is executed, the vibration (vibration effect) of the effect button 17 may not be executed in the cut-in effect. Also, when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot during the normal game state is executed, or when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot during the specific game state is executed, the vibration (vibration effect) of the effect button 17 may not be executed in the cut-in effect.

In addition, when the second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed during the normal game state, the cut-in effect including the valid suggestion effect may not be executed, or a cut-in effect without a valid suggestion effect may be executed, and when the first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed during the specific game state, the cut-in effect including the valid suggestion effect may not be executed, or a cut-in effect without a valid suggestion effect may be executed.

(Decisive performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 57 shows a finishing effect pattern determination table which is referred to when determining the effect pattern of the finishing effect.

As shown in Figure 57, the deciding effect pattern determination table associates the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each deciding effect pattern, and the deciding effect pattern to be selected, and for reference, the effect configuration of each deciding effect pattern (valid suggestion effect, valid period, effect content) is listed.

The "valid suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests the possibility of a valid period occurring, and specifically, it is an effect in which multiple semi-transparent effect button images modeled after effect button 17 are displayed and moved on the first image display device 70, and the button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit, 5 seconds)" indicates that the valid period for the deciding effect ends with one operation of the effect button 17 or the passage of 5 seconds.

The "promotion effect" in the validity period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 during the validity period. Specifically, without executing a validity suggestion effect or as a result of executing a validity suggestion effect, an opaque effect button image is displayed in a specific position, and a gauge image is displayed that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that the above-mentioned opaque effect button image is displayed as a button image imitating effect button 17 in its normal, non-protruding state, which emits white light, and that effect button 17 emits white light.
"Red protruding button" indicates that a button image imitating the protruding effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits red light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above, and that the effect button 17 emits red light.
"Protruding button rainbow" indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits rainbow light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above, and that the effect button 17 emits rainbow light.

The "Button Status" in the Validity Period column indicates the status of the effect button 17 during the validity period, with "Normal" indicating that the effect button 17 is in its normal state, where it is not protruding. "Protruding" indicating that the effect button 17 is in its protruding state.

"Fail" in the column for the winning performance mode indicates that the first movable member 73 does not move and the screen of the first image display device 70 turns dark, resulting in a winning failure performance that suggests that a jackpot game will not be played.
"Success" indicates that the first movable member 73 moves to its maximum operating position, emits rainbow light, and a success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, thereby executing a decisive success presentation suggesting that a jackpot game will be played.

In the button vibration column, "Strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" indicates that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 will vibrate strongly for 4 seconds from the start of the successful decision effect (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends), followed by a 1-second interval and then a strong vibration effect (successful decision vibration effect) for 5 seconds.

In the button illumination column, "Rainbow illumination (11 seconds)" indicates that the illumination button LED for illuminating the illumination button 17 will illuminate in a rainbow pattern for 11 seconds (a longer period than the illumination button 17 is vibrating strongly) from the start of the successful selection illumination (= when the illumination button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends).

The probability of winning for each promotion is as follows: "normal white button" < "protruding red button" < "protruding rainbow button." Also, the probability of winning for each button state is "normal" < "protruding."

The first feature of the deciding effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 57 is that when a deciding success effect is executed, a valid period is generated and a vibration effect is executed in which the effect button 17 is vibrated. This makes it possible to effectively notify the player that a big win game is about to be played, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The second feature of the deciding effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 57 is that the effective period of the effect button 17 that occurs during a variable effect occurs for the longest period of time. This makes it possible to prevent the player from forgetting to operate the effect button 17, thereby making the game more interesting.

The third feature of the deciding effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 57 is that the effect button 17 vibrates for the longest period of time as a strong vibration effect that occurs during a variable effect. This effectively heightens the player's sense of elation when a deciding effect is successful, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

The fourth feature of the deciding effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 57 is that the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 lasts for a longer period than the vibration period of the effect button 17. This makes it possible to maintain the player's sense of elation even after the vibration of the effect button 17 has ended, thereby making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the deciding performance (successful deciding performance), the action performance is performed using the first movable member 73, but the action performance may also be performed using the second movable member 74. In this case, it is preferable to make the execution rate of the action performance using the first movable member 73 higher than that using the second movable member 74.

(Re-selection performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a re-lottery effect pattern determination table which is referred to when determining the effect pattern of the re-lottery effect.

As shown in FIG. 58, the re-draw performance pattern determination table associates the performance mode, the presence or absence of promotion (whether promotion is planned), the selection rate (%) of each re-draw performance pattern, and the re-draw performance pattern to be selected, and for reference, the performance configuration of each re-draw performance pattern (valid suggested performance, valid period, performance content) is also listed.

The "valid suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests the possibility of a valid period occurring, and specifically, it is an effect in which multiple semi-transparent effect button images modeled after effect button 17 are displayed and moved on the first image display device 70, and the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit, 3 seconds)" indicates that the valid period for the re-lottery effect ends when the effect button 17 is operated once or when 3 seconds have elapsed.

The "promotion effect" in the validity period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 during the validity period. Specifically, it is an effect in which an opaque effect button image is displayed in a specific position without executing a validity suggestion effect, and a gauge image is displayed that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that the above-mentioned opaque effect button image is displayed as a button image imitating effect button 17 in its normal, non-protruding state, which emits white light, and that effect button 17 emits white light.
"Normal button red" indicates that the above-mentioned opaque effect button image is displayed as a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal, non-protruding state, emitting red light, and that the effect button 17 emits red light.
"Normal button rainbow" indicates that the above-mentioned opaque effect button image is displayed as a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal, non-protruding state, emitting rainbow light, and that the effect button 17 emits rainbow light.

The "Button Status" in the Validity Period column indicates the status of the effect button 17 during the validity period, and "Normal" in the Button Status column indicates that the effect button 17 is in its normal state, not protruding.

The "promotion failure effect" in the column for the re-draw effect mode indicates that a non-promotion pattern that is not advantageous to the player as a result of the re-draw effect (for example, an even number pattern → an even number pattern, an odd number pattern other than "7" → an odd number pattern other than "7") is derived and displayed (temporarily stopped), and a non-promotion sound effect is output.
A "successful promotion effect" refers to the derivative display (temporarily stopped) of a promoted symbol that is advantageous to the player as a result of a re-draw effect (for example, an even number symbol → odd number symbol, or an odd number symbol other than "7" → "7"), and a promotion sound effect is output.

In the button vibration column, "Strong vibration (3 seconds)" indicates that a strong vibration effect will be executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 will vibrate strongly for 3 seconds from the time when the promotion pattern is derived and displayed (= the end of the valid period).

In the button illumination column, "Rainbow illumination (4 seconds)" indicates that the effect button LED that illuminates the effect button 17 will emit rainbow light for 4 seconds (a longer period than the effect button 17 is vibrating strongly) from the time the promotion symbol is derived and displayed (= the end of the valid period).

The probability of winning for each promotion is "normal white button" < "normal red button" < "normal rainbow button".

The first feature of the re-draw effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that when a promotion success effect is executed, a valid period is generated and a vibration effect is executed to vibrate the effect button 17. This makes it possible to effectively notify the player that they have been promoted to a favorable effect pattern, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The second feature of the re-draw effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 is performed for a longer period of time than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, the player's sense of elation can be maintained even after the strong vibration effect has ended, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Note that, although a valid period is generated to execute a re-draw effect (promotion failure effect, promotion success effect), it is also possible to execute a re-draw effect without generating a valid period.

(Determined performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 59 shows a fixed effect pattern determination table which is referred to when determining the effect pattern of a fixed effect.

As shown in FIG. 59, the confirmed presentation pattern determination table associates the jackpot determination result, the variable presentation pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each confirmed presentation pattern, and the confirmed presentation pattern to be selected, and also lists the presentation configuration (execution timing, presentation content) of each confirmed presentation pattern for reference.

A "-" in the execution timing column indicates that the confirmation effect is not executed at that time, and an "o" indicates that the confirmation effect is executed at that time.
The "confirmation sound" in the sound column indicates that a confirmation sound is output to indicate that a big win game has been executed.
"Handle rainbow illumination" in the illumination column indicates that the handle LED for illuminating the launch handle 15 will illuminate in rainbow colors from the time the confirmation sound is output until the fluctuation stops (for more than four seconds until the performance pattern is displayed as having stopped).

In the button vibration column, "Strong vibration (3 seconds)" indicates that a strong vibration effect will be executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 will vibrate strongly for 3 seconds from the time the confirmation sound is output.

The first feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 59 is that when a fixed effect is executed, a vibration effect is executed in which the effect button 17 vibrates without generating an effective period. This makes it possible to effectively notify the player that a big win game is about to be played, thereby increasing the interest of the player in the game.

The second feature of the determined effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 59 is that the rainbow light emission of the launch handle 15 occurs for a longer period of time than the strong vibration effect. This makes it possible to maintain the player's sense of elation even after the strong vibration effect has ended, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A third feature of the confirmed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 59 is that in the normal game state, when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed (other than special SP reach), the confirmed effect (vibration effect of the effect button 17) is more likely to be executed (the probability of execution is higher) than when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed (special SP reach). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state, in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The fourth feature of the final effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 59 is that in a specific game state, the final effect (vibration effect of the effect button 17) is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special pattern) is executed (other than special SP reach) than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special pattern) is executed (special SP reach). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the performance in a specific game state in which the second variable effect (variable display of the second special pattern) is more likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed during the normal game state, or when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed during the specific game state, the confirmation effect (vibration effect of the effect button 17) may not be executed.

(Summary of the various tables shown in Figures 39 to 59)
39 to 59, the first feature of the various tables is that the expectation of a big win (the rate at which a vibration effect (strong vibration for 4 seconds) is executed in association with a matching pattern, the rate at which a vibration effect (strong vibration for 4 seconds to 5 seconds) is executed in a deciding effect, etc.) is higher when a vibration effect (weak vibration for 1 second) is executed in a step-up preview effect that does not involve a valid period of the effect button 17 than when a vibration effect (weak vibration for 1 second or strong vibration for 1 second) is executed in a dialogue preview effect that involves a valid period of the effect button 17. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the types of pre-reach preview effects, and to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the expectation of a big win (the rate at which the vibration effect (strong vibration for 4 seconds) associated with the aforementioned pattern matching is executed, the rate at which the vibration effect (strong vibration for 4 seconds to 5 seconds) is executed in the deciding effect described below, etc.) may be higher when a vibration effect (weak vibration for 1 second or strong vibration for 1 second) is executed in a dialogue preview effect that involves the effective period of the effect button 17 than when a vibration effect (weak vibration for 1 second) is executed in a step-up preview effect that does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17. Even in this case, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the type of pre-reach preview effect, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The second feature of the various tables shown in Figs. 39 to 59 is that the vibration effects executed as the big win notice effects include a first vibration effect with a relatively short vibration period (vibration effects (1 second) during a dialogue notice effect, step-up notice effect, pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, etc.), and a second vibration effect with a longer vibration period (effect period) than the first vibration effect (vibration effects longer than 1 second during a cut-in effect, successful decision effect, confirmation effect, etc. (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds to 5 seconds)). In a variable effect in which the first effect period (pre-reach effect) is followed by a second effect period (normal reach effect) or a third effect period (SP/SPSP reach effect), the first vibration effect is more likely to be executed (higher execution rate) during the first effect period than during the second effect period. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation without mistaking that it is a big win, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The look-ahead vibration effect is also a first vibration effect with a relatively short vibration period, but even when the look-ahead vibration effect is included, in a variable effect in which the first effect period (pre-reach effect) is followed by a second effect period (normal reach effect) or a third effect period (SP/SPSP reach effect), the first vibration effect is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) in the first effect period than in the second effect period. This makes it possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation without misleading them into thinking that they have won the jackpot, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

A third feature of the various tables shown in Figures 39 to 59 is that in a variable presentation in which there is a third presentation period (SP/SPSP reach presentation) followed by a second presentation period (normal reach presentation) following a first presentation period (pre-reach presentation), the first vibration presentation (vibration presentation (1 second) during dialogue preview presentation, step-up preview presentation, pseudo consecutive presentation, development presentation, etc.) is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) during the first presentation period than during the third presentation period. This makes it possible to heighten expectations without misleading the player into thinking that they have won a jackpot, making it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

The fourth feature of the various tables shown in Figs. 39 to 59 is that the vibration effects executed as the big win notice effects include a first vibration effect with a short vibration period (a vibration effect (1 second) during a dialogue notice effect, a step-up notice effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, etc.) and a second vibration effect with a longer vibration period than the first vibration effect (a vibration effect longer than 1 second during a cut-in effect, a successful decision effect, a confirmed effect, etc. (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds to 5 seconds)). In a variable effect in which the first effect period (pre-reach effect) is followed by a second effect period (normal reach effect) or a third effect period (SP/SPSP reach effect), the second vibration effect is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) during the second effect period than during the first effect period. This makes it possible to effectively increase the player's sense of expectation and improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the various tables shown in Figures 39 to 59 is that in a variable presentation in which there is a third presentation period (SP/SPSP reach presentation) followed by a second presentation period (normal reach presentation) following a first presentation period (pre-reach presentation), the second vibration presentation (a vibration presentation longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds -> 5 seconds) during a cut-in presentation, a successful decision presentation, a confirmed presentation, etc.) is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) during the third presentation period than during the first presentation period. This makes it possible to effectively heighten the player's sense of expectation and improve the enjoyment of the game.

The sixth feature of the various tables shown in Figures 39 to 59 is that during the first performance period (pre-reach performance), the percentage of times the first vibration performance (1 second) is executed with the performance button 17 in the normal state is higher than the percentage of times the first vibration performance is executed with the performance button 17 in the protruding state. This prevents the player's expectations from being excessively aroused during the first performance period, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The seventh feature of the various tables shown in Figures 39 to 59 is that during the third presentation period (during the SP/SPSP reach presentation), the percentage of times the presentation button 17 is in the protruding state and the second vibration presentation (3 seconds or more) is executed is higher than the percentage of times the presentation button 17 is in the normal state and the second vibration presentation is executed. This prevents the player's expectations from being excessively aroused during the first presentation period, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The eighth feature of the various tables shown in Figs. 39 to 59 is that the vibration effects executed as the big win notice effects include a first vibration effect with a short vibration period (vibration effects (1 second) during a dialogue notice effect, a step-up notice effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, etc.) and a second vibration effect with a longer vibration period (effect period) than the first vibration effect (vibration effects longer than 1 second during a cut-in effect, a successful decision effect, a confirmed effect, etc. (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds to 5 seconds)). In a variable effect in which a predetermined number of consecutive effects (pseudo consecutive effects) (for example, 1 or 2 times) are executed and a reach effect is executed, the second vibration effect is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) when the first vibration effect is executed than when the first vibration effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation as to whether or not the first vibration effect will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the various tables shown in Figures 39 to 59 is that the vibration effects executed as the jackpot prediction effects include second vibration effects (effect period) that have a longer vibration period (effect period) than the first vibration effect (vibration effects longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds to 5 seconds) during cut-in effects, successful decision effects, confirmation effects, etc.), and in the variable effects during effect modes A to C (normal gaming state), a reach effect with the second type of effect pattern (even number pattern) is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) than a reach effect with the first type of effect pattern (odd number pattern other than "7"); a reach effect with the third type of effect pattern (the "7" effect pattern) is less likely to be executed (the rate of execution is lower) than a reach effect with the second type of effect pattern; and the second vibration effect is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) when a reach effect with the third type of effect pattern is executed than when a reach effect with the second type of effect pattern is executed. This can increase the player's expectations regarding the type of effect symbol that will trigger the reach effect, making the game more interesting.

The tenth feature of the various tables shown in Figures 39 to 59 is that in a jackpot fluctuation presentation in which a reach presentation is executed, the number of vibration presentations (development presentation, pattern alignment, C pattern alignment, confirmation presentation) that do not have an effective period (display of an operation prompting image) during a post-reach presentation tends to be greater than the number of vibration presentations (preview vibration presentation, step-up notice presentation, confirmation presentation) that do not have an effective period (display of an operation prompting image) during a pre-reach presentation. This makes it possible to effectively increase the sense of expectation during the post-reach presentation, and improve the enjoyment of the game.

The eleventh feature of the various tables shown in Figures 39 to 59 is that a jackpot fluctuation performance in which a specific reach performance (SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) is executed is more likely to result in a greater number of vibration performances (development performance, pattern alignment, C pattern alignment, confirmation performance) that do not have an effective period during the post-reach performance than a jackpot fluctuation performance in which a predetermined reach performance (normal reach performance, full rotation reach performance) is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the jackpot fluctuation performance from becoming monotonous, making the game more interesting.

The twelfth feature of the various tables shown in Figures 39 to 59 is that in a miss-changing presentation in which a reach presentation is executed, the number of vibration presentations without a valid period during a pre-reach presentation (preview vibration presentation, step-up preview presentation, confirmation presentation) tends to be greater than the number of vibration presentations without a valid period during a post-reach presentation (development presentation, pattern alignment, C pattern alignment, confirmation presentation). Therefore, the vibration presentation without a valid period can suggest the likelihood of a jackpot, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

The thirteenth feature of the various tables shown in Figures 39 to 59 is that the vibration effect of the effect button 17 (operation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (higher execution rate) when a post-reach preview effect (cut-in effect), which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a pre-reach preview effect (dialogue preview effect, step-up preview effect) is executed in the variable performance, and the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed than when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is not executed when the pre-reach preview effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's anticipation as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 17 will be executed when the pre-reach preview effect is executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourteenth feature of the various tables shown in Figures 39 to 59 is that the likelihood of a big win is higher in presentation modes D to G (specific game states) than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states) when a vibration presentation accompanied by an effective period of the presentation button 17 (display of an operation prompt image) is executed in the post-reach advance notice presentation. Therefore, the playability can be varied depending on the type of presentation mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

It is also possible to make it so that the probability of winning is higher in presentation modes A to C (normal game state) than in presentation modes D to G (specific game state) when a vibration presentation accompanied by an effective period of the presentation button 17 (display of an operation prompting image) is executed in the post-reach advance notice presentation. Even in this case, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of presentation mode, and it is easier to increase the player's sense of expectation in presentation modes D to G that are advantageous to the player, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The fifteenth feature of the various tables shown in Figures 39 to 59 is that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed during the first performance period (before the reach) in the variable performance than when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is not executed, and in the jackpot variable performance, regardless of whether the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed during the pre-reach performance, the vibration effect of the effect button 17 (vibration effect when the patterns are lined up or when the C pattern is lined up) is executed during the post-reach performance (period after the successful decision performance). Therefore, the vibration effect can inform the player that a jackpot will occur, making the game more interesting.

The 16th feature of the various tables shown in Figs. 39 to 59 is that the vibration effects (one of the vibration effects during the dialogue preview effect, the pseudo consecutive effect, the development effect, the cut-in effect, etc.) that are accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation prompt image) executed during the variable effect are executed in one of the multiple types of vibration modes (weak vibration, strong vibration) with different jackpot expectation rates, but the vibration effects (one of the vibration effects during the step-up preview effect, when the patterns are aligned, when the C patterns are aligned, etc.) that are not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation prompt image) executed during the variable effect are executed in one predetermined vibration mode. Therefore, in cases where it is difficult to grasp the type of vibration mode because there is no effective period, it is possible to prevent the presentation mode of the vibration effects from becoming complicated, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 17th feature of the various tables shown in Figs. 39 to 59 is that the rate at which vibration effects (vibration effects lasting 3 seconds or more when a successful decision is made, when symbols are aligned, when C symbols are aligned, etc.) are executed afterwards (in the post-reach performance period) differs between the case where a vibration effect (vibration effect during a dialogue preview performance) is executed with the effective period of the performance button 17 (display of an operation prompting image) during the pre-reach performance period in the jackpot fluctuation performance and the case where a vibration effect (vibration effect during a step-up preview performance) is executed without the effective period of the performance button 17 (display of an operation prompting image), and that vibration effects without the effective period of the performance button 17 (vibration effect during a step-up preview performance) are executed more easily (higher execution rate) during the normal game state (performance modes A to C) than during the specific game state (performance modes D to G). Therefore, the performance effect of the vibration effect without the effective period of the performance button 17 can be enhanced, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The 18th feature of the various tables shown in Figures 39 to 59 is that when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed, the execution mode (whether or not to execute, execution timing, etc.) of the vibration effect in the jackpot advance effect can be changed depending on the type of jackpot effect pattern (even numbers, odd numbers other than "7", "7") that lines up (including C pattern line), but when a vibration effect is executed in conjunction with the execution of a successful decision effect or a confirmed effect, the vibration mode is the same regardless of the type of jackpot effect pattern that lines up (including C pattern line). Therefore, while the vibration effect heightens the sense of anticipation for a jackpot, it is possible to uniformly celebrate the jackpot, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The 19th feature of the various tables shown in Figures 39 to 59 is that after a vibration effect (successful decision effect, etc.) with a valid period (display of an operation prompt image) is executed in a jackpot variation effect, a vibration effect (matching symbols, matching C symbols, etc.) without a valid period (display of an operation prompt image) can be executed, and the timing at which vibration starts for a vibration effect (success effect, etc.) with a valid period (display of an operation prompt image) varies depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17, while the timing at which vibration starts for a vibration effect (matching symbols, matching C symbols, etc.) without a valid period (display of an operation prompt image) is predetermined. Therefore, a vibration effect can be executed at an appropriate timing depending on whether or not it is accompanied by a valid period (display of an operation prompt image), making the game more interesting.

The twentieth feature of the various tables shown in Figures 39 to 59 is that, although specific effects (pseudo consecutive effects, development effects, etc.) can be executed using the same movable member (second movable member 74) in presentation modes A to C (normal game state) and presentation modes D to G (specific game state), the expectation of a big win when a specific effect is executed differs between presentation modes A to C (normal game state) and presentation modes D to G (specific game state). Therefore, the playability can be varied depending on the type of presentation mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The 21st feature of the various tables shown in Figures 39 to 59 is that, in presentation modes A to C (normal game state) and presentation modes D to G (specific game state), it is possible to execute a stage presentation (step-up notice presentation, pseudo consecutive presentation, etc.) that progresses to one of several stages with different jackpot expectation rates, but the jackpot expectation rate differs when the stage presentation (step-up notice presentation, pseudo consecutive presentation, etc.) progresses to the same stage (the third step presentation, the fourth step presentation, or the fifth step presentation for the step-up notice presentation, or once or twice for the pseudo consecutive presentation) in presentation modes A to C (normal game state) and presentation modes D to G (specific game state). Therefore, the playability can be made different depending on the type of presentation mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The 22nd feature of the various tables shown in Figures 39 to 59 is that in presentation modes A to C (normal game state) and presentation modes D to G (specific game state), any of a number of operation prompting presentations with different jackpot expectancies can be executed, and an operation presentation (any of a development presentation, a cut-in presentation, or a deciding presentation) can be executed according to the operation of the presentation button 17. In presentation modes A to C (normal game state) and presentation modes D to G (specific game state), the expectation of a jackpot when the same operation prompting presentation (for example, the normal button is white) is executed is different, and in presentation modes A to C (normal game state) and presentation modes D to G (specific game state), the expectation of a jackpot is higher when a valid suggestion presentation is executed and an operation prompting presentation is executed than when an operation presentation is executed without an effective suggestion presentation. Therefore, the player's expectation as to whether or not an effective suggestion presentation will be executed can be increased, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 23rd feature of the various tables shown in Figures 39 to 59 is that a vibration effect with a relatively short vibration period (e.g., 1 second) associated with a jackpot preview effect may be executed with or without an effective period of the effect button 17, whereas a vibration effect with a relatively long vibration period (3 seconds or more) associated with a jackpot preview effect is executed with an effective period. This improves the effect of the effect button 17 operation, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

(Summary of the various tables shown in Figures 32 to 59)
Here, the first feature of the various tables shown in Figures 32 to 59 is that in the normal game state, when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed, the operation performance (dialogue preview performance, pseudo consecutive performance, development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-draw performance) involving the operation of the performance button 17 is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) than when the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

A second feature of the various tables shown in Figures 32 to 59 is that in a specific game state, when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed, the operation effects (dialogue preview effect, pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, cut-in effect, deciding effect, re-draw effect) that involve operation of the effect button 17 are more likely to be executed (the probability of execution is higher) than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the specific game state in which the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed more easily, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

A third feature of the various tables shown in Figures 32 to 59 is that in a specific game state, when the first variable effect (display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot (a reach effect is performed) is executed, it is more difficult (the probability of execution is low) for an operation effect (such as a dialogue preview effect or a roulette preview effect) involving operation of the effect button 17 before the reach is reached to be executed, than when the first variable effect (display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot (a reach effect is performed) is executed in the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state, in which the first variable effect (display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and to increase the interest in the game.

A fourth feature of the various tables shown in Figures 32 to 59 is that the number of times that operation effects (dialogue preview effect, pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, roulette preview effect, cut-in effect, deciding effect, re-draw effect) involving operation of the effect button 17 are executed is more likely to be less (more likely to be less) when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot (a reach effect is executed) is executed in a specific game state than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot (a reach effect is executed) is executed in a normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The fifth feature of the various tables shown in Figures 32 to 59 is that in a specific gaming state, when a second variable effect (variable display of a second special symbol) that results in a jackpot (a reach effect is performed) is executed, the operation effect (preview vibration effect, dialogue preview effect, roulette preview effect, etc.) that involves operation of the effect button 17 before the reach is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) than when a first variable effect (variable display of a first special symbol) that results in a jackpot (a reach effect is performed) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in a specific gaming state in which the second variable effect (variable display of a second special symbol) is likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The sixth feature of the various tables shown in Figures 32 to 59 is that in a specific game state, when a second variable effect (variable display of a second special symbol) that results in a jackpot (a reach effect is performed) is executed, the number of times that the operation effects (dialogue preview effect, pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, roulette preview effect, cut-in effect, deciding effect, re-draw effect) that involve the operation of the effect button 17 are likely to be executed more frequently (the probability of this occurring is high) than when a first variable effect (variable display of a first special symbol) that results in a jackpot (a reach effect is performed) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in a specific game state in which the second variable effect (variable display of a second special symbol) is likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The seventh feature of the various tables shown in Figures 32 to 59 is that vibration effects (pre-reading vibration effects, dialogue preview effects, pseudo consecutive effects, development effects, roulette preview effects, cut-in effects, deciding effects, re-draw effects, etc.) that vibrate the effect button 17 are less likely to be executed (the rate of execution is lower) when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed in the specific game state than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed in the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the performance in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The eighth feature of the various tables shown in Figures 32 to 59 is that in a specific game state, a vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue preview effect, pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, roulette preview effect, cut-in effect, deciding effect, re-draw effect, etc.) that vibrates the effect button 17 is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) when a second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a loss is executed than when a first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the performance in a specific game state in which the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is more likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The ninth feature of the various tables shown in Figures 32 to 59 is that a vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue preview effect, roulette preview effect, etc.) that vibrates the effect button 17 before a reach is less likely to be executed (the rate of execution is lower) when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot (a reach effect is performed) is executed in a specific game state than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot (a reach effect is performed) is executed in a normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and to increase the interest in the game.

The tenth feature of the various tables shown in Figures 32 to 59 is that the number of times that operation effects (preview vibration effect, dialogue preview effect, pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, roulette preview effect, cut-in effect, deciding effect, re-draw effect, etc.) involving operation of the effect button 17 are likely to be executed less (more likely to be executed less) when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot (a reach effect is executed) is executed in a specific game state than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot (a reach effect is executed) is executed in a normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and to increase the interest in the game.

An eleventh feature of the various tables shown in Figures 32 to 59 is that in a specific game state, a vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue preview effect, roulette preview effect, etc.) that vibrates the effect button 17 before a reach is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) when a second variable effect (variable display of second special symbol) that results in a jackpot (a reach effect is performed) is executed than when a first variable effect (variable display of first special symbol) that results in a jackpot (a reach effect is performed) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in a specific game state in which the second variable effect (variable display of second special symbol) is more likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The twelfth feature of the various tables shown in Figures 32 to 59 is that in a specific game state, when a second variable effect (variable display of a second special symbol) that results in a jackpot (a reach effect is performed) is executed, the number of times that the operation effects (preview vibration effect, dialogue preview effect, pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, roulette preview effect, cut-in effect, deciding effect, re-draw effect, etc.) that involve the operation of the effect button 17 are likely to be executed more frequently (the probability of this occurring is high) than when a first variable effect (variable display of a first special symbol) that results in a jackpot (a reach effect is performed) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effects in a specific game state in which the second variable effect (variable display of a second special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The thirteenth feature of the various tables shown in Figures 32 to 59 is that there are more types of preview effects that can be executed when the first variable effect (the variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state than when the first variable effect (the variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific game state (the former are timer effects, dialogue preview effects, development effects, roulette preview effects, cut-in effects, and confirmation effects, and the latter are various pre-reading effects, timer effects, dialogue preview effects, step-up preview effects, pseudo consecutive effects, development effects, roulette preview effects, cut-in effects, deciding effects, and confirmation effects). Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (the variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The fourteenth feature of the various tables shown in Figures 32 to 59 is that the number of preview effects (various pre-reading effects, dialogue preview effects, step-up preview effects, pseudo consecutive effects, etc.) that are executed before the reach is likely to be more frequent when the first variable effect (various display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The fifteenth feature of the various tables shown in Figures 32 to 59 is that the number of preview effects (various pre-reading effects, dialogue preview effects, step-up preview effects, pseudo consecutive effects, etc.) that are executed before the reach is likely to be more frequent when the second variable effect (various display of the second special symbol) is executed in a specific game state than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the specific game state in which the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The 16th feature of the various tables shown in Figures 32 to 59 is that a specific effect (prediction action effect, pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, deciding effect, etc.) involving the movement of the movable members (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is more likely to be executed when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The 17th feature of the various tables shown in Figures 32 to 59 is that in a specific game state, a specific effect (prediction action effect, pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, deciding effect, etc.) involving the movement of the movable members (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is more likely to be executed when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the specific game state than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the specific game state in which the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is more likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The 18th feature of the various tables shown in Figures 32 to 59 is that it is more difficult to execute the action effects (prediction action effects, pseudo consecutive effects, development effects, deciding effects, etc.) of the movable members (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) when the first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed in the specific game state than when the first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed in the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal game state where the first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and to increase the interest in the game.

The 19th feature of the various tables shown in Figures 32 to 59 is that in a specific game state, the action effects (prediction action effects, pseudo consecutive effects, development effects, deciding effects, etc.) of the movable members (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) are more likely to be executed when the second change effect (changing display of the second special symbol) which results in a loss is executed than when the first change effect (changing display of the first special symbol) which results in a loss is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the performance in the specific game state in which the second change effect (changing display of the second special symbol) is more likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The twentieth feature of the various tables shown in Figures 32 to 59 is that it is more difficult to execute the action effects (prediction action effects, pseudo consecutive effects, etc.) of the movable members (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) before the reach is reached when the second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed in a specific game state than when the first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed in a normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal game state where the first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The 21st feature of the various tables shown in Figures 32 to 59 is that the number of times the action effects (prediction action effects, pseudo consecutive effects, development effects, deciding effects, etc.) of the movable members (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) are executed is more likely to be less (more likely to be less) when the first action effect (changing display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed in a specific game state than when the first action effect (changing display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed in a normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first action effect (changing display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The 22nd feature of the various tables shown in Figures 32 to 59 is that in a specific game state, when a second variable effect (variable display of second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed, it is easier for the action effects (prediction action effects, pseudo consecutive effects, etc.) of the movable members (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) to be executed before the reach is reached, than when a first variable effect (variable display of first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the performance in a specific game state in which the second variable effect (variable display of second special symbol) is executed more easily, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The 23rd feature of the various tables shown in Figures 32 to 59 is that in a specific game state, the number of times that the action effects (prediction action effects, pseudo consecutive effects, development effects, deciding effects, etc.) of the movable members (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) are executed is more likely (higher probability) when the second action effect (changing display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed than when the first action effect (changing display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the performance in the specific game state in which the second action effect (changing display of the second special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The 24th feature of the various tables shown in Figures 32 to 59 is that when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that produces a reach effect is executed in a specific game state, the operation effects (dialogue preview effect, pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, cut-in effect, deciding effect, re-draw effect) that involve operation of the effect button 17 are more likely to be executed after the reach than before the reach. This makes it possible to improve the effect of the effects after the reach, and increase the interest in the game.

The 25th feature of the various tables shown in Figures 32 to 59 is that when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that produces a reach effect is executed in a specific game state, a vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue preview effect, pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, roulette preview effect, cut-in effect, deciding effect, re-draw effect, etc.) that vibrates the effect button 17 is more likely to be executed after the reach than before the reach. This makes it possible to improve the effect of the effects after the reach, and increase the interest in the game.

The 26th feature of the various tables shown in Figures 32 to 59 is that when a first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that produces a reach effect is executed in a specific game state, the action effects (prediction action effect, pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, deciding effect, etc.) of the movable members (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) are more likely to be executed after the reach than before the reach. This makes it possible to improve the effect of the effects after the reach, and to increase the interest in the game.

(Main processing of the general control unit)
The main processing of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to Fig. 60. Fig. 60 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the overall control unit 141. This main processing is performed when a system reset, which occurs when a power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, is input to the overall CPU 141a.

First, the general CPU 141a prohibits all interrupts in step T1, and performs initial setting processing in step T2. Specifically, it performs initial setting of the CPU such as setting the built-in registers, grants access to the general RAM 141c, initializes (clears to 0) all RWM areas of the general RAM 141c, starts the CTC (counter timer circuit) to generate timer interrupts, and so on, and then in step T3, permits all interrupts.

The general CPU 141a performs an adjustment mode switching process in step T4. Specifically, by referring to an input signal from the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by a gaming store staff member, the general CPU 141a performs a process for adjusting the volume (value) of the effect sound output from the sound output device 9 and the light intensity (value) of the backlight of the display device (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and for switching the adjustment mode related to the volume and light intensity adjustment (whether or not the volume can be adjusted, whether or not the light intensity can be adjusted, the initial value of the volume value (any of 0 to 5) and the initial value of the light intensity value (any of 0 to 5), the adjustment range of the volume value (0 to 5 or 1 to 5) and the adjustment range of the light intensity value (0 to 5 or 1 to 5)).

The volume and light intensity can be set (adjusted) using the changeover switch 22 at any time as long as the gaming machine 1 is powered on (after the general control unit 141 has been started).

The overall CPU 141a performs a volume adjustment process in step T5. Specifically, the overall CPU 141a performs a process to adjust the volume (value) of the effect sounds output from the audio output device 9 based on the detection signal (left button detection signal, right button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a that detects the operation of the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player.

The overall CPU 141a performs a light intensity adjustment process in step T6. Specifically, the overall CPU 141a performs a process to adjust the light intensity (value) of the backlight of the display devices (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) based on the detection signal (down button detection signal, up button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a that detects the operation of the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player.

The setting (adjustment) of the volume value and light intensity value using the cross key 19 is restricted (limited) at the start of the variable performance and at the end of the variable performance (stop of the performance pattern 70a), and is permitted after a predetermined period (e.g. 0.5 seconds) has passed. In addition, it is also restricted (limited) during the period from when the power is turned on until the game progress control starts (specifically, during the period from when the main control board 110 starts a timer interrupt during the setting change mode, during the RWM clear preparation mode, during the setting confirmation mode, during the initial operation of the various drive sources of the board unit 500, etc.), and during the notification (output of the notification sound) of important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery, illegal winning, abnormal winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, door open error) that should be notified with priority over a full plate error or a payout abnormality.

In addition, while the abnormality warning sound is being output, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, the volume of the various sound effects (BGM, etc.) output from the audio output device 9 is reduced from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormality warning sound ends, the volume of the various sound effects is restored to the volume before the reduction.

In step T7, the general CPU 141a performs an eco mode control process. Specifically, the general CPU 141a performs a process to control the start and end of an eco mode that reduces the amount of light in the backlights of the display devices (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) to reduce power consumption.

In step T8, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not a performance instruction command or a notification instruction command transmitted from the performance control unit 130m has been received. If a performance instruction command or a notification instruction command has not been received, the process proceeds to step T11. If a performance instruction command or a notification instruction command has been received, the process proceeds to step T9.

In step T9, the overall CPU 141a performs an animation pattern setting process. Specifically, the overall CPU 141a performs a process of determining an animation pattern from an animation group of a type corresponding to the received performance instruction command or notification instruction command, and setting (setting) the animation pattern in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 141c.

In step T10, the overall CPU 141a performs a sound pattern setting process. Specifically, the overall CPU 141a determines a sound pattern from a sound group of a type corresponding to the received performance instruction command or notification instruction command, and sets the sound pattern in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 141c.

In step T11, the overall CPU 141a determines whether a frame switching flag is set in the overall RAM 141c, indicating that it is time to update the frame display image of the display device (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). If the frame switching flag is set, the process proceeds to step T12, and if the frame switching flag is not set, the process proceeds to step T4.

The frame switching flag is set by the V blank interrupt process, which is executed every time the general control unit 141 receives a V blank signal sent from the image control unit 145 (VDP) every 1/30 seconds (the time it takes for the drawing and display of one frame of the performance image to be completed). Therefore, the processes in steps T12 to T15 described below are executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

In step T12, the general CPU 141a clears the frame switching flag set in the general RAM 141c, and in step T13 performs scene update processing. Specifically, the general CPU 141a refers to the scene switching counter, wait frame counter, and frame counter that are updated in the V blank interrupt processing described above, and updates the address of the animation scene based on the animation pattern determined in step T9, and updates the address of the sound scene based on the sound pattern determined in step T10.

The overall CPU 141a performs drawing control processing in step T14. Specifically, in accordance with the priority order (drawing order) of the animation group to which the animation scene belongs, it generates a display list consisting of a group of drawing control commands from the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the animation scene at the updated address, outputs this display list to the image control unit 145 (VDP), and performs processing to instruct the drawing of a display image based on the display list.

As a result, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws a display image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and also performs processing to display the images (performance images, abnormality notification images) drawn in the display frame buffer on the display devices (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). In other words, the frame update timing corresponds to the start and end timing of various performances (image displays and sound outputs such as hold displays, variable performances, jackpot preview performances, and pre-reading performances) performed on the first image display device 70 and second image display device 71.

Note that the performances directly controlled by the performance control unit 130m and the lamp control unit 150 (hold display by the sub-first hold display unit 83 and the sub-second hold display unit 84, and the performance operations of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) may or may not coincide with the frame update timing.

In step T15, the general CPU 141a performs audio control processing. Specifically, it generates an audio control command from the sound information at the updated address and outputs this audio control command to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI).

As a result, the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) performs processing to output various sound effects and notification sounds from the audio output device 9 based on the audio control commands. When this processing ends, the process proceeds to step T4.

In this way, when the variable presentation starts and ends (when the presentation pattern 70a stops), the volume and light intensity can be adjusted using the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by game store staff, but volume and light intensity adjustments using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player are regulated (limited). This makes it difficult for players to miss important points such as the start and end of the variable presentation, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, during the notification (output of notification sound) of important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery, unrecoverable error, illegal win, abnormal win, magnetic error, radio wave error, door open error) that should be given priority over a full tray error or a payout abnormality, it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity using the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by game store staff, but volume and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player is regulated (limited). This makes it possible to improve the convenience of the game store in terms of adjusting the volume and light intensity while avoiding the inconvenience of a player not noticing the occurrence of an abnormality when trying to adjust the volume or light intensity.

In addition, while the abnormality notification sound is being output, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, the volume of the various sound effects (BGM, etc.) output from the audio output device 9 is reduced from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormality notification sound ends, the volume of the various sound effects is restored to the volume before the reduction. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of not noticing the abnormality notification sound due to the various sound effects, and ensures the security of the gaming machine.

Note that while an abnormality is being notified (an alarm sound is being output), it may be impossible to set (adjust) the volume value or light intensity value using the cross key 19 that the player can operate, or the adjustment range of the volume value or light intensity value may be limited to between 0 and 2, for example.

(Example of operating the control unit while waiting for customers)
Using Figure 61, a specific example of operating the operation section (performance button 17, cross key 19) while waiting for customers will be described.

As shown in FIG. 61(a), when the game transitions to a customer waiting state in which neither variable effects nor big win effects are executed, the valid suggestion effect (introduction effect) that suggests that a valid period may occur is not executed, and the customer waiting valid period in which operation of the effect button 17 and cross key 19 is valid begins (the customer waiting valid period is maintained until the variable effect begins, and so this can occur for a longer period than the various valid periods that occur during the variable effect).

At this time, a guide image AG (operation prompt image) is displayed in the lower right corner of the first image display device 70, which guides the user to the game support functions that are started by operating the effect button 17 and the cross key 19. Specifically, a first image (an image imitating the effect button 17) is displayed, which suggests that a menu will be displayed by operating the effect button 17; a second image (an image imitating the cross key 19 with the up and down buttons in a light color) is displayed, which suggests that volume can be adjusted by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key 19; and a third image (an image imitating the cross key 19 with the left and right buttons in a light color) is displayed, which suggests that light intensity can be adjusted by operating the left and right buttons of the cross key 19.

When the effect button 17 is operated in this state, as shown in FIG. 61(b), the effect button 17 does not vibrate, and the menu image MG is displayed superimposed in front of the effect pattern 70a, and the display sound of the menu image MG is output.

The menu image MG has an "Exit" item to end the menu display, a "Machine Description" item that provides an explanation of the machine, a "Effect Customization" item for setting the occurrence rate of a specific effect (such as a confirmed effect), and a "Pachi Log" item for managing game history in conjunction with a mobile device (such as a smartphone), and the currently selected item is displayed in a light color, while currently unselected items are displayed in a dark color.

When the effect button 17 is operated while the "End" item is selected, the menu image MG is erased without the effect button 17 vibrating, as shown in FIG. 61(c). In addition, a sound is output to indicate that the menu image MG is being erased, and the guide image AG is displayed again.

When the up button on the cross key 19 is operated in this state, as shown in FIG. 61(d), the performance button 17 and the cross key 19 do not vibrate, and a volume value image OG indicating the current volume value is displayed, and a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value.

When the up button of the cross key 19 is operated while the volume value image OG is displayed, the volume value of the effect sound is updated by +1 without the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 vibrating, as shown in FIG. 61 (e). The volume value image OG is then updated to a volume value image OG corresponding to the updated volume value, and a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the updated volume value.

If a predetermined period of time (e.g., 15 seconds) passes in this state without the cross key 19 being operated, the volume value image OG will be erased and the guide image AG will be displayed again, as shown in Figure 61 (f).

In this way, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 61, during the customer waiting valid period, which can occur for a period longer than the valid period of the effect button 17 related to the various preview effects (dialogue preview effects, pseudo consecutive effects, development effects, cut-in effects, deciding effects, etc.) that occur during the variable effects, even if the effect button 17 or cross key 19 is operated, a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 (including indirect vibration of the cross key 19 transmitted by the vibration of the effect button 17) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised when the effect button 17 or cross key 19 is operated while in the customer waiting state, and it is possible to avoid inconveniences that may cause discomfort to the player.

The effective period of the cross key 19 related to the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment that occur during the variable performance (display of the variable special symbol) and the jackpot performance (jackpot play) can occur for a longer period than the effective period related to the various advance notice performances (dialogue advance notice performance, pseudo consecutive performance, development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, etc.) that occur during the variable performance. However, even if the cross key 19 is operated during the effective period of the cross key 19 related to the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment, a vibration performance that vibrates the performance button 17 (including the indirect vibration of the cross key 19 transmitted by the vibration of the performance button 17) is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being surprised during the variable performance or the jackpot performance, and makes it possible to avoid inconveniences that may cause discomfort to the player.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 61, for the valid period while waiting for customers, a valid suggestion effect (introductory effect) that suggests that the valid period may occur before the valid period occurs is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being put on edge even though useful information for the player (effects that give the player hope that a jackpot game will be executed) is not executed, and makes it possible to avoid inconveniences that may cause discomfort to the player.

In addition, for the effective period of the cross key 19 related to the volume adjustment and light adjustment that occur during the variable effect (variable display of special symbols) and the jackpot effect (jackpot play), the effective suggestion effect (introductory effect) is not executed before the effective period occurs. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being put on guard even though useful information for the player (effect that gives the player hope of a jackpot play) is not executed, and makes it possible to avoid inconveniences that may cause discomfort to the player.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 61, the vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 is more likely to be executed when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period (display of the operation prompt image) of the effect button 17 related to various preview effects (dialogue preview effects, pseudo consecutive effects, development effects, cut-in effects, deciding effects, etc.) that occur during the variable performance than when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period while waiting for customers, which can occur for a period longer than the effective period (display period of the operation prompt image) of the effect button 17 that occurs during the variable performance. This makes it possible to enhance the presentation effect of the variable performance and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 61, the effective period of the effect button 17 related to the various preview effects that occur during the variable effect includes a relatively short first effective period (an effective period accompanied by the display of an operation prompt image related to a dialogue preview effect, etc.) and a relatively long second effective period (an effective period accompanied by the display of an operation prompt image related to a deciding effect, etc.), but the vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 is more likely to be executed when the effect button 17 is operated during the second effective period than when the effect button 17 is operated during the customer waiting effective period, which can occur for a period longer than the effective period of the effect button 17 that occurs during the variable effect. This makes it possible to enhance the effect of the variable effect and increase the interest in the game.

When the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period of waiting for customers, a vibration effect may be executed by vibrating the effect button 17 at a predetermined rate. However, even in this case, it is preferable to execute the vibration effect at a lower rate than when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period of the effect button 17 related to the various preview effects (dialogue preview effects, pseudo consecutive effects, development effects, cut-in effects, deciding effects, etc.) that occur during the variable effects.

(Example of when a variable performance starts from a waiting state)
A specific example of when a variable performance starts from a customer waiting state will be described using Figures 62 to 64. Figure 62 is a timing chart of when a variable performance starts from a customer waiting state, and Figures 63(a) to (f) and Figures 64(g) to (k) are diagrams showing examples of performance corresponding to Figure 62(a) to (k).

First, timing T0 is the 0th frame after the customer waiting state begins. At this timing, the waiting time (30 seconds) begins to be subtracted to start the customer waiting demo performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63(a), the first image display device 70 displays the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ in a stopped state. In addition, the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E and the second special symbol reserved number display area 70F display "0", and the reserved icon and the icon TI are not displayed.

The timing of T1 is the timing when the number of reserved first special charts (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (the fourth frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the number of reserved first special charts is displayed as an increment without animation, and the number of reserved first icons is displayed as an increment without animation (completed in one frame), and the output of the first occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon occurs, begins.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special reserved number displayed in the first special reserved number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1," and the first reserved icon (white icon) H11 is displayed in normal size in the first display section 70B1. In addition, the first occurrence notification sound (beep) is output from the audio output device 9.

The timing of T2 is the timing (5th frame from the start of the waiting state) when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) decreases from "1" to "0" and the normal change pattern change performance (display of the change of special symbols) begins. At this timing, the display of the change of performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, the non-animated decrease display of the reserved first special symbol number, and the animated change display (decrease display) of the first reserved icon begins.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63(c), in the first image display device 70, the first special reserved number displayed in the first special reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0," and the first reserved icon (white icon) H11 displayed in the first display section 70B1 starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C. In addition, the performance pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparatory operation) without being scrolled (updated to another performance pattern), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll.

The timing of T3 is the 10th frame after the start of the output of the first generated alarm sound (the 14th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the output of the first generated alarm sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63(d), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon (white icon) H11 continues to move (shift) to the icon display area 70C, and the reduced display (preparatory operation) of the performance pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T4 is the 20th frame from the start of the change (decrease) in the display of the first hold icon (the 25th frame from the start of the waiting state for customers). At this timing, the change in the display of the first hold icon ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63(e), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon H11 that has moved from the first display unit 70B1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and becomes the icon TI, and the reduced display (preparatory operation) of the performance pattern 70a stops.

The timing of T5 is the 40th frame after the start of the variable performance (45th frame after the start of the waiting state for customers). At this timing, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63(f), in the first image display device 70, following scrolling (downward movement) of the performance pattern 70a in the left variable display area, scrolling (downward movement) of the performance pattern 70a in the central variable display area begins.

The timing of T6 is the 50th frame after the start of the variable performance (55th frame after the start of the waiting state for customers). At this timing, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64(g), in the first image display device 70, following scrolling (downward movement) of the performance pattern 70a in the central variable display area, scrolling (downward movement) of the performance pattern 70a in the right variable display area begins, resulting in a state in which the performance pattern 70a is scrolling in all variable display areas.

The timing of T7 is the 225th frame after the start of the variable performance (230th frame after the start of the waiting state for customers). At this timing, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64(h), in the first image display device 70, the "3" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped (swinging state) in the left-hand variable display area, and the character image of the temporarily stopped effect pattern 70a performs an action of moving its head, and the scrolling of the effect pattern 70a continues in the central and right-hand variable display areas.

The timing of T8 is the 255th frame after the start of the variable performance (260th frame after the start of the waiting state for customers). At this timing, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64(i), in the first image display device 70, the "5" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped (swinging state) in the right-hand variable display area, and the character image of the temporarily stopped effect pattern 70a performs an action of moving its head, and the scrolling of the effect pattern 70a continues in the central variable display area.

The timing of T9 is the 285th frame after the start of the variable performance (the 290th frame after the start of the waiting state for customers). At this timing, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64(j), on the first image display device 70, the "6" performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped (swinging state) in the central variable display area, and the character image of the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a performs a head moving motion performance, and a combination of performance patterns 70a indicating a loss is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the 300th frame after the start of the variable performance (the 305th frame after the start of the waiting state for customers). At this timing, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a and the variable display of the special pattern TZ end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64(k), in the first image display device 70, the performance symbols 70a that were temporarily stopped in the left, center, and right variable display areas are displayed as stopped, and the special symbols TZ are displayed as stopped in the same combination "365" as the performance symbols 70a. In addition, the icon TI that was displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, if the number of reserved special figures increases (changes from "0" to "1") while customers are waiting, the non-animated display of the increase in the reserved numbers and reserved icons ends in the shortest possible period (time) of one frame, so that the game can immediately transition to a variable presentation (a decrease in the reserved numbers and a change in the reserved icons) to avoid dragging on, making it possible to increase the excitement of the game.

In addition, the notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the display of the reserved numbers and reserved icons continues until a later (frame update) timing than the end (frame update) timing of the display of the reserved numbers and reserved icons, so the player can be sure that the number of reserved special figures has increased, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, if the number of reserved special figures decreases (changing from "1" to "0"), the reserved numbers are displayed as a non-animated decrease, and the reserved icon is displayed as an animated change, allowing the player to be sure that the number of reserved special figures has decreased, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, the timing when the display of the reduction in the reserved numbers is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing when the display of the change in the reserved icon to the corresponding icon is completed (frame update), so while the number of reserved special charts is changed, it is easier for the player to understand that the number of reserved special charts has decreased due to the reserved numbers, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect pattern does not scroll (does not update to the next effect pattern) until the pending icon has completed changing to the corresponding icon, and the effect pattern starts scrolling (updating to the next effect pattern) when the pending icon has completed changing (frame update), making it easier to grasp the progress of the game, in which the changing effect starts after the pending memory has decreased, and making the game more interesting.

In addition, if the number of reserved special charts increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for customers, the display of the increase in the reserved icon may not be displayed non-animated, but may be displayed with an animation spanning multiple frames (e.g., five frames) so that it continues longer than the display of the increase in the reserved numbers. This makes it easier for players to grasp the increase in the number of reserved special charts, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, rather than starting the display of the decrease in the reserved numbers and the display of the change in the reserved icon to the corresponding icon (decrease display) at the same timing (frame update), either may be started first as long as the timing when the display of the decrease in the reserved numbers is completed (frame update) is earlier. By doing this, it is possible to increase the freedom of display control while allowing the player to know at an early stage that the number of reserved special charts has decreased, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, instead of starting the scrolling of the performance pattern (updating to the next performance pattern) when the pending icon change display is completed (frame update) (starting later than usual), the scrolling of the performance pattern (updating to the next performance pattern) may be started a little before the pending icon change display is completed (frame update).

(Example of when the number of reserved items increases during a variable performance)
A specific example of an increase in the reserved number during a variable performance will be described with reference to Figures 65 to 66. Figure 65 is a timing chart showing an increase in the reserved number during a variable performance, and Figures 66(a) to (c) are diagrams showing examples of performance corresponding to Figure 65(a) to (c).

First, the timing of T1 is the 50th frame after the start of the normal variation pattern. At this timing, the variation display of the performance pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66(a), the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are scrolled (moved downward) on the first image display device 70. Also, "0" is displayed in the first special pattern reserved number display area 70E and the second special pattern reserved number display area 70F, and the icon (white icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (the 60th frame from the start of the variable presentation). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the reserved first special symbol number and the animated increase display of the reserved first icon begin, and the output of the first occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon occurs, begins.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special reserved number displayed in the first special reserved number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1," and the first reserved icon (white icon) H11 is displayed in a very small size in the first display section 70B1 and begins to be enlarged. In addition, the first occurrence notification sound (beep) is output from the audio output device 9.

The timing of T3 is the 10th frame after the increase in the number of first pending icons starts (the 70th frame after the start of the variable presentation). At this timing, the increase in the number of first pending icons ends and the output of the first occurrence notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66(c), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first hold icon (white icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 is stopped and the icon is displayed at normal size.

In this way, when the number of reserved special figures increases, the reserved numbers are displayed as an increase without animation, and the reserved icon is displayed as an increase with animation, so the player can be sure that the number of reserved special figures has increased, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, the timing at which the display of the reserved numbers is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing at which the display of the reserved icons is completed (frame update), so while the number of reserved special charts changes, it is easier for the player to understand that the number of reserved special charts has increased due to the reserved numbers, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of reserved special symbols increases while a variable performance is being performed, the reserved icon is displayed for a longer period of time compared to when the number of reserved special symbols increases while waiting for customers, so the player can be sure that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the display of the reserved numbers and the reserved icons increasing ends in synchronization with the timing when the display of the reserved icons increasing ends (frame update), so it is possible to effectively convey the increase in the number of reserved special figures, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the period (10 frames) for the pending icon to increase in number is shorter than the period (20 frames) for the pending icon to change to the corresponding icon, so the start of the change presentation can be emphasized, making the game more interesting.

In addition, rather than starting the display of the increase in reserved numbers and the display of the increase in reserved icons at the same time (frame update), either one may be started first as long as the timing when the display of the increase in reserved numbers is completed (frame update) is earlier. By doing this, it is possible to increase the freedom of display control while allowing the player to understand at an early stage that the number of reserved special charts has increased, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, the period for the display of the increase in reserved icons may be longer than the period for the display of the change in the reserved icon to the icon in question, rather than being shorter. By doing this, the increase in the number of reserved special charts can be emphasized, making the game more interesting.

In addition, rather than making the period for the pending icon to increase in size shorter than the period for the pending icon to change in size, the two periods may be the same length.

(Example of when the number of pending orders increases immediately after decreasing)
A specific example of when the reserved number increases immediately after it is decreased will be described using Figures 67 to 68. Figure 67 is a timing chart showing when the reserved number increases immediately after it is decreased, and Figures 68(a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of performances corresponding to (a) to (f) of Figure 67.

First, the timing of T0 is the timing that is the fifth frame after the static display of the performance pattern 70a. At this timing, the static display of the performance pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68(a), the first image display device 70 displays the "4", "6", and "8" performance symbols 70a, which indicate a miss, and the special symbol TZ in a stopped state. Also, "2" is displayed in the first special symbol hold number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special symbol hold number display area 70F. Furthermore, the first hold icon (white icon) H11 is displayed in the first display section 70B1, and the first hold icon (white icon) H12 is displayed in the second display section 70B2, with the icon TI not being displayed.

The timing of T1 is the timing when the change performance (change display of the special symbol) due to the normal change pattern starts (the 20th frame after the display of the performance symbol 70a is stopped). At this timing, the change display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the non-animated decrease display of the first special symbol reserved number, the animated change display of the first reserved icon to that icon, and the animated decrease display of the first reserved icon start.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special reserved number displayed in the first special reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1". In addition, the first reserved icon (white icon) H11 displayed in the first display unit 70B1 starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C, and the first reserved icon (white icon) H12 displayed in the second display unit 70B2 starts to move (shift) toward the first display unit 70B1. Furthermore, the performance pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparatory operation) without being scrolled (updated to another performance pattern), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 30th frame after the display of the performance symbol 70a is stopped). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the reserved first special symbol number begins, but because the change display and decrease display of the first reserved icon are in progress, the increase display of the first reserved icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, are put on hold.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68(c), in the first image display device 70, the first special chart reserved number displayed in the first special chart reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2," and the reduced display (preparatory operation) of the performance pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the 20th frame after the first hold icon starts changing and decreasing (40th frame after the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the first hold icon ends changing and decreasing. Also, the first hold icon starts increasing with animation, and the first occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon occurs, starts to be output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68(d), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon H11 that has moved from the first display unit 70B1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and becomes the icon TI, while the first hold icon H12 that has moved from the second display unit 70B2 is positioned at the center of the first display unit 70B1, and the reduced display (preparatory operation) of the performance pattern 70a stops. In addition, the first hold icon (white icon) H13 is displayed in a very small size on the second display unit 70B2 and begins to be enlarged, and the sound output device 9 begins to output the first occurrence notification sound (beep).

The timing of T4 is the 5th frame after the first pending icon starts to be displayed in increasing numbers (45th frame after the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a stopped state). At this timing, the display of the first pending icon in increasing numbers and the output of the first occurrence notification sound continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68(e), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon (white icon) H13 is displayed in a small size on the second display section 70B2 and continues to be enlarged, while the output of the first occurrence notification sound (beep) from the audio output device 9 continues. In addition, scrolling (moving downwards) of the performance pattern 70a in the variable display area on the left side begins.

The timing of T5 is the 10th frame after the increasing display of the first hold icon starts (the 50th frame after the display of the performance pattern 70a is stopped). At this timing, the increasing display of the first hold icon ends and the output of the first occurrence notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68(f), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first hold icon (white icon) displayed in the first display unit 70B1 ends and the icon is displayed in normal size. Also, scrolling (moving downward) of the performance pattern 70a in the central variable display area begins.

In this way, if the number of reserved special figures increases while the reserved icon is being changed to the corresponding icon and the reserved icon is being decreased, the display of the increase in the reserved number will begin even before the display of the change and decrease is completed (frame update), so the player can recognize that the number of reserved special figures has increased even while the display of the change and decrease of the reserved icon is being executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of reserved special figures increases while the reserved icon is being changed and the reserved icon is being decreased, the display of the increased reserved icon and the output of the generated notification sound are put on hold (limited), and when the display of the changed reserved icon and the display of the decreased reserved icon are completed (frame update), the display of the increased reserved icon and the output of the generated notification sound are started, so that it is possible to prevent the change in the reserved special figure number from becoming difficult to grasp, and to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, instead of outputting the occurrence notification sound in synchronization with the increase in the reserved icon, which is executed after the increase in the reserved number, the occurrence notification sound may be output in synchronization with the increase in the reserved number.

In addition, rather than starting the display of an increase in the number of reserved icons and the output of the notification sound when the display of the change and the display of the decrease in the reserved icons are completed (frame update) (which is a delayed start from normal), the display of an increase in the number of reserved icons and the output of the notification sound may be started a little before the display of the change and the display of the decrease in the reserved icons are completed (frame update). By doing this, it is possible to prevent the progress of the reserved number of special charts from becoming difficult to grasp, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, even if the number of reserved special charts increases while the reserved icon is being displayed in an increasing manner, the display of the increased reserved icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are put on hold (restricted) in the same way as when the display of the change or decrease of the reserved icon is being displayed, while the display of the increased reserved number is started, and when the display of the increased reserved icon is completed (frame update), the display of the increased reserved icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are started.

(Specific example of when the number of reserved balls increases during a specific reach performance)
A specific example of an increase in the reserved number during a specific reach effect will be described with reference to Figures 69 to 70. Figure 69 is a timing chart showing an increase in the reserved number during a specific reach effect, and Figures 70(a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to Figure 69(a) to (f).

First, the timing of T1 is the 400th frame after the start of the SP reach variation pattern. At this timing, the normal reach variation that is executed before the SP reach variation and the variation display of the special symbol TZ continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70(a), in the first image display device 70, the "5" display pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, while the display of the variable pattern 70a continues in the central variable display area. In addition, a "1" is displayed in the first special chart reserved number display area 70E, and a "0" is displayed in the second special chart reserved number display area 70F. Furthermore, the first reserved icon (white icon) H11 is displayed in the first display section 70B1, and the icon (white icon) TH is also displayed.

The timing of T2 is the 90th frame from the start of the normal reach effect (430 frames from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development effect to develop into the SP reach effect begins.

Specifically, on the first image display device 70, the "5" display pattern 70a that is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the display pattern 70a that is scrolling in the central variable display area, begin to move to the upper left of the screen and shrink, and the display pattern 70a changes to a simple display mode in which only the numbers are enlarged.

The timing of T3 is the 15th frame after the start of the development performance (445th frame after the start of the variable performance). At this timing, the development performance to develop into the SP reach performance continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70(b), in the first image display device 70, the "75" display pattern 70a that is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the display pattern 70a that is scrolling in the central variable display area are displayed near the top left of the screen and are displayed in a size smaller than the normal size.

The timing of T4 is the 30th frame after the start of the development performance (460th frame after the start of the variable performance). At this timing, the development performance ends and the SP reach performance begins.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70(c), in the first image display device 70, the performance pattern 70a in the left, center, and right variable display area is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left of the screen, and a showdown performance begins in the center of the screen in which ally character C2 and enemy character C3 face off against each other. In addition, the reserved icons (only the first reserved icon in this case) displayed in the reserved icon display area (first reserved icon display area 70B, second reserved icon display area 70D) become hidden together with the reserved icon display area, leaving only the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C. In addition, the special pattern TZ becomes a "7" pattern, the same as the performance pattern 70a, and a reach state is reached.

The timing of T5 is when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (820 frames after the variable performance begins). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the reserved first special symbol number begins, but because the SP reach performance (confrontation performance) is in progress, there is no increase display of the reserved first symbol icon at this timing, and no output of the occurrence notification sound that is the notification sound when the icon occurs.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70(d), in the first image display device 70, the first special chart reserved number displayed in the first special chart reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2," and the final performance of the showdown performance (the deciding performance to notify whether or not a jackpot has been won) is executed.

The timing of T6 is the 420th frame after the start of the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) (880th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result of the final effect (decisive effect) of the confrontation effect is derived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70(e), the first image display device 70 displays an effect in which friendly character C2 wins over enemy character C3, and the effect pattern 70a displayed in a reduced size at the top left of the screen temporarily stops (becomes oscillating) on a combination ("555") indicating a jackpot.

In the normal game mode, regardless of whether the first variable performance (display of the first special symbol) or the second variable performance (display of the second special symbol) is executed, in the SP/SPSP reach performance in which the performance pattern 70a is a display mode in which only numbers without character images are present, even if the central performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the character image movement performance is not performed.

The timing of T7 is the 450th frame after the start of the SP reach performance (confrontation performance) (910th frame after the start of the variable performance). At this timing, the SP reach performance (confrontation performance) ends, and the first hold icon is displayed as a non-animated return and an increase.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70(f), in the first image display device 70, the performance pattern 70a that was displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the screen is enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen and temporarily stopped (it becomes swaying). In addition, the first hold icon (white icon) H11 is redisplayed on the first display unit 70B1, and the first hold icon (white icon) H12 is displayed in normal size on the second display unit 70B2.

Then, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped in the left, center, and right variable display areas returns to a display mode consisting of characters and numbers, and finally, the performance pattern 70a stops and the special pattern TZ stops and displays the same combination "555" as the performance pattern 70a. Also, the icon TI that was displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, if the number of reserved special figures increases while a special effect (SP reach effect) is being performed, the display of the increased reserved numbers will begin even before the special effect ends (frame update), making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of reserved special symbols increases during the execution of a specific effect (SP reach effect), the display of the increased number of reserved icons is put on hold (limited), and when the specific effect ends (the reduced-sized missing symbol or big win symbol is enlarged) (frame update), the display of the increased number of reserved icons begins, preventing the progress of the reserved special symbol number from becoming difficult to grasp and making the game more interesting.

In addition, when the display of the reserved icons starts to increase when a specific effect (SP reach effect) ends, the display of the reserved icons is performed using a non-animated method that is completed in one frame. Therefore, even if there is an extreme discrepancy between the timing when the reserved special number increases and the timing when the display of the reserved icons is increased, it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt by the player and increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the display of the reserved icons starts to increase when a special effect (SP reach effect) ends, no notification sound is output, making it difficult for the player to mistakenly believe that the number of reserved special icons has increased when the special effect ends due to the notification sound, making the game more enjoyable.

Even if the number of reserved special figures increases by multiple times during the execution of a specific effect (SP reach effect), the display of the reserved numbers will be increased while the display of the reserved icons will be put on hold (limited), and when the specific effect ends (frame update), the display of the increased reserved icons will be displayed all at once in one frame.

In addition, when the number of reserved special figures increases during the execution of a specific performance (SP reach performance), rather than not outputting the occurrence notification sound, the occurrence notification sound may be output in synchronization with the display of the increase in the reserved numbers.

In addition, although an SP reach effect has been given as an example of a specific effect, the specific effect may also include an SPSP reach effect or a full rotation reach effect.

(Specific examples of when the number of reserved balls increases or decreases before and after the end of a specific game state)
Specific examples of the increase and decrease of the reserved number before and after the end of a specific game state will be described using Figures 71 to 73. Figure 71 is a timing chart showing the increase and decrease of the reserved number before and after the end of a specific game state, and Figures 72(a) to (f) and Figures 73(g) to (i) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to Figure 71(a) to (i).

First, the timing of T1 is the timing that is 400 frames after the start of the last (100th) variable presentation in the specific game state. At this timing, the variable display of the presentation pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72(a), "1" is displayed in the first special reserved number display area 70E, and "4" is displayed in the second special reserved number display area 70F. Also, the first reserved icon display area 70B is erased, and the first display section 70D1 to the fourth display section 70D4 of the second reserved icon display area 70D display the second reserved icons (white icons) H21 to H24, respectively, with the icon TI being displayed. Furthermore, the number of variable effects that can be executed in the specific game state (here, "0 remaining") is displayed at the top of the screen, and a right-hit image MU is displayed at the top right of the screen to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the right area of the game area 5a.

The timing of T2 is when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (415 frames after the variable presentation starts). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the reserved first special symbol number starts, but because the display area 70B of the reserved first symbol icon has been erased, there is no increase display of the reserved first symbol icon, and no output of the notification sound when the icon is generated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special chart reserved number displayed in the first special chart reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2," and the scrolling of the performance pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the 430th frame after the start of the variable performance. At this timing, the performance patterns 70a that were being displayed in the variable display areas on the left, center, and right simultaneously temporarily stop.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72(c), in the first image display device 70, the "285" display pattern 70a is temporarily stopped (in a swinging state) in the left, center, and right variable display areas, and a combination of display patterns 70a indicating a loss is displayed.

In addition, in a specific game state, regardless of whether the first variable performance (display of the first special symbol) or the second variable performance (display of the second special symbol) is executed, the performance pattern 70a will be displayed in a form in which only numbers without any character images are present, so no matter what variable performance pattern the performance pattern 70a temporarily stops in, the movement performance of the character image will not be performed.

The timing of T4 is the 15th frame after the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped (445th frame after the variable effect starts). At this timing, the result display starts, which shows the results of the game during the specified advantageous period (the period during which the jackpot game and the specific game state continue).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72(d), the background image HG goes dark on the first image display device 70, and the words "Special Time Ended," indicating the end of the special game state, and "Jackpot x 1," the number of jackpot games executed during the specified advantageous period, are displayed. In addition, the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the screen.

The timing of T5 is the 15th frame after the result display starts (460th frame after the variable performance starts). At this timing, the result display continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72(e), the first image display device 70 additionally displays the words "TOTAL 1200pt," indicating the number of game balls acquired (paid out) during a specified advantageous period.

The timing of T6 is the 30th frame after the result display starts (475th frame after the start of the variable display). At this timing, the variable display of the display pattern 70a and the variable display of the special pattern TZ end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72(f), in the first image display device 70, the performance symbol 70a that was temporarily stopped at the upper left of the screen moves to the center of the screen and is displayed as stopped, and the special symbol TZ is displayed as the same combination "285" as the performance symbol 70a. In addition, the icon TI that was displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

The timing of T7 is the timing when the last (100th) variable performance in the specific game state ends and the first variable performance in the normal game state starts (490 frames from the start of the variable performance). At this timing, the display of the variable performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ, the non-animated decrease display of the second reserved number, the animated change display of the second reserved icon to the icon, the animated decrease display of the second reserved icon, the non-animated return display of the first reserved icon, and the non-animated increase display of the first reserved icon start.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 73(g), in the first image display device 70, the second reserved number in the second special chart reserved number display area 70F changes from "4" to "3," the second reserved icon (white icon) H21 displayed in the first display unit 70D1 starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C, and the second reserved icons (white icons) H22 to H24 displayed in the second display unit 70D2 to the fourth display unit 70D4 start to move (shift) toward the adjacent display unit.

The first hold icon display area returns, and the first hold icon (white icon) H11 is displayed again on the first display section 70B1, while the first hold icon (white icon) H12 is displayed in normal size on the second display section 70B2. Furthermore, the performance pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparatory operation) without being scrolled (updated to another performance pattern), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll. Also, a left-hit image HU is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen, encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the left area of the game area 5a.

The timing of T8 is the 20th frame after the change display and decrease display of the second pending icon started (510th frame after the start of the previous change performance). At this timing, the change display and decrease display of the second pending icon ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 73(h), in the first image display device 70, the second hold icon H21 that has moved from the first display unit 70D1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and becomes the icon TI, while the second hold icons H22 to H24 that have moved from the second display unit 70D2 to the fourth display unit 70D4 are positioned at the centers of the adjacent display units, and the reduced display (preparatory operation) of the performance pattern 70a stops.

The timing of T9 is the 10th frame after the change display and decrease display of the second pending icon end (520 frames after the start of the previous variable effect). At this timing, the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 73(i), in the first image display device 70, following scrolling of the performance pattern 70a in the variable display area on the left side, scrolling (movement downward) of the performance pattern 70a in the variable display area in the center begins.

In this way, if the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases during a specific game state, the display of the first reserved icon is put on hold (limited), while the display of the first reserved number starts to increase, so that the player can recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased even while a specific performance is being executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of reserved first special charts (U1) increases during a specific game state, the display of the first reserved icon starts to increase when the specific game state (the last variable performance in that state) ends (frame update). Therefore, even if you miss the display of the increase in the reserved first special chart numbers that was executed before that, you can recognize that the reserved first special chart number has increased, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when the display of the first reserved icon starts to increase at the timing when the specific game state (the final variable performance in that state) ends, the display of the reserved icons is performed using a non-animated method that is completed in one frame, so even if there is an extreme discrepancy between the timing when the number of reserved special charts increases and the timing when the display of the reserved icons is increased, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of discomfort and increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, when the display of the reserved icons starts to increase when the specific game state (the final variable performance in that state) ends, the notification sound is not output, so it is difficult to mistakenly believe that the number of reserved special icons has increased when the specific game state ends due to the notification sound, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the effect pattern does not scroll (does not update to the next effect pattern) until the pending icon has completed changing to the corresponding icon, and the effect pattern starts scrolling (updating to the next effect pattern) when the pending icon has completed changing (frame update), making it easier to grasp the progress of the effect during the changing effect, and making the game more interesting.

Even if the number of reserved first special charts increases by multiple times during a specific game state, the display of the reserved numbers is increased while the display of the reserved icons is put on hold (restricted), and when the specific game state (the last variable performance in the specific game state) ends (frame update), the display of the increased reserved icons is all displayed together in one frame.

In addition, when the number of reserved first special figures increases during a specific game state, rather than not outputting the generation notification sound, the generation notification sound may be output in synchronization with the display of the increase in the reserved numbers.

In this embodiment, the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are set (displayed) in the normal game state, but it is also possible to set (display) only the first hold icon display area 70B without setting (displaying) the second hold icon display area 70D.

In addition, in this embodiment, the icon display area 70C was set (displayed) regardless of whether a specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect) was being executed during the variable effect, but the icon may be hidden without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during the execution of a specific effect, or the icon may be hidden without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C from the middle of the execution of a specific effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first special chart reserved number display area 70E and the second special chart reserved number display area 70F are set (displayed) on the first image display device 70, but they may be set (displayed) on the second image display device 71, or on a dedicated display device different from the image display device (e.g., a 7-segment LED, dot matrix, dedicated LED, etc.). When set on a dedicated LED, the reserved special chart number may be displayed by the lighting color or lighting/flashing mode of the LED.

(Example of a performance when a player changes a performance element during the first variable performance in a specific game state)
Using Figure 74, we will explain an example of a presentation in which a player changes a presentation element during the first variable presentation in a specific game state.
Note that, although an example of a special gaming state is shown here, the same basically applies to a time-saving gaming state.

First, as shown in FIG. 74(a), the first image display device 70 displays the "285" effect pattern 70a, which indicates a loss, and the special pattern TZ in a stopped state. When a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 in this state, the first special pattern reserved number (U1) becomes "1" and the first special pattern reserved number display area 70E becomes "1". However, since the first reserved icon display area 70B is not set (displayed) in the specific game state, the first reserved icon is not displayed and no occurrence notification sound (winning sound) is output from the audio output device 9.

When the first variable performance starts with the start of the display of the first special symbol from this state, as shown in FIG. 74(b), the first special symbol hold count display area 70E changes from "1" to "0", but the hold icon does not shift (decrease) and the performance symbol 70a starts to shrink (preparatory operation), the special symbol TZ starts scrolling, and background music is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume corresponding to the current volume value of "4".

In addition, a left-hit error notification is issued for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 2 seconds) based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 45 in a specific game state. Specifically, a left-hit error image HUE, which suggests that the game ball should be launched toward the right area of the game area 5a, is displayed in a position closer to the center of the screen and larger than the right-hit image MU, and a left-hit error sound saying "Please hit to the right" is output from the audio output device 9.

In addition, instead of issuing a left-hit error notification when one game ball enters the first starting hole 45 in a specific game state, a left-hit error notification may be issued when a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., three) enter the first starting hole 45.

Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 47, the second special chart reserved number (U2) becomes "1", a notification sound (winning sound) is output from the audio output device 9, and the second special chart reserved number display area 70F becomes "1". In addition, a reserved icon H21 (white icon) is displayed in the first display section 70D1 of the second reserved icon display area 70B.

The left hit error notification may be terminated when the game ball enters the second starting hole 47. In this case, the left hit error image HUE may be erased before the left hit error sound, or the left hit error sound may be erased before the left hit error image HUE.

After that, when the up button on the cross key 19 is operated, as shown in FIG. 74(c), the performance button 17 and the cross key 19 do not vibrate, and a volume value image OG indicating the current volume value of "4" is displayed, and a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value.

When the up button on the cross key 19 is operated while the volume value image OG is displayed, as shown in FIG. 74(d), the volume value of the effect sound is updated by +1 without the effect button 17 or cross key 19 vibrating, and the currently output BGM is output at a volume corresponding to the updated volume value of "5". Then, the volume value image OG is updated to a volume value image OG corresponding to the updated volume value, and a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the updated volume value.

In this state, when the first special symbol has stopped after the time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 74(e), the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a stops with a losing number of "379" and the special symbol TZ stops with a losing number of "379". In addition, the volume value image OG is erased in response to the stopping of the performance symbol 70a.

After that, when the stop time of the first special symbol has elapsed and the first variable performance ends, and the second variable performance starts with the start of the variable display of the next second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 74(f), the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0", and the second reserved icon (white icon) H21 displayed in the first display section 70D1 of the second reserved icon display area 70D starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C. In addition, the performance pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparatory operation), the special pattern TZ starts to scroll, and the BGM continues to be output at a volume (performance element) according to the volume value "5" adjusted (changed) during the previous first variable performance.

Note that, although an example has been shown here in which the up button on the cross key 19 is operated during the first variable presentation in a specific game state to increase the volume value, the same is essentially true when the down button on the cross key 19 is operated to decrease the volume value.

Also, when the left or right button of the cross key 19 is operated to increase or decrease the light value during the first variable presentation in a specific game state, the operation of the cross key 19 displays a light value image instead of a volume value image OG, and the light intensity of the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76, image display device, etc.) changes according to the increase or decrease in the light value, but the process is basically the same.

In addition, in the case where the second variable performance is executed after the first variable performance in a specific game state, and the performance button 17 is operated during the first variable performance to change the performance mode, the background image is changed to a background image corresponding to the changed performance mode, and the BGM is changed to BGM corresponding to the changed performance mode. In this case, instead of changing the background image or BGM during the first variable performance, the changed performance mode may be entered from the start of the next second variable performance, and the background image or BGM may be changed. Also, the background image may be changed but the BGM may not be changed, or the background image may be changed but the BGM may be changed. In addition, in the specific game state, even if the performance mode is changed, the display mode of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ does not change, but the display mode of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ may not be changed.

In addition, in the case where the second variable performance is executed after the first variable performance in the normal game state, and the performance button 17 is operated during the first variable performance to change the performance mode, the background image is changed to a background image corresponding to the changed performance mode, and the BGM is changed to BGM corresponding to the changed performance mode. In this case, instead of changing the background image or BGM during the first variable performance, the changed performance mode may be entered from the start of the next second variable performance, and the background image or BGM may be changed. Also, the background image may be changed but the BGM may not be changed, or the background image may not be changed but the BGM may be changed. In addition, when the performance mode is changed in the normal game state, the display mode of the performance pattern 70a is changed, but the display mode of the special pattern TZ is not changed.

In this way, according to the presentation example shown in FIG. 74, by operating the various operating parts (presentation button 17, cross key 19) while the first variable presentation is being executed in a specific game state, it is possible to change the presentation elements (volume value, light intensity value, presentation mode, etc.) used in the second variable presentation that is executed next. This makes it possible to improve convenience for the player and increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in FIG. 74, even if the game ball enters the first starting hole 45 during a specific game state in which the first reserved icon is not displayed, the generation notification sound (winning sound) is not output. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of the player being confused by only the generation notification sound being output even though the first reserved icon is not displayed, and makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in FIG. 74, even if a game ball enters the second start hole 47 in a specific game state, if a normal icon (white icon) is displayed, no notification sound (winning sound) is output, and if a special icon is displayed, a notification sound corresponding to the type of special icon is output. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of players becoming fed up with the notification sound in a specific game state where it is easier for a game ball to enter the second start hole 47, and makes it possible to increase interest in the game.

Note that at the start of the first variation performance, the pending icon is not shifted and the icon is not displayed, but it may be configured to display the icon without shifting the pending icon.

(Example of a performance when a player changes a performance element during a second variable performance in a specific game state)
Using Figure 75, we will explain an example of a presentation in which a player changes a presentation element during the second variable presentation in a specific game state.
Note that, although an example of a special gaming state is shown here, the same basically applies to a time-saving gaming state.

First, as shown in FIG. 75(a), the first image display device 70 displays the "285" effect pattern 70a, which indicates a miss, and the special pattern TZ in a stopped state. When a game ball enters the second start hole 47 in this state, the second special pattern reserved number (U2) becomes "1", the second special pattern reserved number display area 70F becomes "1", and the reserved icon H21 (white icon) is displayed in the first display section 70D1 of the second reserved icon display area 70B. Note that even if a game ball enters the second start hole 47 during a specific game state, since the white icon is displayed, no occurrence notification sound (winning sound) is output from the audio output device 9 (when a special icon is displayed, an occurrence notification sound corresponding to the type of special icon is output).

When the second variable performance starts with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol from this state, as shown in FIG. 75(b), the second special symbol hold count display area 70F changes from "1" to "0", and the second hold icon (white icon) H21 displayed in the first display section 70D1 of the second hold icon display area 70D starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C. In addition, the performance symbol 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparatory operation), the special symbol TZ starts to scroll, and background music is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume corresponding to the current volume value "4".

Furthermore, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the first special symbol reserved number (U1) becomes "1" and the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "1". However, since the first reserved icon display area 70B is not set (displayed) in the specific game state, the first reserved icon is not displayed and no occurrence notification sound (winning sound) is output from the audio output device 9.

In addition, a left-hit error notification is issued for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 2 seconds) based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 45 in a specific game state. Specifically, a left-hit error image HUE, which suggests that the game ball should be launched toward the right area of the game area 5a, is displayed in a position closer to the center of the screen and larger than the right-hit image MU, and a left-hit error sound saying "Please hit to the right" is output from the audio output device 9.

In addition, instead of issuing a left-hit error notification when one game ball enters the first starting hole 45 in a specific game state, a left-hit error notification may be issued when a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., three) enter the first starting hole 45. Also, the left-hit error notification may be terminated when a game ball enters the second starting hole 47, in which case the left-hit error image HUE may be erased before the left-hit error sound, or the left-hit error sound may be erased before the left-hit error image HUE.

After that, when the up button on the cross key 19 is operated, as shown in FIG. 75(c), the performance button 17 and the cross key 19 do not vibrate, and a volume value image OG indicating the current volume value of "4" is displayed, and a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value.

When the up button on the cross key 19 is operated while the volume value image OG is displayed, as shown in FIG. 75(d), the volume value of the effect sound is updated by +1 without the effect button 17 or cross key 19 vibrating, and the currently output BGM is output at a volume corresponding to the updated volume value of "5". Then, the volume value image OG is updated to a volume value image OG corresponding to the updated volume value, and a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the updated volume value.

In this state, when the second special symbol has stopped after the time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 75(e), the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a stops with a losing number of "379" and the special symbol TZ stops with a losing number of "379". In addition, the volume value image OG is erased in response to the stopping of the performance symbol 70a.

After that, when the stop time of the second special symbol has elapsed and the second variable performance ends, and the first variable performance starts with the start of the next variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 75(f), the first special symbol hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0", but the hold icon does not shift (decrease) and the performance symbol 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparatory operation), the special symbol TZ starts scrolling, and the BGM continues to be output at a volume (performance element) according to the volume value "5" adjusted (changed) during the previous second variable performance.

Note that, although an example has been shown here in which the up button on the cross key 19 is operated during the first variable presentation in a specific game state to increase the volume value, the same is essentially true when the down button on the cross key 19 is operated to decrease the volume value.

Also, when the left or right button of the cross key 19 is operated to increase or decrease the light value during the first variable presentation in a specific game state, the operation of the cross key 19 displays a light value image instead of a volume value image OG, and the light intensity of the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76, image display device, etc.) changes according to the increase or decrease in the light value, but the process is basically the same.

In addition, in the case where the first variation presentation is executed after the second variation presentation in a specific game state, and the presentation button 17 is operated during the second variation presentation to change the presentation mode, the background image is changed to a background image corresponding to the changed presentation mode, and the background music is changed to background music corresponding to the changed presentation mode. However, the period during which the presentation mode can be changed during the second variation presentation (only during the pre-reach presentation) is shorter than the period during which the volume value and light intensity value can be changed (other than when the variation starts and stops).

In this case, rather than changing the background image or BGM during the second variable performance, the changed performance mode may be set from the start of the next first variable performance, and the background image or BGM may be changed. Also, the background image may be changed but the BGM may not be changed, or the background image may not be changed but the BGM may be changed. Also, in a specific game state, even if the performance mode is changed, the display mode of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ does not change, but it is also possible that the display mode of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ does not change.

In addition, when the first variation performance is executed after the second variation performance in the normal game state, and the performance button 17 is operated during the second variation performance to change the performance mode, the background image will be changed to a background image corresponding to the changed performance mode, and the BGM will be changed to BGM corresponding to the changed performance mode. However, the period during which the performance mode can be changed during the second variation performance (only during the performance before the reach) is shorter than the period during which the volume value and light intensity value can be changed (other than when the variation starts and stops).

In this case, rather than changing the background image or BGM during the second variable performance, the changed performance mode may be set from the start of the next first variable performance, and the background image or BGM may be changed. Also, the background image may be changed but the BGM may not be changed, or the background image may not be changed but the BGM may be changed. Also, in the normal game state, when the performance mode is changed, the display mode of the performance pattern 70a is changed, but the display mode of the special pattern TZ is not changed.

In this way, according to the presentation example shown in FIG. 75, by operating the various operating parts (presentation button 17, cross key 19) while the second variable presentation is being executed in a specific game state, it is possible to change the presentation elements (volume value, light intensity value, presentation mode, etc.) used in the first variable presentation that is executed next. This makes it possible to improve convenience for the player and increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in FIG. 75, even if the game ball enters the first starting hole 45 during a specific game state in which the first reserved icon is not displayed, the generation notification sound (winning sound) is not output. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of the player being confused by only the generation notification sound being output even though the first reserved icon is not displayed, and makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in FIG. 75, even if a game ball enters the second start hole 47 in a specific game state, if a normal icon (white icon) is displayed, no notification sound (winning sound) is output, and if a special icon is displayed, a notification sound corresponding to the type of special icon is output. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of players becoming fed up with the notification sound in a specific game state where it is easier for a game ball to enter the second start hole 47, and makes it possible to increase interest in the game.

Note that at the start of the first variation performance, the pending icon is not shifted and the icon is not displayed, but it may be configured to display the icon without shifting the pending icon.

(Example of a performance when a look-ahead action performance and a step-up notice performance are executed)
Using Figures 76 and 77, we will explain examples of presentations when pre-reading action presentations and step-up preview presentations are executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 76(a), the first image display device 70 displays the "468" effect pattern 70a, which indicates a miss, and the special pattern TZ in a stopped state. Also, "3" is displayed in the first special pattern hold count display area 70E, and three white icons HI are displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. At this time, since the machine is not in a waiting state for customers, the multiple game board decorative LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting light (light emission modes other than rainbow light).

When the change effect (corresponding to a pre-change) starts from this state, as shown in FIG. 76(b), the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2," and the three reserved icons HI start to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C. In addition, the effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparatory operation), and the special symbol TZ starts to scroll.

At this timing, the first of three predictive action performances begins. Specifically, as a weak notice of the predictive action performance, the second movable member 74 emits blue light, performs a weak action toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a weak action sound effect.

Then, immediately after the movement of the reserve icon HI is completed, the reserve icon (far left in the figure) that is the subject of the preview operation performance changes to a blue icon, and as shown in Figure 76 (c), the reduced display (preparatory operation) of the performance pattern 70a ends and a scrolling display (high-speed change) at normal size begins, after which the second movable member 74 returns to its initial position and the first performance of the preview operation performance ends. In addition, the winning port lamp NR (not shown) lights up in the same blue color as the blue icon, and the lamp change performance begins.

After the change time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 76(d), the performance symbol 70a stops and displays a losing number of "365", and the special symbol TZ stops and displays a losing number of "365".

Furthermore, when the stop time of the performance pattern has elapsed and the next change performance (corresponding to a pre-change) begins, as shown in FIG. 102(e), the first special pattern reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1," and the two reserved icons HI begin to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C. Also, the performance pattern 70a begins to be displayed in a reduced size (preparatory operation), and the special pattern TZ begins to scroll.

At this timing, the second look-ahead action performance begins. Specifically, as a weak notice of the look-ahead action performance, the second movable member 74 emits blue light, performs a weak action moving forward of the first image display device 70, and outputs a weak action sound effect.

Then, immediately after the movement of the reserved icon HI is completed and the reserved icon that is the subject of the preview operation performance changes to a red icon, the reduced display (preparatory operation) of the performance pattern 70a ends and the scrolling display (high-speed fluctuation) at normal size begins, as shown in Figure 76 (f), after which the second movable member 74 returns to its initial position and the second performance of the preview operation performance ends. In addition, the winning port lamp NR (not shown) lights up in the same red color as the red icon, and the lamp change performance continues.

After the change time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 77(g), the performance symbol 70a stops and displays a losing number of "635", and the special symbol TZ stops and displays a losing number of "635".

Furthermore, when the stop time of the performance pattern has elapsed and the variable performance (corresponding to the relevant variable) that is the subject of the advance reading operation performance begins, as shown in FIG. 77(h), the first special pattern reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0", and one reserved icon HI begins to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C. Also, the performance pattern 70a begins to be displayed in a reduced size (preparatory operation), and the special pattern TZ begins to scroll.

At this timing, the third performance of the look-ahead action performance begins. Specifically, as a strong notice of the look-ahead action performance, the second movable member 74 emits red light, performs a strong action moving forward of the first image display device 70, and outputs a strong action sound effect.

After that, when the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, as shown in FIG. 77(i), the reduced display (preparatory action) of the performance pattern 70a ends and the scrolling display (high-speed fluctuation) at normal size begins, after which the second movable member 74 returns to its initial position and the third performance of the look-ahead action performance ends.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the scrolling display (high-speed fluctuation) of the performance pattern 70a has started, the first step performance of the step-up preview performance starts, as shown in FIG. 77(j). Specifically, the first step image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and a first step sound effect is output. After that, the second to fourth step performances are executed in sequence.

Furthermore, when the fourth step performance ends, as shown in FIG. 77(k), the fifth step performance starts, and the fifth step image is displayed on the first image display device 70 while the fifth step sound effect is output. Also, a weak vibration performance starts in which the performance button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second while the performance button 17 is turned off. However, since the execution of this weak vibration performance does not involve the effective period of the performance button 17, the sound effect when the operation prompt image (opaque performance button image, gauge image) is displayed and the performance sound (sound effect) when the performance button 17 is operated during the effective period are not output, but the performance light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the multiple game board decorative LEDs and the lamp change performance continue.

After one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 77(l), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops, ending the weak vibration effect, and two seconds later the fifth step effect ends. After that, depending on the variation effect pattern, a normal reach effect will be executed followed by an SP reach effect, or a normal reach effect will be executed followed by an SPSP reach effect.

In this way, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 76 and 77, the look-ahead action presentation (light emission and operation of the second movable member 74) is started after the reserved number displayed in the special reserved number display area has decreased with the start of the variable presentation (after the presentation pattern 70a has started its preparation operation) and before the scrolling display (high-speed fluctuation) of the presentation pattern 70a begins. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that the look-ahead action presentation is being executed while informing the player that the variable presentation has started, thereby making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, according to the example of the performance shown in Figures 76 and 77, the pre-reading action performance (light emission and operation of the second movable member 74) is started after the movement (shift) of the reserved icon begins with the start of the change performance, but before the movement of the reserved icon is completed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that the pre-reading action performance is being executed while informing the player that the change performance has started, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the example of the performance shown in Figures 76 and 77, the vibration performance is not performed during the first to fourth steps of the step-up preview performance, but is performed during the fifth step, which has the highest expectation. This effectively increases the player's sense of expectation, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, according to the example of the effects shown in Figures 76 and 77, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration effect executed during the 5th step effect of the step-up preview effect is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the 5th step effect of the step-up preview effect. Therefore, the vibration effect does not overshadow the appearance of the 5th step effect, and it is possible to improve the effect of the step-up preview effect. It is also possible to prevent the inconvenience of a long vibration effect leading to the mistaken belief that a jackpot has been confirmed, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the example of the effects shown in Figures 76 and 77, the vibration effect executed during the fifth step effect does not accompany the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation prompting image), so sound effects when displaying the operation prompting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and sound effects when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period (operation sound effects, movable member operation sound effects, etc.) are not output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences that may confuse the player during a vibration effect that does not accompany the effective period of the effect button 17, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 76 and 77, the illumination of the multiple game board decorative LEDs and the lamp change presentation continue even during the vibration presentation of the presentation button 17. Therefore, the presentation effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as pausing the illumination of the presentation or the lamp change presentation due to the vibration presentation that accompanies the effective period of the presentation button 17, thereby making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

Note that the effect button 17 is not illuminated during the vibration effect that is executed during the fifth step of the step-up preview effect, but the effect button 17 may be illuminated in a predetermined manner (a color other than the rainbow color that is the illumination color for a guaranteed jackpot, and an illumination manner different from the illumination manner during the effective period of the effect button 17, such as flashing white or flashing yellow, etc.) throughout the execution period of the vibration effect. This makes it easier to know that a vibration effect is being executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, during a vibration effect that does not involve an active period for the effect button 17, the lighting pattern of the multiple game board decorative LEDs (for example, moving lighting toward the effect button 17, etc.) may be used to emit lighting that draws attention to the effect button 17.

(Example of a performance when pre-reading vibration and dialogue preview are performed)
Using Figures 78 and 79, we will explain examples of effects when pre-reading vibration effects and dialogue preview effects are executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 78(a), the first image display device 70 displays the "468" effect pattern 70a, which indicates a miss, and the special pattern TZ in a stopped state. Also, "3" is displayed in the first special pattern hold count display area 70E, and three white icons HI are displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. At this time, since the machine is not in a waiting state for customers, the multiple game board decorative LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting light (light emission modes other than rainbow light).

When the change performance (corresponding to a pre-change) starts from this state, as shown in FIG. 78(b), the first special pattern reserved number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2," and the three reserved icons HI start to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C. Also, the performance pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparatory operation), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll.

At this timing, the first of three predictive vibration effects begins. Specifically, as a weak notice of the predictive vibration effect, the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for one second and flashes white for one second. However, since the execution of this weak vibration does not accompany the effective period of the effect button 17, no sound effect is output when the operation prompt image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed, and no sound effect (sound effect) is output when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period, but the effect light emitted by the multiple game board decorative LEDs (light emission modes other than rainbow light emission) continues.

Then, immediately after the movement of the reserve icon HI is completed, the reserve icon (far left in the figure) that is the subject of the preview vibration effect changes to a blue icon, and as shown in Figure 78(c), the reduced display (preparatory action) of the performance pattern 70a ends and a scrolling display (high-speed fluctuation) at normal size begins, after which the weak vibration and white flashing of the performance button 17 stops and the first preview vibration effect ends. In addition, the winning port lamp NR (not shown) lights up in the same blue color as the blue icon, and the lamp change effect begins.

After the change time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 78(d), the performance symbol 70a stops and displays a losing number of "365", and the special symbol TZ stops and displays a losing number of "365".

Furthermore, when the stop time of the performance pattern has elapsed and the next change performance (corresponding to a pre-change) begins, as shown in FIG. 78(e), the first special pattern reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1," and the two reserved icons HI begin to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C. Also, the performance pattern 70a begins to be displayed in a reduced size (preparatory operation), and the special pattern TZ begins to scroll.

At this timing, the second pre-reading vibration effect begins. Specifically, as a weak notice of the pre-reading vibration effect, the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for one second and flashes white for one second. However, since the execution of this weak vibration does not accompany the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when the operation prompt image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed and the effect sound (sound effect) when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period are not output, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the multiple game board decorative LEDs and the lamp change effect continue.

Then, immediately after the movement of the reserved icon HI is completed, the reserved icon that is the subject of the preview vibration effect changes to a red icon, and as shown in FIG. 78(f), the reduced display (preparatory action) of the performance pattern 70a ends and the scrolling display (high-speed fluctuation) begins, after which the weak vibration and white flashing of the performance button 17 stops and the second preview vibration effect ends. In addition, the winning port lamp NR (not shown) lights up in the same red color as the red icon, and the lamp change effect continues.

After the change time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 79(g), the performance symbol 70a stops and displays a losing number of "635", and the special symbol TZ stops and displays a losing number of "635".

Furthermore, when the stop time of the performance pattern has elapsed and the variable performance (corresponding to the relevant variable) that is the subject of the advance reading vibration performance begins, as shown in FIG. 79(h), the first special pattern reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0", and one reserved icon HI begins to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C. Also, the performance pattern 70a begins to be displayed in a reduced size (preparatory operation), and the special pattern TZ begins to scroll.

At this timing, the third pre-reading vibration effect begins. Specifically, as a strong notice of the pre-reading vibration effect, the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for three seconds and flashes red for three seconds. However, since the execution of this strong vibration does not accompany the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when the operation prompt image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed and the effect sound (sound effect) when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period are not output, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the multiple game board decorative LEDs and the lamp change effect continue.

After that, when the movement of the reserved icon HI is completed, as shown in FIG. 79(i), the reduced display (preparation operation) of the performance pattern 70a ends and the scrolling display (high-speed fluctuation) begins, but the strong notice of the pre-reading vibration performance continues. After that, the strong vibration and white flashing of the performance button 17 stops, and the third performance of the pre-reading vibration performance ends.

Then, when the third look-ahead vibration effect ends and a predetermined period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 79(j), the effective period of the effect button 17 (3 seconds for a single hit) occurs and the dialogue preview effect begins. Specifically, an operation prompt image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 and a gauge image showing the remaining time of the effective period is displayed in the dialogue window image SW, a display sound effect of the operation prompt image SG is output, and the effect button 17 emits white light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 79(k), the hot line "What's this?! It's hot!!" is displayed in red text and a sound (effect sound) corresponding to the hot line is output. In addition, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second while the effect button 17 is turned off, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the multiple game board decorative LEDs and the lamp change effect continue.

After one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 79(l), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends. After that, depending on the variation effect pattern, a pseudo consecutive effect will be executed, a normal reach effect will be executed, a normal reach effect will be executed followed by an SP reach effect, or a normal reach effect will be executed followed by an SPSP reach effect.

In this way, according to the presentation example shown in Figures 78 and 79, the look-ahead vibration presentation (vibration and white flashing of presentation button 17) is started after the reserved number displayed in the first special chart reserved number display area has decreased with the start of the variable presentation (after presentation pattern 70a has started its preparation operation) and before the scrolling display (high-speed fluctuation) begins. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that the look-ahead vibration presentation is being executed while informing the player that the variable presentation has started, thereby making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, according to the example of the effects shown in Figures 78 and 79, the look-ahead vibration effect (vibration and white flashing of the effect button 17) is started after the movement (shift) of the reserved icon begins with the start of the variable effect, but before the movement of the reserved icon is completed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that the look-ahead vibration effect is being executed while informing the player that the variable effect has started, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the example of effects shown in Figures 78 and 79, when a look-ahead vibration effect is executed, the effect button 17 is made to flash white even though it is not in a valid period of the effect button 17. Therefore, even if the effect button 17 is not operated, it is possible to make the player more aware that a look-ahead vibration effect is being executed, which can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 78 and 79, the illumination state of the presentation button 17 in the look-ahead vibration presentation is different from the illumination state of the presentation button 17 during the valid period in a preview presentation accompanied by the occurrence of an effective period (such as a dialogue preview presentation, a pseudo consecutive presentation, a development presentation, a cut-in presentation, or a deciding presentation). This makes it possible to prevent the inconvenience of being confused with the occurrence of an effective period of the presentation button 17 in the look-ahead vibration presentation, and to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the example effects shown in Figures 78 and 79, the pre-reach preview effects (dialogue preview effects, step-up preview effects) are not executed until the look-ahead vibration effect ends. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as players being unable to notice that a look-ahead vibration effect, which is difficult to judge by appearance, is being executed due to the pre-reach preview effect, and makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the example of effects shown in Figures 78 and 79, the pseudo consecutive effects are not executed until the predictive vibration effect ends. This prevents the player from noticing that the predictive vibration effect, which is difficult to judge by appearance, is being executed due to the pseudo consecutive effects, and increases the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the example of the effects shown in Figures 78 and 79, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration effect executed during the dialogue preview effect is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the dialogue preview effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the dialogue preview effect without the vibration effect dominating the appearance of the dialogue preview effect. It is also possible to prevent the inconvenience of a long vibration effect causing the player to mistakenly believe that a jackpot has been confirmed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the example of effects shown in Figures 78 and 79, the vibration effect executed during the look-ahead vibration effect does not accompany the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation prompting image), so the display sound effect when the operation prompting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed and the effect sound when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period (operation sound effect, movable member operation sound effect, etc.) are not output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences that may confuse the player during a vibration effect that does not accompany the effective period of the effect button 17, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the example of effects shown in Figures 78 and 79, the vibration effect executed during the dialogue preview effect accompanies the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation prompt image), so the display sound effect when the operation prompt image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed and the effect sound (operation sound effect, dialogue voice, etc.) when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period is output. This makes it possible to improve the effect of the dialogue preview effect and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the example of effects shown in Figures 78 and 79, the execution period of the vibration effect executed during the dialogue preview effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period and the timing of operation. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration effect depending on whether or not the effect button 17 is operated and the timing of operation, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 78 and 79, the illumination of the multiple game board decorative LEDs and the lamp change presentation continue even during the vibration presentation associated with the effective period of the presentation button 17. Therefore, the presentation effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as pausing the illumination of the presentation or the lamp change presentation due to the vibration presentation associated with the effective period of the presentation button 17, thereby making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

Note that the effect button 17 is not illuminated during the vibration effect that is executed during the dialogue preview effect, but the effect button 17 may be illuminated in a predetermined manner (a color other than the rainbow color that is the illumination color for a guaranteed jackpot, and an illumination manner different from the illumination manner during the active period of the effect button 17, such as flashing white or flashing yellow, etc.) throughout the execution period of the vibration effect.

In addition, the vibration effect that is executed during the dialogue preview performance may be executed at the same timing (for example, 0.5 seconds after the effective period ends when the performance button 17 is not operated) regardless of whether or not the performance button 17 is operated during the effective period and regardless of the timing of the operation (the execution period of the vibration effect may be variable).

In addition, during a vibration effect that does not involve an active period for the effect button 17, the lighting pattern of the multiple game board decorative LEDs (for example, moving lighting toward the effect button 17, etc.) may be used to emit lighting that draws attention to the effect button 17.

(Timer effects and execution timing)
Next, using Figure 80, we will explain the timer performance of a variable performance pattern in which a timer performance may be executed, and the timing of execution of the timer performance.

The timer effects include event timer effects such as a "pseudo consecutive occurrence timer effect" that indicates the occurrence of a pseudo consecutive occurrence, a "normal reach occurrence timer effect" that indicates the start of a normal reach effect, an "SP reach occurrence timer effect" that indicates the start of an SP reach effect, an "SPSP reach occurrence timer effect" that indicates the start of an SPSP reach effect, a "full rotation reach occurrence timer effect" that indicates the start of a full rotation reach effect, a "valid period occurrence timer effect" that indicates the occurrence of the valid period of the effect button 17, and a "jackpot pattern stop timer effect" that indicates the jackpot pattern will stop being displayed.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), in the case of variable presentation patterns 6, 14, and 19, three types of presentation may be executed: pseudo consecutive occurrence timer presentation, normal reach occurrence timer presentation, and SP reach occurrence timer presentation.

In this case, the pseudo consecutive occurrence timer effect starts between T1 and T3 and ends at T3. The normal reach occurrence timer effect starts between T2 and T4 and ends at T4. The SP reach occurrence timer effect starts between T5 and T6 and ends at T6.

As shown in FIG. 80(b), in the case of variable presentation patterns 7, 15, and 20, four presentations may be executed: a normal reach occurrence timer presentation, an SP reach occurrence timer presentation, an SPSP reach occurrence timer presentation, and a valid period occurrence timer presentation.

In this case, the normal reach occurrence timer effect starts between T1 and T3 and ends at T3. The SP reach occurrence timer effect starts between T2 and T4 and ends at T4. The SPSP reach occurrence timer effect starts between T5 and T6 and ends at T6. The valid period occurrence timer effect starts between T5 and T7 and ends at T7.

As shown in FIG. 80(c), in the case of variable presentation patterns 11 and 22, four effects may be executed: pseudo consecutive occurrence timer presentation, normal reach occurrence timer presentation, SPSP reach occurrence timer presentation, and valid period occurrence timer presentation.

In this case, the pseudo consecutive occurrence timer effect starts between T1 and T3 and ends at T3. The normal reach occurrence timer effect starts between T2 and T4 and ends at T4. The SPSP reach occurrence timer effect starts between T5 and T8 and ends at T8. The valid period occurrence timer effect starts between T7 and T9 and ends at T9.

(Example of timer effects)
Next, a performance example in which two timer performances are executed during a variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 81. Here, it is assumed that in a normal game state, the execution of a variable performance pattern 22, a pseudo consecutive occurrence timer performance (normal pattern 7), and a valid period occurrence timer performance (normal pattern 21) is determined.

First, as shown in FIG. 81(a), when the white-letter timer STW is displayed and the timer effect is being executed (timer time is being subtracted), the same "7" appears temporarily as the effect symbols on the left and right to form a reach state, and a normal reach effect begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(b), after the white-text timer STW reaches "0 seconds remaining," the pseudo symbol temporarily stops in the middle area as a pseudo consecutive success performance, a success sound effect is output, and the pseudo 2-variation period ends (the red flame effect that accompanies the pseudo consecutive performance is omitted in the figure).

Then, as shown in FIG. 81(c), the performance pattern 70a changes again, and "x3" is displayed in red to indicate the number of pseudo-changes (the progress of the performance stage).

After that, as shown in FIG. 81(d), the SPSP development symbol temporarily stops in the middle area, a temporary stop sound effect is output, and a strong action effect is executed in which the first movable member 73 emits blue light and moves. At this time, when the valid period occurrence timer effect starts, the image display device 70 displays the normal white text timer YTW with "35 seconds left" and starts counting down the timer time.

Then, the screen goes white and the development performance ends, and as shown in Figure 81 (e), the performance pattern 70a in the middle area changes again, and the three performance patterns 70a are displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the screen, starting the SPSP reach performance. Note that with the start of the SPSP reach performance, the reserved icon and the icon in question are hidden. At this time, the white-text timer YTW becomes "33 seconds remaining", which is the timer time being subtracted.

When the SPSP reach effect reaches its final stage, as shown in FIG. 81(f), a valid suggestion effect is started, suggesting that operation of the effect button 17 may be effective for the deciding effect. Specifically, an effect is performed in which four semi-transparent effect button images that resemble the effect button 17 converge from the four corners of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen. At this time, the white-text timer YTW becomes "2 seconds remaining," which is the timer time being subtracted.

Then, the semi-transparent effect button images gather at a specific position in the center of the screen, and after the white-text timer YTW reaches "0 seconds remaining," the effective period of the effect button 17 (5 seconds for a single hit) occurs, as shown in FIG. 81 (g), and an operation prompting image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that protrudes and emits red light at a specific position in the center of the screen and a gauge image showing the remaining time of the effective period is displayed, and a display sound effect for the operation prompting image SG is output, and the effect button 17 protrudes and emits red light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, the successful decision effect starts as shown in FIG. 81(h). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 while emitting rainbow light, and the first image display device 70 displays a success effect image SEF and outputs a success sound effect. In addition, the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for four seconds, followed by a strong vibration effect (successful decision vibration effect) in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for five seconds with a one-second interval between them, and the three "7" effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in the upper left corner of the screen. In addition, the multiple game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 are illuminated in rainbow colors.

(Example of a roulette preview effect before a reach effect, followed by a pseudo consecutive effect)
Using Figure 82, we will explain an example of a presentation in which a pseudo consecutive presentation is executed before a reach presentation.

First, as shown in FIG. 82(a), a roulette preview effect is executed in which multiple options, such as an SPSP development symbol suggesting development to an SPSP reach effect, an SP development symbol suggesting development to an SP reach effect, a pseudo symbol suggesting the execution of a pseudo consecutive effect, and a chance symbol suggesting that the odds of winning a jackpot are higher than those of a bad symbol, rotate and change like a roulette. Then, after a predetermined time has passed, as shown in FIG. 82(b), a pseudo symbol from among the multiple types of options stops, and it is announced that a pseudo consecutive effect will be executed.

After that, when the roulette preview performance ends, as shown in Figure 82 (c), the pseudo symbol temporarily stops in the center area and a success sound effect is output (the blue effect accompanying the pseudo consecutive performance is omitted from the figure). Also, as shown in Figure 82 (d), the second movable member 74 emits blue light and performs a weak movement toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the performance pattern 70a changes again and "x2" is displayed in blue to indicate the number of pseudo changes (the performance stage has progressed).

After that, when a predetermined period of time has passed, as shown in FIG. 82(e), in the first image display device 70, the "6" performance pattern 70a temporarily stops in the left area, the "5" performance pattern 70a temporarily stops in the right area, and the display of the varying performance pattern 70a continues in the middle area, and a pseudo teasing performance is executed in the middle area to tease whether or not the pseudo pattern suggesting the execution of a pseudo consecutive win will temporarily stop. At this time, the effective period of the performance button 17 occurs, and an operation prompting image SG consisting of an opaque performance button image imitating the performance button 17 that emits white light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period is displayed, and the display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is output, and the performance button 17 emits white light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 82(f), the pseudo symbol temporarily stops in the middle area as a pseudo consecutive success effect, and a success sound effect is output (the red flame effect that accompanies the pseudo consecutive effect is omitted from the figure). In addition, the effect button 17 is turned off, and a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the multiple game board decorative LEDs continues.

After one second has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 82(g), the weak vibration of the performance button 17 stops and the weak vibration performance ends. In addition, the second movable member 74 emits red light and performs a strong movement toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the performance pattern 70a changes again, and "x3" is displayed in red to indicate the number of pseudo-changes (the performance stage has progressed).

After that, when the strong operation time (1 second) of the second movable member 74 has elapsed, the pseudo consecutive success performance ends, and as shown in FIG. 82 (h), the performance pattern 70a of "5" temporarily stops in the left and right areas and a normal reach performance is executed, and then, depending on the variable performance pattern, an SP reach performance corresponding to the SP development pattern that did not stop on the roulette after the normal reach performance is executed is executed, or an SPSP reach performance corresponding to the SPSP development pattern that did not stop on the roulette after the normal reach performance is executed is executed.

(Example of a pseudo consecutive effect after a reach effect)
Using Figure 83, we will explain an example of a presentation in which a pseudo consecutive presentation is executed after a reach presentation.

First, as shown in FIG. 83(a), in the first image display device 70, the "6" effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in the left region, the "5" effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in the right region, and the varying display of the effect symbol 70a continues in the middle region. At this time, the effective period of the effect button 17 does not occur and the pseudo consecutive success effect starts. Specifically, a teasing effect is executed in the middle region to tease whether or not the pseudo symbol suggesting the execution of the pseudo consecutive effect will temporarily stop. At this time, since the game is not in a waiting state for customers, the multiple game board decorative LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

After that, when the teasing performance ends, as shown in Figure 83 (b), the pseudo symbol temporarily stops in the middle area and a success sound effect is output (the blue flame effect accompanying the pseudo consecutive performance is omitted from the figure). Also, as shown in Figure 83 (c), the second movable member 74 emits blue light and performs a weak movement toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the performance pattern 70a changes again and "x2" is displayed in blue to indicate the number of pseudo changes (the performance stage has progressed).

After that, when a predetermined period of time has passed, as shown in FIG. 83(d), the "5" effect symbol 70a temporarily stops in the left and right regions, and a normal reach effect begins. After that, as shown in FIG. 83(e), when the pseudo consecutive effect begins, a pseudo teasing effect is executed, inviting the player to see whether or not the pseudo symbol suggesting the execution of the pseudo consecutive effect will temporarily stop in the middle region. At this time, the effective period of the effect button 17 occurs, and an operation prompting image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits white light and a gauge image showing the remaining time of the effective period is displayed, and the effect button 17 emits white light. At this time, since the game is not in a waiting state for customers, the multiple game board decorative LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 83(f), the pseudo symbol temporarily stops in the middle area as a pseudo consecutive success effect, and a success sound effect is output (the red flame effect that accompanies the pseudo consecutive effect is omitted from the figure). In addition, the effect button 17 is turned off, and a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the multiple game board decorative LEDs continues.

After one second has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 83(g), the weak vibration of the performance button 17 stops and the weak vibration performance ends. In addition, the second movable member 74 emits red light and performs a strong movement toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the performance pattern 70a changes again, and "x3" is displayed in red to indicate the number of pseudo-changes (the performance stage has progressed).

After that, when a predetermined time has passed, as shown in FIG. 83(h), the "5" performance pattern 70a temporarily stops in the left and right areas and a normal reach performance is executed, and then, depending on the variable performance pattern, a normal reach performance is executed and then an SP reach performance is executed, or a normal reach performance is executed and then an SPSP reach performance is executed.

In this way, according to the example effects shown in Figures 82 and 83, it is possible to execute a vibration effect when a pseudo consecutive effect is executed, which involves the occurrence of an effective period of the effect button 17. This makes it possible to effectively increase the player's sense of expectation, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the example of the effects shown in Figures 82 and 83, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration effect executed during the pseudo-successful consecutive effects is shorter than the execution period (2 seconds) of the pseudo-successful consecutive effects. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the pseudo-successful consecutive effects without the vibration effect dominating the appearance of the pseudo-successful consecutive effects. It is also possible to prevent the inconvenience of a long vibration effect leading to the mistaken belief that a jackpot has been confirmed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the example of the effects shown in Figures 82 and 83, the vibration effect executed during the pseudo consecutive effects occurs during the valid period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation prompting image), so the display sound effect when the operation prompting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed and the effect sound when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period (operation sound effect, success sound effect, etc.) is output. This makes it possible to improve the effect of the pseudo consecutive effects and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the example of the effects shown in Figures 82 and 83, the execution period of the vibration effect executed in the pseudo consecutive effects is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period and the timing of operation. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration effect depending on whether or not the effect button 17 is operated and the timing of operation, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the example of the performance shown in Figures 82 and 83, when a pseudo consecutive performance is executed after a reach performance, the type of performance pattern that forms the reach state after the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance is not downgraded from the type of performance pattern that formed the reach state before the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance (downgrading from reach with odd numbers to reach with even numbers, or from reach with a "7" to reach with an even number or an odd number other than "7"). Therefore, the player will not feel dissatisfied with the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance, and the interest of the game will not be improved.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 82 and 83, the presentation light emission by the multiple game board decorative LEDs continues even during the vibration presentation associated with the effective period of the presentation button 17. Therefore, the presentation effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporarily suspending the presentation light emission due to the vibration presentation associated with the effective period of the presentation button 17, thereby making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

Note that the effect button 17 is not illuminated during the vibration effect executed during the pseudo consecutive effects, but the effect button 17 may be illuminated in a predetermined manner (a color other than the rainbow color that is the illumination color for a guaranteed jackpot, and an illumination manner different from the illumination manner during the effective period of the effect button 17, such as flashing white or flashing yellow, etc.) throughout the execution period of the vibration effect.

In addition, the vibration effect that is executed during the pseudo consecutive performance may be executed until the same timing (for example, 0.5 seconds after the effective period ends when the performance button 17 is not operated) regardless of whether or not the performance button 17 is operated during the effective period and regardless of the timing of the operation (the execution period of the vibration effect may be variable).

In addition, during the pseudo consecutive performance, an effective period of the performance button 17 is generated, and a vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed, but during the pseudo consecutive performance, a vibration performance may be executed without generating an effective period of the performance button 17, or an effective period of the performance button 17 may be generated but a vibration performance may not be executed.

(Example of a performance when a development performance is performed and a SP reach performance is performed)
Using Figure 84, we will explain an example of a presentation when a development presentation is executed and an SP reach presentation is executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 84(a), the "5" effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in the left and right areas, and a normal reach effect is being executed. Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 84(b), the SP development symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle area as a result of the roulette preview effect, and it is announced that the effect will develop into an SP reach effect.

Then, the screen goes white and the development performance ends, and as shown in FIG. 84(c), the performance pattern 70a in the middle area changes again, while the performance patterns 70a in the left and right areas are displayed in reduced size in the left and right corners at the top of the screen, and the SP reach performance begins. Note that the icon becomes hidden when the SP reach performance begins.

(Example of a performance when a development performance is executed and an SPSP reach performance is executed)
Using Figure 85, we will explain an example of a presentation when a development presentation is executed and an SPSP reach presentation is executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 85(a), the "5" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left and right areas, and a normal reach effect is being executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 85(b), during the normal reach effect, a valid suggestion effect is started, which suggests that operating the effect button 17 may be valid. Specifically, multiple semi-transparent effect button images that resemble the effect button 17 are displayed and moved, and an effect is performed in which the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered towards a specific position at the bottom right of the screen.

When the semi-transparent effect button images gather at a specific position in the bottom right of the screen, as shown in FIG. 85(c), the effective period of the effect button 17 occurs (long press for 4 seconds), and an operation prompting image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits red light and a gauge image showing the remaining time of the effective period is displayed at a specific position in the bottom right of the screen, a display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is output, and the effect button 17 emits red light. The words "long press" are displayed on the opaque effect button image.

After that, the effect button 17 is pressed and held, and when the press and hold time reaches a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds) or the valid period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 85(d), the SPSP development pattern temporarily stops in the middle area, a temporary stop sound effect is output, and a strong action effect is executed in which the first movable member 73 emits blue light and operates. In addition, the effect button 17 is turned off, and a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the multiple game board decorative LEDs continues.

After one second has passed, the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends. After that, the screen goes white and the development effect ends, and as shown in Figure 85 (e), the effect pattern 70a in the middle area changes again, and the three effect patterns 70a are displayed in reduced size in the upper left corner of the screen, and the SPSP reach effect begins. Note that with the start of the SPSP reach effect, the reserved icon and the icon in question are hidden.

In this way, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 84 and 85, the type of special presentation symbols that are variably displayed in the roulette presentation (special presentation symbols that are not temporarily stopped in the end, and special presentation symbols that are temporarily stopped) suggests whether or not the presentation will develop into one with a high probability of a jackpot (the probability of a jackpot). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the types of special presentation symbols that are variably displayed in the roulette presentation, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 84 and 85, a valid suggestion presentation may be executed in the development presentation, which can heighten the player's anticipation of the presentation progressing to a reach presentation with a high probability of winning, thereby making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 84 and 85, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration presentation executed during the development presentation is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the development presentation. This makes it possible to improve the presentation effect of the development presentation without the vibration presentation dominating the appearance of the development presentation. It is also possible to prevent the inconvenience of a long vibration presentation leading to the mistaken belief that a jackpot has been confirmed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the example of the effects shown in Figures 84 and 85, the vibration effects executed during the development effects occur during the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation prompting image), so the display sound effect when the operation prompting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed and the effect sound when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period (operation sound effect, temporary stop sound effect, etc.) are output. This makes it possible to improve the effect of the development effects and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the example of the effects shown in Figures 84 and 85, the execution period of the vibration effect executed during the development effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period and regardless of the timing of the operation. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration effect depending on the timing of the operation of the effect button 17, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 84 and 85, the illumination of the multiple game board decorative LEDs continues even during the vibration presentation associated with the effective period of the presentation button 17. Therefore, the presentation effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporarily suspending the illumination of the presentation due to the vibration presentation associated with the effective period of the presentation button 17, thereby making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

Note that the effect button 17 is not illuminated during the vibration effect that is executed during the development effect, but the effect button 17 may be illuminated in a predetermined manner (a color other than the rainbow color that is the illumination color for a guaranteed jackpot, and an illumination manner different from the illumination manner during the active period of the effect button 17, such as flashing white or flashing yellow, etc.) throughout the execution period of the vibration effect.

In addition, the vibration effects executed during the development effect may be executed at the same timing (for example, 0.5 seconds after the effective period ends when the effect button 17 is not operated) regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and regardless of the timing of the operation (the execution period of the vibration effect may be variable).

In addition, during the development performance, an effective period of the performance button 17 is generated and a vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed, but during the development performance, a vibration performance may be executed without generating an effective period of the performance button 17, or an effective period of the performance button 17 may be generated but a vibration performance may not be executed.

In addition, in presentation modes A to C (normal game state), when the first variable presentation (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed, it is possible to make it possible to execute a valid suggestion presentation during a development presentation, while when the second variable presentation (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed, it is possible to make it possible to not execute a valid suggestion presentation during a development presentation or to make it less likely to be executed (lower rate of execution) than the first variable presentation. In presentation modes D to G (specific game state), when the second variable presentation (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed, it is possible to make it possible to execute a valid suggestion presentation during a development presentation, while when the first variable presentation (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed, it is possible to make it possible to not execute a valid suggestion presentation during a development presentation or to make it less likely to be executed (lower rate of execution) than the second variable presentation.

(Example of a cut-in effect during a SP reach effect resulting in a big win)
Using Figures 86 and 87, we will explain an example of a presentation in which a cut-in presentation is executed during an SP reach presentation in variable presentation pattern 13, resulting in a jackpot.

First, as shown in FIG. 86(a), the effect symbols 70a in the left and right areas are displayed in reduced size in the left and right corners at the top of the screen, and the SP reach effect is being performed. At this time, since the game is not in a waiting state for customers, the multiple game board decorative LEDs (part of the game board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting light (light emission modes other than rainbow light emission).

When the SP reach effect approaches the end from this state, as shown in FIG. 86(b), an effective suggestion effect begins, suggesting that operating the effect button 17 may be effective for the cut-in effect. Specifically, an effect is performed in which two semi-transparent effect button images that resemble the effect button 17 converge from the bottom left and right of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen.

When the semi-transparent effect button images gather at a specific position in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. 86(c), the effective period of the effect button 17 (4 seconds for a single hit) occurs, and an operation prompting image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that protrudes and emits red light at a specific position in the center of the screen and a gauge image showing the remaining time of the effective period is displayed, and a display sound effect for the operation prompting image SG is output, while the effect button 17 protrudes and emits red light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, the red cut-in effect starts, as shown in FIG. 86(d). Specifically, a red frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and a third cut-in sound effect is output. In addition, the effect button 17 is turned off, and a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for three seconds, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the multiple game board decorative LEDs continues.

After that, when one second has elapsed since the output of the third cut-in sound effect has ended, the cut-in effect and weak vibration effect will end, and either the "5" effect pattern 70a or the "6" effect pattern 70a will stop in the middle area, as shown in FIG. 86(e).

After a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 86(f), the three "5" symbols 70a are temporarily stopped when aligned (symbol alignment), and a strong vibration effect (jackpot confirmation vibration effect) is initiated in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for four seconds, and the multiple game board decorative LEDs and effect button 17 light up in rainbow colors. However, because the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve an effective period for the effect button 17, no sound effects are output when the operation prompt image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed, and no sound effects (sound effects) are output when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period.

After four seconds have passed, as shown in FIG. 87(g), the strong vibration effect ends, but the multiple game board decoration LEDs and effect button 17 continue to emit rainbow-colored light. After one second has passed, the multiple game board decoration LEDs resume emitting light, and the effect button 17 goes out.

Then, as shown in FIG. 87(h), the re-draw effect starts. Specifically, three "5" effect symbols 70a are aligned (symbol alignment) and are moved toward the back and displayed in a reduced size, the effective period of the effect button 17 (three seconds for a single hit) begins, an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits white light at a specific position in the center of the screen, and an operation prompting image SG consisting of a gauge image showing the remaining time of the effective period are displayed, a display effect sound of the operation prompting image SG is output, and the effect button 17 emits white light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, the promotion failure effect starts as shown in FIG. 87(i). Specifically, the three "5" effect symbols 70a that were displayed in a reduced size are enlarged and moved to the front of the screen when they are lined up (pattern alignment), and a non-promotion sound effect is output, but the effect illumination (illumination mode other than rainbow illumination) by the multiple game board decorative LEDs continues.

Then, as shown in FIG. 87(j), the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped at normal size, and the promotion failure performance ends. After that, when a predetermined period (for example, one second) has elapsed, an eye-catching performance is executed, suggesting that the performance pattern 70a will be stopped, as shown in FIG. 87(k). Specifically, an eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to cover the three performance patterns 70a.

After that, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect ends, as shown in FIG. 87(l), the effect pattern 70a returns to a display mode including the character and enters a temporary stop state, and if there is a first special reserved number, the reserved icon is displayed again. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big win confirmation vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the effect button 17 being valid for a certain period, and the multiple game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 emit light in rainbow colors. However, since the effect button 17 is not valid for a certain period to be executed in this strong vibration effect, the sound effect when the operation prompt image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed and the sound effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period are not output.

After one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 87(m), the strong vibration effect and the rainbow light emitted by the multiple game board decorative LEDs will end, and the effect pattern 70a will stop at "555", and the special pattern TZ will also stop at "555".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 87(n), the opening effect of the jackpot game and the illumination of the multiple game board decoration LEDs begin, and a strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the effect button 17 being valid for a certain period, and the effect button 17 illuminates in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the valid period of the effect button 17, no sound effect is output when the operation prompt image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed, and no sound effect (sound effect) is output when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period. After that, when one second has elapsed, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow illumination of the multiple game board decoration LEDs end, the opening effect of the jackpot game ends, and the round game begins.

In the case of a variable presentation pattern in which a re-draw presentation is not executed, the display will transition to FIG. 87(k) after FIG. 87(g) and an eye-catching presentation will be executed.

In this way, according to the examples of effects shown in Figures 86 and 87, a valid indication effect may be executed during a cut-in effect, which not only notifies the player that a valid period has occurred, but also indicates to the player that there is a high probability of winning, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, according to the example of the effects shown in Figures 86 and 87, the execution period of the cut-in effect (3 seconds) is the same as the execution period of the vibration effect executed during the cut-in effect (3 seconds). This makes it possible to effectively improve the effect of the cut-in effect. In addition, the vibration effect can suggest to the player that there is a high chance of winning, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, according to the example effects shown in Figures 86 and 87, the vibration effect executed during the cut-in effect accompanies the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation prompting image), so a display sound effect is output when the operation prompting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed, and an effect sound (operation sound effect, cut-in sound effect, etc.) is output when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. This improves the effect of the cut-in effect, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in Figures 86 and 87, when three presentation patterns 70a that do not include characters are temporarily stopped in a line (pattern alignment), a strong vibration presentation (a vibration presentation that confirms a jackpot) is executed for a longer period of time than the vibration presentation during the cut-in presentation, so that the player can be effectively informed that a jackpot has been reached, and the excitement of the game can be increased.

In addition, according to the example of the effects shown in Figures 86 and 87, when three effect patterns 70a including characters are temporarily stopped in a line (C pattern line), a strong vibration effect (jackpot confirmation vibration effect) is executed. This allows the player to reconfirm that a jackpot has been reached, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 86 and 87, the strong vibration presentation (jackpot confirmation vibration presentation, jackpot confirmation vibration presentation, opening vibration presentation) that is executed when the three presentation symbols 70a are temporarily stopped or when the jackpot game is opened does not involve the effective period of the presentation button 17 (display of the operation prompt image), so the display sound effect when the operation prompt image (opaque presentation button image, gauge image) is displayed and the presentation sound (operation sound effect, other sound effect, etc.) when the presentation button 17 is operated during the effective period is not output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences that may confuse the player during vibration presentations that do not involve the effective period of the presentation button 17, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the examples of effects shown in Figures 86 and 87, the execution period of the vibration effect executed during the cut-in effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period and regardless of the timing of operation. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as not being able to fully experience the vibration effect depending on the timing of operation of the effect button 17, and makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the example of the effects shown in Figures 86 and 87, when a jackpot is reached as a result of the execution of the SP reach effect, a vibration effect is executed while the effect pattern 70a that results in a jackpot is temporarily stopped, but a vibration effect is not executed while the pattern is actually stopped. This prevents the player from mistaking the vibration effect for the variable effect to be continuing, making the game more interesting.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 86 and 87, the illumination of the multiple game board decorative LEDs continues even during the vibration presentation associated with the effective period of the presentation button 17. Therefore, the presentation effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporarily suspending the illumination of the presentation due to the vibration presentation associated with the effective period of the presentation button 17, thereby making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

Note that the effect button 17 is not illuminated during the vibration effect that is executed during the cut-in effect, but the effect button 17 may be illuminated in a predetermined manner (a color other than the rainbow color that is the illumination color for a guaranteed jackpot, and an illumination manner different from the illumination manner during the active period of the effect button 17, such as flashing white or flashing yellow, etc.) throughout the execution period of the vibration effect.

In addition, while the multiple game board decorative LEDs continue to emit light during the effective period related to the cut-in effect, some or all of the multiple game board decorative LEDs may be turned off immediately before the effective period occurs or between the start of the effective period and the time when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective time has elapsed, and then the multiple game board decorative LEDs may resume emitting light. In this way, the operation promotion image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 can be made to stand out, and the player can be informed that a tense scene is occurring, making the game more interesting.

In addition, when executing the promotion success effect, the rainbow light emission of the multiple game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 was started at the same time, but the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 may be started first and then the rainbow light emission of the multiple game board decoration LEDs may be started, or the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 may be started first and then the rainbow light emission of the multiple game board decoration LEDs may be started.

In addition, when the SP reach performance is executed, the performance pattern 70a is stopped after executing an eye-catching performance or a performance that returns the display mode of the performance pattern 70a to a display mode including a character, but if the SP reach performance results in a miss, the performance pattern 70a is stopped after executing an eye-catching performance or a performance that returns the display mode of the performance pattern 70a to a display mode including a character, and if a jackpot is reached, the performance pattern 70a may be stopped in a display mode of only numbers without executing an eye-catching performance or a performance that returns the display mode of the performance pattern 70a to a display mode including a character.

The vibration effect that is executed during the cut-in effect may be executed at the same timing (for example, 2 seconds after the effective period ends when the effect button 17 is not operated) regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and regardless of the timing of the operation (the execution period of the vibration effect may be variable).

In addition, a vibration effect is executed during a cut-in effect or a successful promotion effect, but it is also possible to execute the vibration effect during a cut-in effect while not executing the vibration effect during a successful promotion effect, or vice versa, or not execute the vibration effect during a cut-in effect or a successful promotion effect.

In addition, a vibration effect is executed when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by a performance pattern 70a consisting of numbers only or when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by a performance pattern 70a including a character. However, while a vibration effect is executed when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by a performance pattern 70a consisting of numbers only, a vibration effect may not be executed when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by a performance pattern 70a including a character, or vice versa. A vibration effect may not be executed when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by a performance pattern 70a consisting of numbers only or when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by a performance pattern 70a including a character.

In addition, when the lamp change effect is being executed, the lamp change effect continues until the effect pattern 70a stops (even during the cut-in effect, the winning port lamp NR will emit light in a color corresponding to the display mode of the icon), but it may also be set to emit light and turn off in conjunction with the light emission mode of multiple game board decorative LEDs.

(Example 1 of a big win when a deciding effect is executed during an SPSP reach effect)
Using Figures 88 and 89, we will explain presentation example 1 in which a deciding presentation is executed during an SPSP reach presentation in variable presentation pattern 20, resulting in a jackpot.

First, as shown in FIG. 88(a), three effect symbols 70a form a reach state and are displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the screen, and the SPSP reach effect is being executed. At this time, since the game is not in a waiting state for customers, the multiple game board decorative LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting light (light emission modes other than rainbow light emission).

When the SPSP reach effect reaches its final stage from this state, as shown in FIG. 88(b), a valid suggestion effect is started, which suggests that operation of the effect button 17 may be effective for the decisive effect. Specifically, an effect is performed in which four semi-transparent effect button images that resemble the effect button 17 converge from the four corners of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen.

When the semi-transparent effect button images gather at a specific position in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. 88(c), the effective period of the effect button 17 (5 seconds for a single hit) occurs, and an operation prompting image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that protrudes and emits red light at a specific position in the center of the screen and a gauge image showing the remaining time of the effective period is displayed, and a display sound effect for the operation prompting image SG is output, while the effect button 17 protrudes and emits red light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, the successful decision effect starts as shown in FIG. 88(d). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 while emitting rainbow light, and the first image display device 70 displays a success effect image SEF and outputs a success sound effect. In addition, the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for four seconds, followed by a strong vibration effect (successful decision vibration effect) in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for five seconds with a one-second interval between them, and the three "5" effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in the upper left corner of the screen. In addition, the multiple game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 are illuminated in rainbow colors.

After that, when the first movable member 73 returns to the standby position and the successful decision effect and strong vibration effect end, as shown in FIG. 88(e), a celebration effect to celebrate the big win begins while the multiple game board decoration LEDs and effect button 17 continue to emit rainbow colors. Then, when the celebration effect ends, the multiple game board decoration LEDs resume their effect illumination and the effect button 17 goes out.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88(f), the three "5" effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped when they are lined up (pattern alignment), and a strong vibration effect (jackpot confirmation vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for four seconds, and the multiple game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 light up in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not accompany the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when the operation prompt image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed and the effect sound (sound effect) when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period are not output.

After four seconds have passed, the strong vibration effect ends, but the multiple game board decoration LEDs and effect button 17 continue to emit rainbow colors. After one second has passed, the multiple game board decoration LEDs resume emitting light and the effect button 17 goes out.

Then, as shown in FIG. 89(g), the re-draw effect starts. Specifically, three "5" effect symbols 70a are aligned (symbol alignment) and are moved toward the back and displayed in a reduced size, the effective period of the effect button 17 (three seconds for a single hit) begins, an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits red light at a specific position in the center of the screen, and an operation prompting image SG consisting of a gauge image showing the remaining time of the effective period are displayed, a display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is output, and the effect button emits red light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, the promotion success effect starts as shown in FIG. 89(h). Specifically, the reduced "5" effect symbol 70a is replaced by a "7" effect symbol 70a, which is enlarged and moves to the front of the screen with three aligned "7"s (aligned symbols), and a promotion sound effect is output. In addition, the multiple game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 light up in rainbow colors, and a strong vibration effect (promotion vibration effect) is started, in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for three seconds.

As shown in FIG. 89(i), when the strong vibration effect ends and a predetermined period of time (e.g., one second) has elapsed after the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped at normal size, the multiple game board decorative LEDs resume effect illumination (illumination modes other than rainbow illumination) and the effect button 17 goes out.

After that, when a predetermined period (for example, one second) has elapsed, an eye-catching effect is executed, suggesting that the effect pattern 70a will be displayed stationary, as shown in FIG. 89(j). Specifically, an eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to cover the three effect patterns 70a.

After that, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect ends, as shown in FIG. 89(k), the effect pattern 70a returns to a display mode including the character and enters a temporarily stopped state, and the icon is redisplayed, and if there is a first special reserved number, the reserved icon is redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big win confirmation vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the effect button 17 being valid, and the multiple game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 emit light in rainbow colors. However, since the effect button 17 is not valid during the execution of this strong vibration effect, the sound effect when the operation prompting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed and the sound effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period are not output.

After one second has passed, as shown in Figure 89 (l), the strong vibration effect and the rainbow light emitted by the multiple game board decorative LEDs will end, and the effect pattern 70a will stop at "777", and the special pattern TZ will also stop at "777".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 89(m), the opening effect of the jackpot game and the illumination of the multiple game board decoration LEDs begin, and a strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the effect button 17 being valid for a certain period, and the effect button 17 illuminates in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the valid period of the effect button 17, no sound effect is output when the operation prompt image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed, and no sound effect (sound effect) is output when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period. After that, when one second has elapsed, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow illumination of the multiple game board decoration LEDs end, the opening effect of the jackpot game ends, and the first round of play begins.

(Example 2 of a big win when a deciding effect is executed during an SPSP reach effect)
90 and 91, a description will be given of a performance example 2 in which a deciding performance is executed during the SPSP reach performance in the variable performance pattern 16, resulting in a big win. Note that since Figs. 90(a) to (c) are the same as Figs. 88(a) to (c), the description will be omitted here.

When the effect button 17 is operated from the state shown in Fig. 90(c) or the valid period has elapsed, an effect is produced in which three "5" effect symbols 70a are lined up (pattern alignment) as shown in Fig. 90(d), and the effect symbols 70a indicate a jackpot, but no strong vibration effect is produced at this point. At this time, the effect illumination (illumination modes other than rainbow illumination) of multiple game board decorative LEDs (part of the board illumination device) continues.

After that, when a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has passed, the successful decision effect starts as shown in FIG. 90(e). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 while emitting rainbow light, and the first image display device 70 displays a success effect image SEF and outputs a success sound effect. In addition, the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 4 seconds, followed by a strong vibration effect (successful decision vibration effect) in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 5 seconds with a 1-second interval between them, and the three "5" effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in the upper left corner of the screen. In addition, the multiple game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 are illuminated in rainbow colors.

After that, when the first movable member 73 returns to the standby position and the successful decision effect and strong vibration effect end, as shown in FIG. 90(f), a celebration effect to celebrate the big win begins while the multiple game board decoration LEDs and effect button 17 continue to emit rainbow colors. Then, when the celebration effect ends, the multiple game board decoration LEDs resume their effect illumination and the effect button 17 goes out.

After that, when a predetermined period (for example, one second) has elapsed, an eye-catching effect is executed, suggesting that the effect pattern 70a will be displayed stationary, as shown in FIG. 91(g). Specifically, an eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to cover the three effect patterns 70a.

Then, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect ends, as shown in FIG. 91(h), the effect pattern 70a returns to a display mode including the character and enters a temporarily stopped state, and the icon is redisplayed, and if there is a first special reserved number, the reserved icon is redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big win confirmation vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the effect button 17 being valid, and the multiple game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 emit light in rainbow colors. However, since the effect button 17 is not valid during the execution of this strong vibration effect, the sound effect when the operation prompting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed and the sound effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period are not output.

After one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 91(i), the strong vibration effect and the rainbow light emitted by the multiple game board decorative LEDs will end, and the effect pattern 70a will stop at "555", and the special pattern TZ will also stop at "555".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 91(j), the opening effect of the jackpot game and the illumination of the multiple game board decoration LEDs begin, and a strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the effect button 17 being valid for a certain period, and the effect button 17 illuminates in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the valid period of the effect button 17, no sound effect is output when the operation prompt image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed, and no sound effect (sound effect) is output when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period. After that, when one second has elapsed, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow illumination of the multiple game board decoration LEDs end, the opening effect of the jackpot game ends, and the round game begins.

If the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period related to the deciding effect, or if the effective period has elapsed and a deciding failure effect is executed, the first movable member 73 is turned off and does not operate, and a failure effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and a failure sound effect is output. Furthermore, the effect button 17 and some or all of the multiple game board decorative LEDs are turned off, and then the three effect patterns are temporarily stopped with a reach failure result (for example, "565"). After a predetermined period has elapsed, an eye-catching effect is executed that suggests that the effect pattern 70a will be stopped, and when the eye-catching effect ends, the effect pattern 70a returns to a display mode including the character and is temporarily stopped, and the icon is redisplayed, and if there is a first special reserved number, the reserved icon is redisplayed. After one second has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is permanently stopped with a reach failure result, and the special pattern TZ is also permanently stopped with a reach failure result.

In this way, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 88 to 91, a valid suggestion presentation may be executed in the deciding presentation, which not only indicates that a valid period has occurred, but also suggests to the player that there is a high probability of winning, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the example presentations shown in Figures 88 to 91, there are successful deciding presentations in which the first movable member 73 operates before the patterns are aligned, and successful deciding presentations in which the first movable member 73 operates after the patterns are aligned, which effectively improves the presentation effect of the deciding presentation and makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the example effects shown in Figures 88 to 91, the period from when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period until the vibration effect (successful decision vibration effect) is executed is different between a successful decision effect in which the first movable member 73 operates before the symbols are aligned and a successful decision effect in which the first movable member 73 operates after the symbols are aligned. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of elation from the start, or to stir up the player's sense of anxiety and then give him or her a sense of elation, and this contrast effect can effectively increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 88 to 91, the operation period (10 seconds) of the first movable member 73 in the successful winning presentation is the same as the execution period (10 seconds) of the vibration presentation executed during the successful winning presentation. This makes it possible to effectively improve the presentation effect of the successful winning presentation. In addition, the vibration presentation can suggest to the player that a jackpot has been won, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 88 to 91, the vibration presentation executed at the time of the deciding presentation (successful decision vibration presentation) accompanies the effective period of the presentation button 17 (display of the operation prompting image), so the display sound effect when the operation prompting image (opaque presentation button image, gauge image) is displayed and the presentation sound when the presentation button 17 is operated during the effective period (operation sound effect, success sound effect, movable member operation sound effect, etc.) are output. This makes it possible to improve the presentation effect of the successful decision presentation, and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the example of the effects shown in Figures 88 to 91, when three effect patterns 70a that do not include characters are temporarily stopped in a line (pattern alignment), a strong vibration effect (a vibration effect that confirms a jackpot) is executed, so that the player can be effectively informed that a jackpot has been reached, and the player's interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, according to the example of the effects shown in Figures 88 to 91, when three effect patterns 70a including characters are temporarily stopped in a line (C pattern line), a strong vibration effect (jackpot confirmation vibration effect) is executed. This allows the player to confirm again that a jackpot has been reached, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 88 to 91, the vibration presentation (opening vibration presentation) that is executed when the three presentation symbols 70a are temporarily stopped or when the jackpot game is opened does not involve the effective period of the presentation button 17 (display of the operation prompting image), so the display sound effect when the operation prompting image (opaque presentation button image, gauge image) is displayed and the presentation sound when the presentation button 17 is operated during the effective period (operation sound effect, other sound effect, etc.) is not output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences that may confuse the player during a vibration presentation that does not involve the effective period of the presentation button 17, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the examples of effects shown in Figures 88 to 91, the execution period of the vibration effect that is executed when a successful hit is produced is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period and the timing of the operation. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as not being able to fully experience the vibration effect depending on the timing of the operation of the effect button 17, and makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, while the multiple game board decorative LEDs continue to emit light during the effective period related to the deciding effect, some or all of the multiple game board decorative LEDs may be turned off immediately before the effective period occurs or from the start of the effective period until the effect button 17 is operated or the effective time has elapsed, and the multiple game board decorative LEDs may emit rainbow light when the deciding success effect is executed by operating the effect button 17 or the effective time has elapsed. In this way, the operation promotion image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 can be made to stand out, and the player can be informed that a tense scene is occurring, making the game more interesting.

In addition, during a successful play effect, the first movable member 73, the multiple game board decorative LEDs, and the effect button 17 are designed to emit rainbow light, but the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 may emit rainbow light while some or all of the multiple game board decorative LEDs are turned off, or the first movable member 73 may emit rainbow light while the effect button 17 and some or all of the multiple game board decorative LEDs are turned off.

In addition, when executing the successful decision effect, the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73, the multiple game board decoration LEDs, and the effect button 17 was set to start simultaneously, but the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 may start first and then the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73 and the multiple game board decoration LEDs, or the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73 may start first and then the rainbow light emission of the multiple game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17, or the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 may start first and then the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73 and the multiple game board decoration LEDs.

In addition, after the celebration effect ends, the multiple game board decoration LEDs resume their performance illumination and the performance button 17 is turned off, but the rainbow illumination of the game board decoration LEDs may continue even after the celebration effect ends, and the performance illumination may be resumed before the start of the re-lottery effect, or the performance illumination may be resumed before the start of the eye-catching effect, or the rainbow illumination may continue until the performance pattern 70a stops.

In addition, when executing the promotion success effect, the rainbow light emission of the multiple game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 was started at the same time, but the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 may be started first and then the rainbow light emission of the multiple game board decoration LEDs may be started, or the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 may be started first and then the rainbow light emission of the multiple game board decoration LEDs may be started.

In addition, when the SPSP reach effect is executed, the effect pattern 70a is stopped after executing an effect that returns the display mode of the eye-catching effect or the effect pattern 70a to a display mode including a character, but if the SPSP reach effect results in a miss, the effect pattern 70a is stopped after executing an effect that returns the display mode of the eye-catching effect or the effect pattern 70a to a display mode including a character, and if a jackpot is reached, the effect pattern 70a may be stopped in a display mode of only numbers without executing an effect that returns the display mode of the eye-catching effect or the effect pattern 70a to a display mode including a character.

The vibration effect that is executed when the winning combination is successful may be executed at the same timing (for example, 3 seconds after the effective period ends when the effect button 17 is not operated) regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the timing of the operation (the execution period of the vibration effect may be variable).

In addition, a vibration effect is executed when a successful decision is made or when a promotion is successful, but it is also possible to execute the vibration effect when a successful decision is made but not when a promotion is successful, or vice versa, or to not execute the vibration effect when a successful decision is made or when a promotion is successful.

In addition, a vibration effect is executed when a jackpot result is temporarily stopped by the performance pattern 70a of only numbers after the celebration effect or when a jackpot result is temporarily stopped by the performance pattern 70a including characters after the eye-catching effect. However, while a vibration effect is executed when a jackpot result is temporarily stopped by the performance pattern 70a of only numbers after the celebration effect, a vibration effect may not be executed when a jackpot result is temporarily stopped by the performance pattern 70a including characters after the eye-catching effect, or vice versa, or a vibration effect may not be executed when a jackpot result is temporarily stopped by the performance pattern 70a of only numbers after the celebration effect or when a jackpot result is temporarily stopped by the performance pattern 70a including characters after the eye-catching effect.

In addition, when the lamp change effect is being executed, the lamp change effect continues until the effect pattern 70a stops (even during the winning effect, the winning port lamp NR will emit light in a color corresponding to the display mode of the icon before it was hidden), but it may also be set to light up and go out in conjunction with the light emission mode of multiple game board decorative LEDs.

(Example of a special SP reach effect that results in a big win in effect mode A (normal game state))
Using Figure 92, we will explain an example of a presentation when a special SP reach presentation is executed in presentation mode A (normal gaming state) resulting in a jackpot.

First, as shown in FIG. 92(a), the image display device 70 displays the "635" effect pattern 70a, which indicates a miss, and the special pattern TZ in a stopped state. Also, "2" is displayed in the second special pattern hold number display area 70F. At this time, since it is in effect mode A (normal gameplay state), the second hold icon display area 70D is not displayed.

When the second variation performance (variable display of the second special symbol) starts from this state, the second special symbol reserved number display area 70F changes from "2" to "1" as shown in FIG. 92(b). Note that the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, but the icon may be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 92(c), a development effect is executed that suggests that the special SP reach effect will develop, and the special SP reach effect is executed.

Then, when the special SP reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. 92(d), the effect pattern 70a stops at "555", and the special pattern TZ also stops at "555", ending the second variable effect.

After the second variation effect ends, as shown in FIG. 92(e), the opening effect of the jackpot game starts, and jackpot effect 1 is executed. Note that if the second jackpot game is executed as a result of the first variation effect, jackpot effect 2 will be executed.

(Example of a special SP reach effect being executed in the effect mode G (specific game state) and resulting in a big win)
Using Figure 93, an example of a presentation in which a special SP reach presentation is executed in presentation mode G (specific game state) to result in a jackpot will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 93(a), the image display device 70 displays the "285" effect pattern 70a, which indicates a miss, and the special pattern TZ in a stopped state. Also, "2" is displayed in the first special pattern hold number display area 70E. At this time, since it is in effect mode G (specific game state), the first hold icon display area 70B is not displayed.

When the first variable performance starts from this state, as shown in FIG. 93(b), the first special chart reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1." Note that the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, but the icon may be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 93(c), a development effect is executed that suggests that the special SP reach effect will develop, and the special SP reach effect is executed.

Then, when the special SP reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. 93(d), the effect pattern 70a stops at "555", and the special pattern TZ also stops at "555", ending the first variable effect.

After the first variation effect ends, as shown in FIG. 93(e), the opening effect of the jackpot game starts, and jackpot effect 1 is executed. Note that if the second jackpot game is executed as a result of the first variation effect, jackpot effect 2 will be executed.

In this way, according to the example of the performance shown in FIG. 92 and FIG. 93, in the case where the first variation performance (the variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific game state, and in the case where the second variation performance (the variation display of the second special symbol) is executed, the performance is executed in a different manner (whether or not a look-ahead performance is executed, whether or not various advance notice performances are executed, whether or not a specific reach performance is executed, whether or not the icon is displayed, the type of background image, the type of BGM, etc.), but the big win performance after the first variation performance in the specific game state and the big win performance after the second variation performance in the specific game state can be executed in a common manner (background image, BGM, round performance image, etc.). Therefore, during the big win performance, the player does not need to be aware of whether the first variation performance or the second variation performance is the trigger, so the player can enjoy the big win performance without having to think about it too much, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in the normal game state, when the first variation effect (the variation display of the first special symbol) is executed and when the second variation effect (the variation display of the second special symbol) is executed, the effects can be executed in different ways (whether or not a look-ahead effect is executed, whether or not various advance notice effects are executed, whether or not a specific reach effect is executed, whether or not the icon is displayed, the type of background image, the type of BGM, etc.), and the big win effect after the first variation effect in the normal game state and the big win effect after the second variation effect in the normal game state can be executed in a common way (background image, BGM, round effect image, etc.). In this way, during the big win effect, the player does not need to be conscious of whether the first variation effect or the second variation effect is the trigger, so the player can enjoy the big win effect without having to think about it too much, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

(Example of a special mission effect during a big win)
Using Figure 94, an example of a performance in which a special-chance mission performance is executed to determine whether or not a special-chance game state will occur during a jackpot (round play) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 94(a), when the opening effect of the jackpot game starts, a strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) starts in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without an effective period of the effect button 17, and the effect button 17 emits rainbow light. After that, when one second has passed, the strong vibration effect ends, the opening effect of the jackpot game ends, and the first round of play begins.

After that, when the interval period after the first round of play ends and the second round of play begins, as shown in FIG. 94(b), an explanation of the special chance mission performance to see whether or not the game will enter a special chance state begins, and the words "Destroy the enemy to enter special chance state" are displayed until the second round of play ends.

Then, when the interval period after the second round of play ends and the third round of play begins, as shown in FIG. 94(c), the effective period of the effect button 17 (5-second single hit) occurs and the special mission effect begins. Specifically, the word "Defeat it" is displayed, an operation prompting image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 and a gauge image showing the remaining time of the effective period is displayed, a display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is output, and the effect button 17 emits white light. At this time, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) of multiple game board decorative LEDs (part of the board lighting device) continues.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, the mission success effect starts as shown in FIG. 94(d). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 while emitting rainbow light, and the first image display device 70 displays a success effect image SEF and outputs a success sound effect. In addition, a strong vibration effect (promotion vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 5 seconds, and the effect button 17 and some or all of the multiple game board decorative LEDs emit rainbow light.

After that, when the mission success presentation ends, the word "Defeat" is displayed to indicate that the mission has been successful, as shown in FIG. 94(e), the rainbow illumination of the presentation button 17 ends, and the illumination of the multiple game board decorative LEDs resumes. When the third round of play is completed, the word "Defeat" is erased and the round presentation resumes.

Then, when the 9th round of play begins, as shown in FIG. 94(f), an effective period for the effect button 17 and cross key 19 occurs (here, a minimum of 11 seconds from the start of the 9th round of play until 5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the 10th round of play), and a mode selection effect begins for selecting an effect mode during the high probability game state. Specifically, an option image for effect mode D and an option image for effect mode E are displayed, and as an operation prompt image, the text "Select a mode during the high probability game state with the cross key and press the button to confirm!" and an opaque effect button image that resembles the effect button 17 that emits white light are displayed.

After that, when the right button of the cross key 19 is operated, the state changes from the state in which the option image for presentation mode D was selected (the option image for presentation mode E is displayed in a dark color) to the state in which the option image for presentation mode E is selected (the option image for presentation mode D is displayed in a dark color), as shown in FIG. 94 (g).

Then, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, the option image for effect mode E is enlarged as shown in FIG. 94(h), and it is announced that the first effect mode during the high probability game state will be effect mode E, and the mode selection effect ends. After that, when the tenth round of play ends, the ending effect is executed, and when the ending effect ends, the high probability game state begins.

When a mission failure effect is executed, the first movable member 73 turns off and does not operate, a failure effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and a failure sound effect is output. Furthermore, the mode selection effect is not executed and the game transitions to the ending effect.

In this way, according to the presentation example shown in FIG. 94, the operation period (5 seconds) of the first movable member 73 in the mission success presentation is the same as the execution period (5 seconds) of the vibration presentation (promotion vibration presentation) executed at the time of the mission success presentation. This makes it possible to effectively improve the presentation effect of the mission success presentation. In addition, the vibration presentation can suggest to the player that the result is favorable to the player, in other words, that a special chance state will occur, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, according to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 94, the vibration effect (promotion vibration effect) executed when the mission is successful accompanies the valid period of the effect button 17, so a display sound effect is output when the operation prompting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed, and a sound effect (success sound effect) is output when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period. This makes it possible to improve the effect of the successful decision effect, and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 94, the execution period of the vibration effect (promotion vibration effect) executed when the mission is successful is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period and the timing of the operation. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration effect depending on the timing of the operation of the effect button 17, and makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in FIG. 94, even if the presentation button 17 or cross key 19 is operated during the mode selection presentation, a vibration presentation is not executed. This prevents the player from mistakenly believing that the selected presentation mode has a higher chance of winning than the unselected presentation mode, making the game more interesting. It also prevents the player from being surprised, making it possible to avoid any inconvenience that may cause the player discomfort.

In addition, while the multiple game board decorative LEDs continue to emit light during the valid period related to the special mission effect, some or all of the multiple game board decorative LEDs may be turned off immediately before the valid period occurs or from the start of the valid period until the effect button 17 is operated or the valid time has elapsed, and the multiple game board decorative LEDs may emit rainbow light when the mission success effect is executed by operating the effect button 17 or the valid time has elapsed. In this way, the operation promotion image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 can be made to stand out, and the player can be informed that a tense scene is occurring, making the game more interesting.

In addition, during the mission success presentation, the first movable member 73, the multiple game board decoration LEDs, and the presentation button 17 are arranged to emit rainbow light, but the first movable member 73 and the presentation button 17 may emit rainbow light while some or all of the multiple game board decoration LEDs are turned off, or the first movable member 73 may emit rainbow light while the presentation button 17 and the multiple game board decoration LEDs are turned off.

In addition, when executing the mission success effect, the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73, the multiple game board decoration LEDs, and the effect button 17 was set to start simultaneously, but the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 may start first and then the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73 and the multiple game board decoration LEDs, or the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73 may start first and then the rainbow light emission of the multiple game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17, or the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 may start first and then the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73 and the multiple game board decoration LEDs.

In addition, the vibration effect that is executed when the mission is successful may be executed at the same timing (for example, 3 seconds after the effective period ends when the effect button 17 is not operated) regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and regardless of the timing of the operation (the execution period of the vibration effect may be variable).

In addition, a vibration effect is executed when a mission is successful, but it is also possible to not execute the vibration effect when a mission is successful.

(Example of a performance when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and then resumed during the execution of the icon change performance and the lamp change performance)
Using Figures 95 and 96, an example of the presentation when power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped and then resumed while the icon change presentation and lamp change presentation are being executed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 95(a), when the first hold icon (white icon) is displayed in the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2 of the first hold icon display area 70B, the "728" miss display pattern 70a is displayed in a stopped state.

After that, when the variable performance in which the SPSP reach performance is executed starts, as shown in FIG. 95(b), the variable display of the performance pattern 70a starts, and the first hold icon (white icon) displayed in the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2 shifts and is displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display section 70B1, respectively.

Here, the icon change effect is started by changing the display mode of the icon that is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C to a red icon, and accordingly, the prize winning lamp NR changes from an off state to a flashing red state, starting the lamp change effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 95(c), the "3" performance pattern 70a is displayed stationary (temporarily stopped) in the variable display areas to the left and right of the performance pattern 70a that was being displayed in a variable manner, while a reach performance (normal reach) is executed in which the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner in the central variable display area.

When the game progresses to SP Reach, as shown in FIG. 95(d), the SP Reach performance begins, the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the screen, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are erased together with the hold icons.

After that, when the game progresses to an SPSP reach, as shown in FIG. 95(e), the SPSP reach performance starts, and the icon display area 70C in which the icon is displayed is erased together with the icon. At this time, the winning slot lamp NR does not go out with the disappearance of the icon, and the lamp change performance of the winning slot lamp NR continues.

When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, the image display device goes dark and the prize slot lamp NR goes out, as shown in Figure 95 (f).

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. 96(g), the image display device displays an initial screen including the words "Loading", but the prize slot lamp NR remains off.

When the presentation control board 130 receives the second power restoration command sent from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. 96(h), the image display device displays a recovery screen containing the text "Please resume play" for the duration of the SPSP reach presentation (including the execution period of the re-lottery presentation to see whether the temporarily stopped jackpot presentation symbol will be promoted to a jackpot presentation symbol of higher value to the player), but the prize winning port lamp NR remains off.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach performance, which is a miss, ends (the performance control board 130 receives the special symbol stop command indicating a miss), as shown in FIG. 96(i), the performance symbol 70a is not temporarily stopped (shaking and changing), and a stop screen (second standby screen) is displayed in which the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power recovery, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the changing performance ends without resuming the lamp changing performance.

At this time, the first display section 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B displays the same white icon as before the power supply was stopped, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, but a rectangular area image is displayed, ensuring that the display space (display area) of the icon is secured in a state in which a background image or other presentation image can be displayed.

After that, when the next variable performance starts, as shown in FIG. 96(j), the display of the performance pattern 70a starts to change, and the first hold icon (white icon) displayed in the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display section 70B1, respectively.

On the other hand, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect which results in a jackpot ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special chart stop command indicating a jackpot), as shown in FIG. 96(k), instead of a temporary stop display (swaying fluctuation/swinging display) of the effect pattern 70a, a stop screen is displayed in which the "777" jackpot effect pattern 70a (a combination of effect patterns different from the reach combination of the "3↓3" effect pattern which formed the reach state before the power was cut off) indicating the type of jackpot game this time (here, the first jackpot game) and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the variable effect ends without the lamp change effect resuming on the winning port lamp NR.

In addition to the variable performance in which the SPSP reach performance is executed, other variable performances (variable performance in which normal variation is executed, variable performance in which shortened variation is executed, variable performance in which normal reach performance is executed, variable performance in which SP reach performance is executed) will also be executed. When the power supply that was stopped during execution is resumed and the execution period of the performance ends, the performance pattern 70a will not be temporarily stopped (swaying variation/swinging display) and the missing performance pattern 70a of "753" or the jackpot performance pattern that is the same or a different combination of performance patterns as the reach combination of the performance patterns that formed the reach state before the power was cut off will be displayed as a stopped display (static display).

In addition, regardless of whether the game control state of the special pattern TZ is initialized or restored, and whether the subsequent state is a normal game state or a specific game state (low-probability time-saving game state, high-probability time-saving game state), the special pattern TZ will be displayed in the same display mode (shape, design) and in a stopped (static) display with numbers that are the same combination as the performance pattern 70a.

After that, when the opening of the jackpot game starts, as shown in FIG. 96(l), the image display device starts an opening performance including information indicating the type of jackpot game ("MAX jackpot" indicating that it is the first jackpot game), and the first pending icon display area 70B, the second pending icon display area 70D, and the icon display area 70C are erased together with the icons.

The winning slot lamp NR remains off while the initial screen and/or the return screen are displayed, but the winning slot lamp NR may be lit in a lighting mode (e.g. white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change presentation (does not indicate the likelihood of winning a jackpot).

In this way, according to the presentation example shown in Figures 95 and 96, when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the variable presentation in which the presentation pattern 70a is temporarily stopped (swaying and fluctuating) and then stopped is resumed and the game control state is restored, if the special pattern fluctuation time has elapsed and a special pattern stop designation command (if the special pattern stop designation command is missed and thereafter the game transitions to a customer waiting state, a customer waiting state designation command) is received, the presentation pattern 70a is displayed as stopped (still displayed) without being temporarily stopped (swaying and fluctuating/swaying display). This allows the player to understand that the variable presentation that was being executed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 95 and 96, when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the miss variable presentation is resumed and the game control state is restored, the presentation pattern 70a is displayed (still displayed) as a still image, and not the normal miss presentation pattern, but the combination of presentation patterns that is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration is displayed (still displayed). This eliminates the need for cumbersome processing such as determining the presentation pattern to be displayed (still displayed) by lottery, and makes it possible to know that the power has been restored and the game control state has been restored, and that the variable presentation that was being executed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 95 and 96, when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the jackpot variable presentation is resumed and the game control state is restored, the presentation pattern is displayed as still (static), and the combination of jackpot presentation patterns is displayed as still (static). Therefore, it is possible to understand that the power supply is restored, which restores the game control state, and that the variable presentation that was being executed at the time the power supply was stopped was the jackpot variable presentation.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 95 and 96, when a combination of jackpot presentation symbols is displayed (still displayed) after the game control state is restored, it is possible to display (still display) a combination of jackpot presentation symbols different from the reach combination of presentation symbols that formed the reach state before the power supply was stopped. Therefore, there is no need to be aware of the jackpot presentation symbols that were scheduled to be displayed (still displayed) before the power supply was stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to display control after the power supply is resumed.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 95 and 96, if the variable presentation being executed at the time the power supply was stopped includes the execution period of the promotion presentation described above, the big win presentation pattern is displayed as still (static display) without executing the promotion presentation after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored. Therefore, since no unnecessary presentation is performed before the presentation pattern is displayed as still (static display), it becomes possible for the player to immediately understand that the variable presentation being executed at the time the power supply was stopped was a big win variable presentation.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 95 and 96, the display mode (type of display screen, display order of display screen) of the image display device after the power supply is resumed is the same in the case where the power supply that was stopped during the execution of a miss variation presentation is resumed and the game control state is restored, and in the case where the power supply that was stopped during the execution of a jackpot variation presentation is resumed and the game control state is restored. Therefore, simple display control can be performed without being aware of whether a miss variation presentation or a jackpot variation presentation was being executed, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is resumed.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 95 and 96, after the power supply is resumed and the game control state is restored, the special symbol TZ is displayed in the same display mode as before the power supply was stopped, and is displayed stationary (statically) with numbers that form the same combination as the presentation symbol 70a. This makes it easier to grasp that the variable presentation that was being performed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 95 and 96, if the power supply that was stopped while the icon was being displayed is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, from the time the display of the recovery screen ends until the next variable presentation (scrolling of the presentation pattern 70a) begins, a rectangular area image is displayed in the icon display area 70C, ensuring that the display space (display area) of the icon is in a state in which a presentation image such as a background image can be displayed, but the icon is not displayed. This allows the player to understand that the variable presentation that was being performed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 95 and 96, if the power supply that was stopped while the reserved icon was displayed is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, a rectangular area image is displayed in the reserved icon display area from the time the display of the recovery screen ends until the next variable presentation starts, so that the display space (display area) of the reserved icon is secured in a state in which a presentation image such as a background image can be displayed, and the reserved icon is displayed. Therefore, even if the power supply is stopped, it is possible to know that the reserved variable presentation has not disappeared, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the example of the effects shown in Figures 95 and 96, if the power supply that was stopped during the variable effect (storage of special chart determination information that changes the winning slot lamp NR to a lighting color (blue, red, rainbow) that has a high expectation of winning a jackpot) corresponding to the icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change effect is resumed and the game control state is restored, the lamp change effect is not resumed and the winning slot lamp NR is set to a notification mode (off or white light) that does not indicate the expectation of winning a jackpot. This makes it possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is resumed, while avoiding a situation in which the player is confused by the lamp change effect being resumed even though the variable effect has not been executed.

After the execution period of the jackpot variable performance ends, a stopped screen is displayed with the jackpot performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ frozen, but a second standby screen may be displayed with the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ frozen (static display), just like when a loss occurs.

After the execution period of the jackpot variable presentation ends, a stop screen is displayed in which the jackpot presentation pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state, but an opening presentation for the jackpot game may be started without displaying the stop screen and without displaying the jackpot presentation pattern 70a. Also, in the opening presentation, information indicating the type of jackpot game may be displayed, or the jackpot special pattern TZ of "777" may be displayed, or the special pattern TZ of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, may be displayed.

In addition, after the execution period of the miss variation effect has ended, the effect pattern 70a, which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ may be displayed, and after the execution period of the jackpot variation effect has ended, the opening effect of the jackpot game may be started without displaying the stopped screen in which the jackpot effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state.

In addition, if it is possible to execute a specific effect that incites whether or not a jackpot game will be played (raise the expectation that a jackpot game will be played) without displaying the effect pattern 70a in the reach state during the variable effect, after the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the specific effect is resumed and the control state is restored, if it is a miss, the effect pattern 70a, which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, may be displayed in a stopped state (static display), and if it is a jackpot, the jackpot effect pattern 70a may be displayed in a stopped state (static display).

In addition, when a combination of jackpot performance symbols is displayed in a static manner (still display) after the game control state is restored, one of a plurality of combinations of jackpot performance symbols corresponding to the type of jackpot game to be executed thereafter may be displayed in a static manner.

In this case, for example, the combination of jackpot effect symbols suggesting the execution of the first jackpot game is "333" and "777", the combination of jackpot effect symbols suggesting the execution of the second jackpot game is "222", "444", "666", and "888", and the combination of jackpot effect symbols suggesting the execution of the third jackpot game is "111", "555", and "999".

If the reach combination before the power supply was stopped was "1↓1", which constitutes part of the combination of jackpot performance symbols that suggests the execution of a third jackpot game, then if the jackpot game to be executed afterwards is the first jackpot game, either "333" or "777" (a combination of jackpot performance symbols different from the reach combination of the performance symbols that formed the reach state) will be displayed as a static display, and if the jackpot game to be executed afterwards is the third jackpot game, either "111", "555", or "999" (a combination of jackpot performance symbols that is the same as or different from the reach combination of the performance symbols that formed the reach state) will be displayed as a static display.

In addition, after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, the special pattern TZ may be displayed as a static display (static display) with numbers that are a different combination from the performance pattern 70a, rather than a static display (static display) with numbers that are the same combination as the performance pattern 70a.

In addition, if the normal game state and customer waiting state are in effect after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are displayed as still (static), whereas if the specific game state (low probability time-shortened game state, high probability time-shortened game state) and customer waiting state are in effect after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, the performance pattern 70a may not be displayed as still (static), and the special pattern TZ may be displayed as still (static).

(Example of a performance when power supply to a gaming machine is stopped and then resumed during execution of a look-ahead effect performance, a reserved icon change performance, and a lamp change performance)
Figures 97 and 98 are figures showing examples of presentations when power supply to a gaming machine is stopped and then resumed during the execution of a look-ahead effect presentation, a pending icon change presentation, and a lamp change presentation.

As shown in FIG. 97(a), when the first hold icon (white icon) is displayed in the first display section 70B1, the second display section 70B2, and the third display section 70B3 of the first hold icon display area 70B, the "728" miss display pattern 70a is displayed in a stopped state.

After that, when the pre-variation variation performance starts, as shown in FIG. 97(b), the display of the variation of the performance pattern 70a starts, and the first hold icon (white icon) displayed in the first display section 70B1, the second display section 70B2, and the third display section 70B3 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C, the first display section 70B1, and the second display section 70B2, respectively.

Here, the first pre-reading effect performance is started by displaying an effect image EF around the performance pattern 70a which starts the changing display, and the display mode of the first reserved icon (final icon display mode = red icon) which is shifted and displayed on the second display section 70B2 changes to a blue icon, starting the reserved icon change performance, and accordingly the winning slot lamp NR changes from an off state to a flashing blue state, starting the lamp change performance.

After that, as shown in FIG. 97(c), the effect image EF displayed around the effect symbol 70a is erased, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling at high speed. Then, after the change time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 97(d), the effect symbol 70a indicating a miss is temporarily stopped, and then the miss effect symbol 70a of "259" and the special symbol TZ are stopped.

After that, when the pre-variation effect starts, as shown in FIG. 97(e), the display of the variation of the performance pattern 70a starts, and the first hold icon displayed in the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2 shifts and is displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display section 70B1, respectively.

At this point, the second pre-reading effect performance begins as an effect image EF is displayed around the performance pattern 70a that is starting to change, and the pending icon change performance and the lamp change performance continue.

Then, as shown in FIG. 97(f), the effect image EF displayed around the effect symbol 70a is erased, and the effect symbol 70a begins to scroll at high speed. If the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off at this point, as shown in FIG. 97(g), the image display device is hidden and the winning slot lamp NR is turned off.

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. 97(h), the image display device displays an initial screen including the words "Loading", but the winning slot lamp NR remains off without resuming the lamp change presentation.

Then, when the performance control board 130 receives the second power restoration command sent from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. 98(i), the image display device displays a recovery screen containing the text "Please resume play" for the duration of the execution of the pre-change, but the winning slot lamp NR remains off.

After that, when the execution period of the pre-change ends (the performance control board 130 receives a special pattern stop command indicating a miss), as shown in Figure 98 (j), the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power recovery, and the stop screen with the special pattern TZ stopped (still displayed) are displayed without a temporary stop display (swaying change) of the performance pattern 70a, and the pre-change ends without resuming the lamp change performance.

At this time, the first display section 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B displays a white icon, not the blue icon that was displayed before the power supply was stopped, and the icon display area 70C does not display the icon, but a rectangular area image is displayed, ensuring that the display space (display area) for the icon is available for displaying a background image or other presentation image.

After that, when the variable performance in which the SPSP reach performance is executed starts, as shown in FIG. 98 (k), the variable display of the performance pattern 70a starts, and the first hold icon (white icon) displayed in the first display section 70B1 shifts and is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

If the newly executed lottery for the icon change effect is won, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C will change to a blue icon in response to the result, and the icon change effect will begin. On the other hand, since no new lottery is executed for the lamp change effect, the winning port lamp NR will remain off and the lamp change effect will not resume.

After that, as shown in FIG. 98(l), the lines spoken by ally A are displayed in a line window displayed on the image display device, and the voice output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the lines, "Your chance has come!", thereby executing a line preview performance.

Then, as shown in FIG. 98(m), the "3" performance pattern 70a is displayed stationary (temporarily stopped) in the variable display areas to the left and right of the performance pattern 70a that was being displayed in a variable manner, while a reach performance (normal reach) is executed in which the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner in the central variable display area.

After that, when it progresses to SP Reach, as shown in FIG. 98(n), the SP Reach performance starts, the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the screen, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are erased.

When the game progresses to an SPSP reach, the SPSP reach performance starts, as shown in FIG. 98(o), and the icon display area 70C is erased together with the icon.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect which results in a jackpot ends (the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol stop command indicating a jackpot), as shown in FIG. 98(p), the jackpot effect pattern 70a of "333" which indicates the type of jackpot game this time (here, the first jackpot game) and the special symbol TZ are temporarily stopped (shaking and fluctuating) and then stopped, and the fluctuating effect ends.

The winning slot lamp NR remains off while the initial screen and/or the return screen are displayed, but the winning slot lamp NR may be lit in a lighting mode (e.g. white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change presentation (does not indicate the likelihood of winning a jackpot).

In addition, if a special pattern stop designation command cannot be received during a changing performance (temporarily stopped display (swaying change) of performance pattern 70a), the performance pattern 70a that is temporarily stopped (swaying change) will continue to be temporarily stopped (swaying change) without being stopped.

In this way, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 97 and 98, if the power supply that was stopped during the execution of a look-ahead effect presentation is resumed and the game control state is restored, the continuous preview presentation is not resumed in the variable presentation corresponding to the special chart determination information stored at the time of restoration. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of the presentation proceeding without knowing the predicted target of the continuous preview presentation due to the power supply being stopped, and makes it possible to increase the interest in the game. The same applies when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of another continuous preview presentation is resumed and the game control state is restored.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 97 and 98, if the power supply that was stopped while a reserved icon that is displayed as a special icon (including cases where the display mode has not changed to the final display mode and cases where the display mode has changed to the final display mode) is resumed and the game control state is restored, the reserved icon that was displayed as a special icon is displayed as a normal icon. This means that there is no need to be aware of the display mode of the reserved icon when the power supply was stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to display control after the power supply is resumed.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 97 and 98, if the power supply that was stopped during the execution of an icon change presentation is resumed and the game control state is restored, the pending icon change presentation is not executed in the variable presentation corresponding to the special chart determination information stored at the time of restoration, but the icon change presentation can be executed again. This reduces the player's dissatisfaction caused by the icon change presentation ending due to the power supply being stopped, and makes the game more enjoyable.

In addition, according to the example of the presentation shown in Figures 97 and 98, even if the icon change presentation corresponding to the special chart determination information stored at the time of recovery is being executed again, it will not be executed from the stage indicated before the power supply was stopped. Therefore, it is possible to execute an icon change presentation that conforms to the content of the current change presentation, making it possible to increase the excitement of the game.

In addition, according to the example of the performance shown in Figures 97 and 98, even if the power supply that was stopped during the variable performance (storage of special chart determination information that changes the winning slot lamp NR to a lighting color (blue, red, rainbow) that has a high expectation of winning a jackpot) corresponding to the reserved icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change performance is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the lamp change performance is not resumed and the winning slot lamp NR is set to a notification mode (off or white light) that does not indicate the expectation of winning a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is resumed, while avoiding a situation in which the player is confused by the lamp change performance being resumed even though the variable performance has not been executed.

Second Embodiment
The second embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a performance lever device 23 is provided in addition to the performance button 17 as an operation means that can be operated by the player.

First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described using Figure 99. Figure 99 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1 in the second embodiment. Note that a description of the same parts as in the first embodiment will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 99, a performance lever device 23 that functions as an input device is provided on the central bottom side of the upper tray 11, opposite the performance button device 16.
The effect lever device 23 is located on the central bottom side of the upper tray 11, forming the front and back of the effect button device 16, and is equipped with a effect lever 24 that the player can operate by pulling it towards himself, a effect lever detection switch (not shown) that detects operation of the effect lever 24, and a lever vibration motor (not shown) for vibrating the effect lever 24, and by operating the effect lever 24, the player can input specified information into the gaming machine 1.

The effect button device 16 and the effect lever device 23 are provided on the upper tray 11, so when the button vibration motor that vibrates the effect button 17 is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the effect lever 24 via the upper tray 11, which acts as a transmission member. On the other hand, when the lever vibration motor that vibrates the effect lever 24 is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the effect button 17 via the upper tray 11. In other words, when a player is operating one operation part with his/her hand and a vibration effect that vibrates the other operation part (a vibration effect with/without an effective period of the operation part related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a dialogue preview effect, a step-up preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, an advance effect, a cut-in effect, a deciding effect, a re-draw effect, a confirmation effect, etc.) is executed, the vibration is transmitted to the player's hand via the other operation part.

In addition, since the effect button device 16 and the effect lever device 23 are provided on the upper tray 11 attached to the glass frame 4, when the button vibration motor that vibrates the effect button 17 is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the firing handle via the upper tray 11 and the glass frame 4, which act as transmission members. Furthermore, when the lever vibration motor that vibrates the effect lever 24 is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the effect button 17 via the upper tray 11 and the glass frame 4.

(Decisive performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a finishing effect pattern determination table that is referenced when determining the effect pattern of the finishing effect in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 100, the deciding effect pattern determination table associates the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the type of variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each deciding effect pattern, and the deciding effect pattern to be selected, and for reference, the effect configuration of each deciding effect pattern (valid suggestion effect, valid period, effect content) is also listed.

The "valid suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests the possibility of a valid period occurring, and specifically, a semi-transparent effect button image that imitates the effect button 17 and a semi-transparent effect lever image that imitates the effect lever 24 are displayed and moved on the first image display device 70, and the semi-transparent effect button images and semi-transparent effect lever images are caused to gather toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit, 5 seconds)" indicates that the valid period for the deciding effect ends with one operation of the effect button 17 or effect lever 24 or the passage of 5 seconds.

"Operation target" in the validity period column indicates the type of operation part (effect button 17, effect lever 24) whose operation is valid during the validity period; if it is a "effect button", operation of the effect button 17 is valid, and if it is a "effect lever", operation of the effect lever 24 is valid.
A "promotion effect" is an effect that encourages the operation of the operating unit (effect button 17, effect lever 24) during the valid period; specifically, without executing a valid suggestion effect or as a result of executing a valid suggestion effect, an opaque effect button image or an opaque effect lever image is displayed in a specific position, and a gauge image is displayed that indicates the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that the above-mentioned opaque effect button image is displayed as a button image imitating effect button 17 in its normal, non-protruding state, which emits white light, and that effect button 17 emits white light.
"Red protruding button" indicates that a button image imitating the protruding effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits red light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above, and that the effect button 17 emits red light.
"Protruding button rainbow" indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits rainbow light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above, and that the effect button 17 emits rainbow light.

"Normal lever" indicates that an effect lever image imitating the effect lever 24 of a predetermined size is displayed as the opaque effect lever image described above.
"Large lever rainbow" indicates that an effect lever image that imitates the effect lever 24 that is larger than a predetermined size is displayed as the opaque effect lever image described above.

The "operation unit state" in the validity period column indicates the state of the operation unit (effect button 17, effect lever 24) during the validity period, with "normal" indicating the normal state in which the target operation unit is not protruding if the target operation unit is the effect button 17, and "protruding" indicating the protruding state in which the target operation unit is protruding if the target operation unit is the effect button 17. Note that the effect lever 24 does not have a protruding state, so it only has the normal state.

"Fail" in the column for the winning performance mode indicates that the first movable member 73 does not move and the screen of the first image display device 70 turns dark, resulting in a winning failure performance that suggests that a jackpot game will not be played.
"Success" indicates that the first movable member 73 moves to its maximum operating position, emits rainbow light, and a success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, thereby executing a decisive success presentation suggesting that a jackpot game will be played.

In the button vibration column, "Strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" indicates that the vibrator for vibrating the effect button 17 will vibrate strongly for 4 seconds from the start of the successful decision effect (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends), followed by a 1-second interval and then a strong vibration effect (successful decision vibration effect) for 5 seconds.

In the button illumination column, "Rainbow illumination (11 seconds)" indicates that the illumination button LED for illuminating the illumination button 17 will illuminate in a rainbow color for 11 seconds (a longer period than when the illumination button 17 is vibrating strongly) from the start of the successful decision illumination (= when the illumination button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends). Note that the illumination button 17 will illuminate in a rainbow color even if the target of operation is the illumination lever 24.

The probability of winning for each promotion is as follows: "normal white button" < "protruding red button" < "normal lever" < "protruding rainbow button" = "large lever rainbow." Also, the probability of winning for each operating state is "normal" < "protruding."

The first feature of the deciding effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 100 is that when a deciding success effect is executed, a vibration effect (decision success vibration effect) is executed, which generates a valid period and vibrates the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24. This makes it possible to effectively notify the player that a big win game is about to be played, which can increase the interest of the game.

The second feature of the deciding effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 100 is that the effective period occurs for the longest period of time that occurs during a variable effect. This can prevent the player from forgetting to operate the effect button 17, making the game more interesting.

The third feature of the deciding effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 100 is that the strong vibration effect that occurs during the variable effect causes the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 to vibrate for the longest period of time. This effectively heightens the player's sense of elation when a deciding effect is successful, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

The fourth feature of the deciding effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 100 is that the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 lasts for a longer period than the vibration period of the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24. Therefore, the player's sense of elation can be maintained even after the vibration of the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 has ended, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, all three performance patterns 70a are temporarily stopped (swaying motion) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, but the left and right performance patterns 70a may be stopped and only the central performance pattern 70a may be temporarily stopped (swaying motion). At this time, all three performance patterns 70a may perform a swaying motion (performance motion), or the left and right performance patterns 70a may not perform a swaying motion (performance motion) and only the central performance pattern 70a may perform a swaying motion (performance motion).

In addition, in this embodiment, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the decorative part are adapted to perform a swaying motion (performance motion) when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, but it is also possible to have only one of the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE perform a swaying motion (performance motion).

In addition, in this embodiment, the identification section consisting of the hexagonal base image and the number section (identification characters) does not perform a swaying motion (performance action) when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, but the texture of the identification section (surface pattern, etc.) may be made to perform a swaying motion (performance action), or a lighting effect may be added to the identification section to cause it to perform a swaying motion (performance action).

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance pattern 70a is configured to swing up and down as a temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, but the performance pattern 70a may also be configured to expand and contract. In this case, when a start command is received during the temporary stop, if the performance pattern 70a is shifted in the direction of shrinking from the stop position (smaller than the normal size) or if it is shifted in the direction of expanding (larger than the normal size), it should be displayed at the stop position in the normal size.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance pattern 70a is made to sway up and down as a temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, but the performance pattern 70a may not sway, and may instead sway so that the decorative parts and number parts extend beyond the base image. In this case, when a start command is received during the temporary stop, if the decorative parts or number parts are shifted in a direction that causes them to extend beyond the base image, it is preferable to make them fit within the base image and display them at the stop position.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a specific game state (time-saving game state, special probability game state), the performance pattern 70a is composed only of a number portion (identification character), so the decorative portion does not flicker (performance action) when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. However, the performance pattern 70a may be composed of a number portion (identification character) and a decorative portion consisting of a pattern effect image, so that the pattern effect image flickers (performance action) when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped.

In addition, in this embodiment, no mention is made of the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 76 during the extension of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, but during the extension of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, at least one of the multiple light-emitting parts that make up the frame lighting device 10 may be in the same state as during the temporary stop before the extension (a light-emitting state with lower brightness than during fluctuation, a light-emitting state with less change and movement than during fluctuation), and at least one of the multiple light-emitting parts that make up the board lighting device 76 may be in the same light-emitting state as during the temporary stop before the extension (a light-emitting state with lower brightness than during fluctuation, a light-emitting state with less change and movement than during fluctuation, or turned off). In this case, when the next start command is received, the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 76 will change (switch) to a light-emitting state that corresponds to the state of fluctuation.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance pattern 70a in a losing mode stops, the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), but it may also be stopped in a losing mode that is the same number as the performance pattern 70a. In addition, when the performance pattern 70a in a jackpot mode stops, the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined jackpot mode ("333"), but it may also be stopped in a jackpot mode that is the same number as the performance pattern 70a.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance control unit 130m receives a start command (special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m while the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ and lamp symbol LZ change display continues, but it is also possible to instantaneously derive and display them as with the performance pattern 70a and then start the change display. In this case, for the special symbol TZ, it is preferable to display the special symbol TZ at the stop position that is shifted from the predetermined stop position.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a start command or a customer waiting state designation command is received while the icon TI is displayed, the icon TI is erased with one frame of non-animation, but this need only be shorter than the 10 frames required for erasing the icon TI upon receiving a stop command, the 20 frames required for shifting the display of the hold icon HI, and the 10 frames required for additional display of the hold icon, and may be erased with, for example, five frames of animation.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a start command is received while a number of reserved icons greater than the number of reserved special drawings is displayed, the excess reserved icons HI are erased with one frame of non-animation, but the number of frames may be shorter than the 10 frames required to erase the icon TI upon receiving a stop command, the 20 frames required to shift the display of the reserved icon HI, and the 10 frames required to display additional reserved icons, and may be erased with, for example, five frames of animation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 130m receives a start command that sets the number of reserved special drawings to a predetermined number. In the event that an inconsistency occurs due to a command abnormality between the number of reserved special drawings notified by the main control unit 110m and the number of reserved special drawings stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m (an abnormality in which the numbers are the same, or an abnormality in which there is a deviation in the increasing direction), the predetermined number of reserved icons are displayed after displaying one more reserved icon than the predetermined number; however, it is also possible to display the predetermined number of reserved icons as is without displaying one more reserved icon than the predetermined number.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance control unit 130m receives a start command that sets the number of reserved special drawings to a specified number, if an inconsistency occurs due to a command abnormality between the number of reserved special drawings notified by the main control unit 110m and the number of reserved special drawings stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m (an abnormality in which the numbers are the same, an abnormality in which there is a deviation in the increasing direction), the icon is displayed during the variable performance executed in response to receiving the start command, but it is also possible not to display the icon during the variable performance executed in response to receiving the start command.

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal icon is a white icon regardless of the type of presentation mode, but the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon may be different depending on the type of presentation mode or game state. In this case, the special icon may be a character icon regardless of the type of presentation mode, or the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon may be different depending on the type of presentation mode or game state.

In addition, when the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon is made different depending on the type of presentation mode or game state, the operation mode (mode of presentation operation) during the variable presentation may be made different depending on the form of the normal icon. Furthermore, when the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon is made different depending on the type of presentation mode or game state, the operation mode (mode of presentation operation) during the variable presentation may be made different depending on the form of the special icon.

In addition, in this embodiment, only the special icon was displayed as a result of the icon change effect, but a special icon suggesting a change to a special icon (displayed during the process of changing to a special icon) or a specific icon suggesting that a specific reach effect (for example, an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect) will be executed may be provided. In this case, it is advisable to make the shape of the special icon or specific icon and the mode of the performance operation different from the shape of the normal icon or special icon and the mode of the performance operation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the reserved icon is displayed when both the special reserved number designation command and the look-ahead designation command are received successfully as winning commands, but the reserved icon may be displayed when the special reserved number designation command is received but the look-ahead designation command is not received successfully, while the reserved icon may not be displayed when the special reserved number designation command is not received successfully but the look-ahead designation command is received successfully, or vice versa. Note that when only one of the special reserved number designation command and the look-ahead designation command is received and the reserved icon is displayed, the icon change effect for this reserved icon may not be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the player cannot change the presentation mode by operating the presentation button 17, but it may be possible to change the presentation mode by operating the presentation button 17. In this case, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the presentation pattern 70a based on a command abnormality in which the presentation control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, the operation to change the presentation mode is not accepted, in other words, the change of the presentation mode based on the operation of the presentation button 17 is restricted.

In addition, in this embodiment, the reserved icon change effect is executed without operating the effect button 17, but the reserved icon may be displayed as a button icon that prompts the operation of the effect button 17, and an operation change effect may be executed in which the button icon is changed to any of the normal icon, special icon, and specific icon in response to the operation of the effect button 17 while the button icon that activates the effect button 17 is displayed. In this case, the operation change effect may change the effect button 17 from the first operation mode (non-vibration, non-protruding state in the standby position) to the second operation mode (vibration, protruding state in the effect position) at a predetermined rate. In this case, it is preferable that the rate at which the effect button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the above-mentioned dialogue preview effect or deciding effect is higher than the rate at which the effect button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the operation change effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display mode of the effect button image executed in the valid suggestion effect is semi-transparent, but the effect button image may be an outline only, or a silhouette only.

In addition, in this embodiment, a vibration effect (operation of the button vibration motor) of the effect button 17 can be executed when a pre-reach preview effect (dialogue preview effect, step-up preview effect) or a development effect is executed, but a frame movable member may be provided in the glass frame 4, and an action effect that operates the frame movable member may be executed when a vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed in a pre-reach preview effect or a development effect, or an action effect that operates the frame movable member may be executed instead of a vibration effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, a vibration effect of the effect button 17 can be executed when a post-reach preview effect (pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, confirmation effect) is executed or when symbols are aligned, but a frame movable member may be provided in the glass frame 4, and an action effect that operates the frame movable member may be executed when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed when symbols are aligned, or an action effect that operates the frame movable member may be executed instead of a vibration effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, while an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect is being performed, no title is displayed to indicate that the reach effect is being performed. However, the title may be displayed in one of two display modes with different odds of winning (white characters, red characters which have a higher odds of winning than white characters, rainbow characters which guarantee a win, etc.), and the title may be displayed in white characters and then changed to red characters or rainbow characters.

In addition, in this embodiment, the cut-in effect is performed at the end of the SP reach effect, but it may be performed in the middle (first period) or end (second period) of the SP reach effect, so that the effect button 17 is more likely to protrude (the probability of protruding is higher) when the cut-in effect is performed at the end of the SP reach effect than when the cut-in effect is performed in the middle of the SP reach effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, an effective period during which the effect button 17 is pressed and held is generated in the development effect, but it is also possible to generate an effective period during which the effect button 17 is pressed and held as a jackpot preview effect other than the development effect, and to execute an operation progress effect that progresses the effect according to the length of time the button is pressed and held during the effective period. In this case, it is preferable to determine that the long press is continuing at multiple judgment timings during the effective period, and to what stage the effect should be progressed based on the judgment results.

In addition, in this embodiment, the movement of the movable members (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and/or the performance pattern 70 that is temporarily stopped second is not used to perform the reach teasing performance that teases whether or not a reach will occur, but the reach teasing performance may be performed. In this case, in the normal game state, when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special pattern) is performed, the reach teasing performance may be performed, while when the second variable performance (variable display of the second special pattern) is performed, the reach teasing performance may not be performed or may be less likely to be performed (the rate of execution is lower) than the first variable performance. In the specific game state, when the second variable performance (variable display of the second special pattern) is performed, the reach teasing performance may be performed, while when the first variable performance (variable display of the second special pattern) is performed, the reach teasing performance may not be performed or may be less likely to be performed (the rate of execution is lower) than the second variable performance.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on the determination information acquired based on the establishment of a starting condition, and execute a variable performance according to the result of the determination. In such gaming machines, various performances are performed in the variable performance to increase the interest of the game (for example, see JP 2019-033816 A). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the variable performance, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is low.

◆The first invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start port), a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start port), and a state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (a special game state, a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. (Main control board 110), and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes a first variable presentation according to the judgment result of the first judgment means and executes a second variable presentation according to the judgment result of the second judgment means, the presentation control means executes the first variable presentation and the second variable presentation in one of a plurality of variable presentation patterns, and the number of types of the variable presentation patterns executed is greater when the second variable presentation resulting in a failure is executed during the specific game state than when the first variable presentation resulting in a failure is executed during the specific game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆The second invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start hole), a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start hole), and a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the normal game state and a specific game state (a special game state, a time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The game device includes a display control means (display control board 110) that executes a first variable performance according to the judgment result of the first judgment means and executes a second variable performance according to the judgment result of the second judgment means, and the performance control means executes the first variable performance and the second variable performance in one of a plurality of variable performance patterns, and the first variable performance is more likely to be executed in the same variable performance pattern when the first variable performance that results in a loss is executed during the specific game state than when the first variable performance that results in a loss is executed during the normal game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆The third invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising: an operation means (effect button 17, cross key 19) operable by a player; a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start hole); a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start hole); and a normal game state and a specific game state (a special chance game) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The game system includes a state control means (main control board 110) that controls the game state between a game state and a time-saving game state, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes a first variable presentation depending on the judgment result of the first judgment means and executes a second variable presentation depending on the judgment result of the second judgment means, and the presentation control means can change the presentation elements (presentation mode, BGM, volume, light intensity, etc.) used in the variable presentation to one of a plurality of presentation elements depending on the operation of the operation means, and can change the presentation elements used in the second variable presentation while the first variable presentation is being executed in the specific game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆The fourth invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising: an operation means (effect button 17, cross key 19) operable by a player; a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start hole); a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start hole); and a normal game state and a specific game state (a special chance game) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The game system includes a state control means (main control board 110) that controls the game state between a specific game state and a time-saving game state, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes a first variable presentation depending on the judgment result of the first judgment means and executes a second variable presentation depending on the judgment result of the second judgment means, and the presentation control means can change the presentation elements (presentation mode, BGM, volume, light intensity, etc.) used in the variable presentation to one of a plurality of presentation elements depending on the operation of the operation means, and can change the presentation elements used in the first variable presentation during the execution of the second variable presentation in the specific game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆The fifth invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a gaming ball entering a first start port), a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a gaming ball entering a second start port), and a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (a special gaming state, a time-saving gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes a first variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of the presentation pattern according to the judgment result of the first judgment means, and executes a second variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of the presentation pattern according to the judgment result of the second judgment means, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a predetermined presentation (pre-variation action, foresight effect presentation, etc.) in the variable presentation and then displaying the presentation pattern, and the ratio at which the predetermined presentation is executed differs between when the first variable presentation is executed during the normal game state and when the first variable presentation is executed during the specific game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆The sixth invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a gaming ball entering a first start port), a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a gaming ball entering a second start port), and a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (a special gaming state, a time-saving gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes a first variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of the presentation pattern according to the judgment result of the first judgment means, and executes a second variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of the presentation pattern according to the judgment result of the second judgment means, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a predetermined presentation (pre-variation action, foresight effect presentation, etc.) in the variable presentation and then variable displaying the presentation pattern, and the ratio at which the predetermined presentation is executed differs between when the first variable presentation is executed during the specific game state and when the second variable presentation is executed during the specific game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆The seventh invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) operable by a player, a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start port), a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start port), a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (a special game state, a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (a special game state, a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, depending on the judgment result of the first judgment means. and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes a first variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of a presentation pattern, and executes a second variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of a presentation pattern according to the judgment result of the second judgment means, the presentation control means generates a valid period during the execution of the first variable presentation or the second variable presentation, and is capable of executing an operation presentation (a dialogue preview presentation, a pseudo consecutive presentation, a development presentation, a cut-in presentation, a deciding presentation, etc.) that executes a predetermined presentation according to the operation of the operation means during the valid period, and the operation presentation is more difficult to execute when the first variable presentation resulting in a failure is executed during the specific game state than when the first variable presentation resulting in a failure is executed during the normal game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆The invention of No. 8-1 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising: an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) operable by a player; a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start port); a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start port); a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (a special probability game state, a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state; and a first variable effect accompanied by a variable display of an effect pattern according to the judgment result of the first judgment means, and a second judgment means (main control board 110) for controlling the state control means (main control board 110) to a normal game state and a specific game state (a special probability game state, a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing a second variation presentation accompanied by a variation display of a presentation pattern according to the result of the determination of the stage, the presentation control means generating an effective period during the execution of the first variation presentation and capable of executing an operation presentation (such as a dialogue preview presentation, a pseudo consecutive presentation, an advance presentation, a cut-in presentation, and a deciding presentation) for performing a predetermined presentation according to the operation of the operation means during the effective period, the first variation presentation includes a specific variation presentation (reach variation presentation) in which a second presentation (reach post presentation) is executed after the first presentation (reach pre presentation), and the operation presentation is more difficult to execute during the first presentation when the specific variation presentation resulting in a special result is executed during the specific game state than when the specific variation presentation resulting in a special result is executed during the normal game state. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.
The invention No. 8-2 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising: an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) operable by a player; a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (entry of a game ball into a first start hole); a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (entry of a game ball into a second start hole); a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (a special probability game state, a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to a player than the normal game state; and a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling a special game state (a special probability game state, a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to a player than the normal game state, depending on the judgment result of the first judgment means. and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing a first variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of a presentation pattern according to the result of the judgment by the second judgment means, and executing a second variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of a presentation pattern according to the result of the judgment by the second judgment means, the presentation control means generating an effective period during the execution of the first variable presentation, and capable of executing operation presentations (such as a dialogue preview presentation, a pseudo consecutive presentation, a development presentation, a cut-in presentation, and a deciding presentation) for performing a predetermined presentation according to the operation of the operation means during the effective period, and the number of times the operation presentations are executed is likely to be less when the first variable presentation resulting in a special result (jackpot result) is executed during the specific game state than when the first variable presentation resulting in a special result (jackpot result) is executed during the normal game state. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The ninth invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a gaming ball entering a first start port), a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a gaming ball entering a second start port), a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the normal game state and a specific game state (a special probability game state, a time-limited game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a first variable ... which controls the normal game state and a specific game state (a special probability game state, a time-limited game state) which causes a variation in the display of a performance pattern depending on the judgment result of the first judgment means. and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes a presentation and executes a second variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of the presentation pattern according to the judgment result of the second judgment means. The presentation control means generates a valid period during the execution of the first variable presentation or the second variable presentation, and is capable of executing an operation presentation (a dialogue preview presentation, a pseudo consecutive presentation, a development presentation, a cut-in presentation, a deciding presentation, etc.) that executes a predetermined presentation according to the operation of the operation means during the valid period. The operation presentation is more likely to be executed when the second variable presentation that results in a loss during the specific game state is executed than when the first variable presentation that results in a loss during the specific game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆The invention of No. 10-1 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising: an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) operable by a player; a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start port); a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start port); a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (a special game state, a time-limited game state) which is more advantageous to a player than the normal game state; and an effect control means (effect control means) for executing a first variable effect accompanied by a variable display of an effect pattern according to the judgment result of the first judgment means, and executing a second variable effect accompanied by a variable display of an effect pattern according to the judgment result of the second judgment means. and an output control board 130), the presentation control means generates an effective period during the execution of the first variation presentation or the second variation presentation, and is capable of executing an operation presentation (such as a dialogue preview presentation, a pseudo consecutive presentation, an advance presentation, a cut-in presentation, or a deciding presentation) that performs a predetermined presentation according to the operation of the operation means during the effective period, the first variation presentation includes a first specific variation presentation (reach variation presentation) in which a second presentation (reach post presentation) is executed after the first presentation (reach pre presentation), and the second variation presentation includes a second specific variation presentation (reach variation presentation) in which a second presentation (reach post presentation) is executed after the first presentation (reach pre presentation), and the operation presentation is more likely to be executed during the first presentation when the second specific variation presentation resulting in a special result is executed during the specific game state than when the first specific variation presentation resulting in a special result is executed during the specific game state. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.
The invention of No. 10-2 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising: an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) operable by a player; a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (entry of a game ball into a first start hole); a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (entry of a game ball into a second start hole); a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (probability bonus game state, time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to a player than the normal game state; and a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling a specific game state (probability bonus game state, time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to a player than the normal game state, depending on the judgment result of the first judgment means. and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing a first variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of a presentation pattern according to the result of the judgment by the second judgment means, and executing a second variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of a presentation pattern according to the result of the judgment by the second judgment means, the presentation control means generating an effective period during the execution of the first variable presentation or the second variable presentation, and capable of executing operation presentations (such as a dialogue preview presentation, a pseudo consecutive presentation, a development presentation, a cut-in presentation, and a deciding presentation) for performing a predetermined presentation according to the operation of the operation means during the effective period, and the number of times the operation presentations are executed is more likely to be greater when the second variable presentation resulting in a special result is executed during the specific game state than when the first variable presentation resulting in a special result is executed during the specific game state. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The eleventh invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) operable by a player, a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start port), a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start port), a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (a special game state, a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling a state between a normal game state and a specific game state (a special game state, a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the judgment result of the first judgment means. and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes a first variation presentation accompanied by a variation display of the presentation pattern in response to the determination result of the second determination means, and executes a second variation presentation accompanied by a variation display of the presentation pattern in response to the determination result of the second determination means, and the presentation control means is capable of executing vibration presentations (vibration presentations during pre-reading vibration presentations, dialogue preview presentations, step-up preview presentations, pseudo consecutive presentations, development presentations, cut-in presentations, etc.) that vibrate the operation means during the execution of the first variation presentation or the second variation presentation, and the vibration presentation is more difficult to execute when the first variation presentation resulting in a miss is executed during the specific game state than when the first variation presentation resulting in a miss is executed during the normal game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆The invention of No. 12-1 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising: an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) operable by a player; a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (entry of a game ball into a first start port); a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (entry of a game ball into a second start port); a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (a sure-win game state, a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to a player than the normal game state; and a first variable effect accompanied by a variable display of an effect pattern according to the judgment result of the first judgment means, and a second variable effect which controls the second game state according to the judgment result of the first judgment means. and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing a second variation presentation accompanied by a variation display of a presentation pattern according to the judgment result of the judgment means, the presentation control means being capable of executing a vibration presentation (such as a vibration presentation during a look-ahead vibration presentation, a dialogue preview presentation, a step-up preview presentation, or a pseudo consecutive presentation) for vibrating the operation means during the execution of the first variation presentation or the second variation presentation, the first variation presentation includes a first specific variation presentation (reach variation presentation) in which the second presentation (reach post presentation) is executed after the first presentation (reach pre presentation), and the vibration presentation is more difficult to execute during the first presentation when the first specific variation presentation resulting in a special result is executed during the specific game state than when the first specific variation presentation resulting in a special result is executed during the normal game state. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.
Further, the invention of No. 12-2 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising: an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) operable by a player; a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (entry of a game ball into a first start hole); a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (entry of a game ball into a second start hole); a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (probability bonus game state, time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to a player than the normal game state; and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) which executes a first variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of a presentation pattern according to the result of the judgment of the stage, and executes a second variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of a presentation pattern according to the result of the judgment of the second judgment means, the presentation control means being capable of executing vibration presentations (vibration presentations during pre-reading vibration presentations, dialogue preview presentations, step-up preview presentations, pseudo consecutive presentations, etc.) that vibrate the operation means during the execution of the first variable presentation or the second variable presentation, and the number of times that the vibration presentations are executed is likely to be less when the first variable presentation resulting in a special result is executed during the specific game state than when the first variable presentation resulting in a special result is executed during the normal game state. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The thirteenth invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) operable by a player, a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start port), a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start port), a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (a special game state, a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the state between a normal game state and a specific game state (a special game state, a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the judgment result of the first judgment means. and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes a first variation presentation accompanied by a variation display of the presentation pattern in response to the result of the judgment by the second judgment means, and executes a second variation presentation accompanied by a variation display of the presentation pattern in response to the result of the judgment by the second judgment means. The presentation control means is capable of executing a vibration presentation (such as a vibration presentation during a look-ahead vibration presentation, a dialogue preview presentation, a step-up preview presentation, a pseudo consecutive presentation, a development presentation, or a cut-in presentation) that vibrates the operation means during the execution of the first variation presentation or the second variation presentation, and the vibration presentation is more likely to be executed when the second variation presentation resulting in a miss is executed during the specific game state than when the first variation presentation resulting in a miss is executed during the specific game state. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The invention of No. 14-1 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising: an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) operable by a player; a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start port); a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start port); a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (a special probability game state, a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state; and a first variable effect involving a variable display of a performance pattern depending on the judgment result of the first judgment means, and a second variable effect involving a variable display of a performance pattern depending on the judgment result of the second judgment means. and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing the above, the presentation control means being capable of executing vibration presentations (vibration presentations during pre-reading vibration presentations, dialogue preview presentations, SU preview presentations, pseudo consecutive presentations, etc.) for vibrating the operation means during the execution of the first variation presentation or the second variation presentation, the first variation presentation includes a first specific variation presentation (reach variation presentation) in which a second presentation (reach post presentation) is executed after the first presentation (reach pre presentation), the second variation presentation includes a second specific variation presentation (reach variation presentation) in which a second presentation (reach post presentation) is executed after the first presentation (reach pre presentation), and the vibration presentation is more likely to be executed during the first presentation when the second specific variation presentation resulting in a special result is executed during the specific game state than when the first specific variation presentation resulting in a special result is executed during the specific game state. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.
Further, the invention of No. 14-2 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising: an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) operable by a player; a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (entry of a game ball into a first start hole); a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (entry of a game ball into a second start hole); a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (probability bonus game state, time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to a player than the normal game state; and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) which executes a first variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of a presentation pattern according to the judgment result of the judgment means, and executes a second variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of a presentation pattern according to the judgment result of the second judgment means, the presentation control means being capable of executing a vibration presentation (vibration presentation during a look-ahead vibration presentation, during a dialogue preview presentation, during a SU preview presentation, during a pseudo consecutive presentation, etc.) which vibrates the operation means during the execution of the first variable presentation or the second variable presentation, and the number of times the vibration presentation is executed is more likely to be greater when the second variable presentation resulting in a special result is executed during the specific game state than when the first variable presentation resulting in a special result is executed during the specific game state. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The fifteenth invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start port), a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start port), a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (a special probability game state, a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a first variable performance which involves a variable display of a performance pattern depending on the judgment result of the first judgment means. and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes a second variation presentation accompanied by a variation display of the presentation pattern according to the judgment result of the second judgment means. The presentation control means is capable of executing a special game presentation (jackpot game presentation) during the execution of the special game. The first variation presentation in the specific game state and the second variation presentation in the specific game state execute presentations in different modes (presence or absence of reach presentation, presence or absence of the icon, type of background image, type of BGM, etc.), but the special game presentation after the first variation presentation in the specific game state and the special game presentation after the second variation presentation in the specific game state can execute presentations in a common mode. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆The 16th invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start hole), a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start hole), and a state control means for controlling the normal game state and a specific game state (a special game state, a time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The game device includes a control means (main control board 110) for controlling the game and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing a first variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of a presentation pattern according to the judgment result of the first judgment means, and executing a second variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of a presentation pattern according to the judgment result of the second judgment means, the presentation control means being controllable to one of a plurality of presentation modes (presentation modes A to G), and a change in the presentation mode is less likely to occur when the first variable presentation is executed during the specific game state than when the first variable presentation is executed during the normal game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆The 17th invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start hole), a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start hole), and a state control means for controlling the normal game state and a specific game state (a special game state, a time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The game machine includes a control means (main control board 110) for controlling the game and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing a first variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of a presentation pattern according to the judgment result of the first judgment means, and executing a second variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of a presentation pattern according to the judgment result of the second judgment means, the presentation control means being controllable to one of a plurality of presentation modes (presentation modes A to G), and the presentation mode is more likely to change when the second variable presentation is executed during the specific game state than when the first variable presentation is executed during the specific game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆The 18th invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start port), a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start port), a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (a special game state, a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the state between a normal game state and a specific game state (a special game state, a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, in response to the judgment result of the first judgment means. and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes a first variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of the presentation pattern according to the result of the judgment by the second judgment means, and executes a second variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of the presentation pattern according to the result of the judgment by the second judgment means, the presentation control means being capable of executing a stop suggestion presentation (eye-catching presentation, light-emitting effect presentation, etc.) that suggests that the presentation pattern will stop being displayed while the first variable presentation or the second variable presentation is being executed, and the stop suggestion presentation is more difficult to execute when the first variable presentation resulting in a special result is executed during the specific game state than when the first variable presentation resulting in a special result is executed during the normal game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆The 19th invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start port), a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start port), a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (a special game state, a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the state between a normal game state and a specific game state (a special game state, a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, in response to the judgment result of the first judgment means. and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes a first variation presentation accompanied by a variation display of the presentation pattern according to the result of the judgment by the second judgment means, and executes a second variation presentation accompanied by a variation display of the presentation pattern according to the result of the judgment by the second judgment means, the presentation control means being capable of executing a stop suggestion presentation (eye-catching presentation, light-emitting effect presentation, etc.) that suggests that the presentation pattern will stop being displayed while the first variation presentation or the second variation presentation is being executed, and the stop suggestion presentation is more likely to be executed when the second variation presentation resulting in a special result is executed during the specific game state than when the first variation presentation resulting in a special result is executed during the specific game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆The invention of No. 20-1 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start port), a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start port), a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (a special game state, a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing a first variation presentation according to the result of the judgment, and executing a second variation presentation according to the result of the judgment of the second judgment means, the presentation control means being capable of executing a plurality of types of advance notice presentations (such as a dialogue advance notice presentation, a step-up advance notice presentation, a pseudo consecutive presentation, a development presentation, a roulette advance notice presentation, a cut-in presentation, etc.) that indicate the expectation of the special game being executed during the execution of the first variation presentation, and the number of types of advance notice presentations executed is greater when the first variation presentation is executed during the normal game state than when the first variation presentation is executed during the specific game state. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.
The invention of No. 20-2 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising: a first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start hole); a second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start hole); a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (a probability variable game state, a time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to a player than the normal game state; and and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing a first variation presentation according to the judgment result of the first judgment means and executing a second variation presentation according to the judgment result of the second judgment means, the presentation control means being capable of executing a plurality of types of advance notice presentations (such as a dialogue advance notice presentation, a step-up advance notice presentation, a pseudo consecutive presentation, a development presentation, a roulette advance notice presentation, a cut-in presentation, etc.) that indicate the expectation of the special game being executed during the execution of the first variation presentation, and the number of types of advance notice presentations executed is greater when the second variation presentation is executed during the specific game state than when the first variation presentation is executed during the specific game state. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The invention of No. 21-1 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start port), a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start port), a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (a special game state, a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the state between a normal game state and a specific game state (a special game state, a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, depending on the judgment result of the first judgment means. and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) which executes a first variable presentation in response to a judgment result of the second judgment means and executes a second variable presentation in response to a judgment result of the second judgment means, the presentation control means being capable of executing a notice presentation (pre-reach notice presentation, post-reach notice presentation, etc.) which indicates the expectation of the special game being executed during the execution of the first variable presentation, the notice presentation includes a first notice presentation (pre-reach notice presentation) and a second notice presentation (post-reach notice presentation, etc.), and the first notice presentation is more likely to be executed more frequently when the first variable presentation is executed during the normal game state than when the first variable presentation is executed during the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
The invention of No. 21-2 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising: a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (entry of a game ball into a first start hole); a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (entry of a game ball into a second start hole); a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (probability game state, time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to a player than the normal game state; and a first change state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the first change state in accordance with the judgment result of the first judgment means. and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing a dynamic presentation and executing a second variable presentation according to the judgment result of the second judgment means, the presentation control means being capable of executing a notice presentation (pre-reach notice presentation, post-reach notice presentation, etc.) that indicates the expectation that the special game will be executed during the execution of the first variable presentation or the second variable presentation, the notice presentation includes a first notice presentation (pre-reach notice presentation) and a second notice presentation (post-reach notice presentation, etc.), and the first notice presentation is more likely to be executed when the second variable presentation is executed during the specific game state than when the first variable presentation is executed during the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The 22nd invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine comprising: movable members (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, etc.) operable in a predetermined manner; a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start hole); a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start hole); and a normal game state and a specific game state (a special game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The game machine includes a state control means (main control board 110) that controls the game state between a normal game state and a time-saving game state, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes a first variable presentation according to the judgment result of the first judgment means and executes a second variable presentation according to the judgment result of the second judgment means, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a specific presentation (prediction action presentation, pseudo consecutive presentation, development presentation, etc.) involving the operation of the movable member while the first variable presentation is being executed, and the specific presentation is more likely to be executed when the first variable presentation is executed during the normal game state than when the first variable presentation is executed during the specific game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆The 23rd invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine comprising: movable members (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, etc.) operable in a predetermined manner; a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start hole); a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start hole); and a normal game state and a specific game state (a special game state, a time-limited game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The game machine includes a state control means (main control board 110) that controls the game state to the first state (skill state), and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes a first variable presentation according to the judgment result of the first judgment means and executes a second variable presentation according to the judgment result of the second judgment means, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a specific presentation (prediction action presentation, pseudo consecutive presentation, development presentation, etc.) involving the operation of the movable member during the execution of the first variable presentation or the second variable presentation, and the specific presentation is more likely to be executed when the second variable presentation is executed during the specific game state than when the first variable presentation is executed during the specific game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆The 24th invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising a first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the winning of a gaming medium in a first starting area (first starting hole), a second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the winning of a gaming medium in a second starting area (second starting hole), and a state control means for controlling the normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. The game machine includes a stage (main control board 110), and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes a first variable presentation according to the judgment result of the first judgment means and executes a second variable presentation according to the judgment result of the second judgment means, and the presentation control means is capable of outputting a predetermined sound (first to fourth occurrence notification sounds, etc.) from a sound output unit based on the winning of a gaming medium in the first starting area, and the predetermined sound is more likely to be output when a gaming medium wins in the first starting area during the normal gaming state than when a gaming medium wins in the first starting area during the specific gaming state. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆The 25th invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising a first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the winning of a gaming medium in a first start area (first start port), a second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the winning of a gaming medium in a second start area (second start port), and a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the normal game state and a specific game state (high probability game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The game device includes a game control board (110) that executes a first variable presentation according to the judgment result of the first judgment means and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes a first variable presentation according to the judgment result of the second judgment means, and the presentation control means is capable of outputting a predetermined sound (first to fourth generation notification sounds, etc.) from a sound output unit based on the winning of a gaming medium in the first start area or the second start area, and the predetermined sound is more likely to be output when a gaming medium wins in the second start area during the specific game state than when a gaming medium wins in the first start area during the specific game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆The 26th invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising: an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) operable by a player; a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start port); a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start port); a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (a special game state, a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state; The display control means (display control board 130) executes a first variable display accompanied by a variable display of multiple display symbols according to the judgment result of the first judgment means, and executes a second variable display accompanied by a variable display of multiple display symbols according to the judgment result of the second judgment means. The display control means can execute a specific display (pre-reading chance eye display, pseudo consecutive display) that temporarily stops the multiple display symbols in a specific combination (such as a chance eye, a same color, or a result including a pseudo pattern) during the execution of the first variable display, and the specific display is more likely to be executed when the first variable display is executed during the normal game state than when the first variable display is executed during the specific game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆The 27th invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising: an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) operable by a player; a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start hole); a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start hole); a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (a special probability game state, a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state; and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes a first variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of multiple presentation symbols according to the judgment result of the determination means, and executes a second variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of multiple presentation symbols according to the judgment result of the second judgment means. The presentation control means can execute a specific presentation (pre-reading chance eye presentation, pseudo consecutive presentation) that temporarily stops the multiple presentation symbols in a specific combination (such as a chance eye, a same color, or a result including a pseudo pattern) during the execution of the first variable presentation or the second variable presentation, and the specific presentation is more likely to be executed when the second variable presentation is executed during the specific game state than when the first variable presentation is executed during the specific game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆The 28th invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start port), a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start port), a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the normal game state and a specific game state (a special probability game state, a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes a first variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of the presentation pattern according to the judgment result of the determination means, and executes a second variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of the presentation pattern according to the judgment result of the second judgment means, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a specific presentation (preview effect presentation, pseudo consecutive presentation, etc.) that displays a predetermined image (effect image) corresponding to the presentation pattern during the execution of the first variable presentation, and it is easier to execute the specific presentation when the first variable presentation is executed during the normal game state than when the first variable presentation is executed during the specific game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆The 29th invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start port), a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start port), a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the normal game state and a specific game state (a special probability game state, a time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes a first variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of the presentation pattern according to the result of the determination by the second determination means, and executes a second variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of the presentation pattern according to the result of the determination by the second determination means, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a specific presentation (preview effect presentation, pseudo consecutive presentation, etc.) that displays a predetermined image (effect image) corresponding to the presentation pattern during the execution of the first variable presentation or the second variable presentation, and it is easier to execute the specific presentation when the second variable presentation is executed during the specific game state than when the first variable presentation is executed during the specific game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆The 30th invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine comprising: movable members (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, etc.) operable in a predetermined manner; a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start hole); a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start hole); and a normal game state and a specific game state (a special game state, a time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The game machine includes a state control means (main control board 110) that controls the game machine to switch between the first and second states, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes a first variable presentation according to the judgment result of the first judgment means and executes a second variable presentation according to the judgment result of the second judgment means, and the presentation control means is capable of executing an action presentation (prediction action presentation, pseudo consecutive presentation, development presentation deciding presentation, etc.) of the movable member during the execution of the first variable presentation, and the action presentation is more difficult to execute when the first variable presentation that results in a failure is executed during the specific game state than when the first variable presentation that results in a failure is executed during the normal game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆The invention of No. 31-1 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine comprising: movable members (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, etc.) operable in a predetermined manner; a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start hole); a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start hole); a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (a special probability game state, a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to a player than the normal game state; and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing a first variation presentation according to the determination result of the determination means and for executing a second variation presentation according to the determination result of the second determination means, the presentation control means being capable of executing an action presentation (pre-reading action presentation, pseudo consecutive presentation, etc.) of the movable member during the execution of the first variation presentation, the first variation presentation including a specific variation presentation (reach variation presentation) in which a second presentation (reach post presentation) is executed after the first presentation (reach pre presentation), and the action presentation is more difficult to execute during the first presentation when the specific variation presentation resulting in a special result is executed during the specific game state than when the specific variation presentation resulting in a special result is executed during the normal game state. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.
The invention of No. 31-2 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine comprising: movable members (a first movable member 73, a second movable member 74, etc.) operable in a predetermined manner; a first determination means (a main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start hole); a second determination means (a main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start hole); a normal game state; and a specific game state (a probability game state, a time-limited game state) that is more advantageous to a player than the normal game state. The game machine includes a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the movable member to have a first variable performance in response to the determination result of the first determination means and a second variable performance in response to the determination result of the second determination means, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a first variable performance in response to the determination result of the second determination means, and the performance control means is capable of executing an action performance (prediction action performance, pseudo consecutive performance, development performance, etc.) of the movable member while executing the first variable performance, and the number of times the action performance is executed is likely to be less when the first variable performance resulting in a special result is executed during the specific game state than when the first variable performance resulting in a special result is executed during the normal game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆The 32nd invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising movable members (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, etc.) operable in a predetermined manner, a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start hole), a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start hole), and a control circuit for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (a special game state, a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The game system includes a state control means (main control board 110) for executing a first variation performance according to the judgment result of the first judgment means, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a second variation performance according to the judgment result of the second judgment means, and the performance control means is capable of executing the action performance of the movable member (prediction action performance, pseudo consecutive performance, development performance, deciding performance, etc.) during the execution of the first variation performance or the second variation performance, and the action performance is more likely to be executed when the second variation performance, which results in a failure, is executed during the specific game state than when the first variation performance, which results in a failure, is executed during the specific game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆The invention of No. 33-1 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine comprising: movable members (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, etc.) operable in a predetermined manner; a first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start port); a second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start port); a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (a special game state, a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state; and a first variable presentation depending on the determination result of the first determination means, and a second variable presentation depending on the determination result of the second determination means. and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing the above, the presentation control means being capable of executing the action presentation (pre-reading action presentation, pseudo consecutive presentation, development presentation, deciding presentation, etc.) of the movable member during the execution of the first variation presentation or the second variation presentation, the first variation presentation includes a first specific variation presentation (reach variation presentation) in which a second presentation (reach post presentation) is executed after the first presentation (reach pre presentation), the second variation presentation includes a second specific variation presentation (reach variation presentation) in which a second presentation (reach post presentation) is executed after the first presentation (reach pre presentation), and the action presentation is more likely to be executed during the first presentation when the second specific variation presentation resulting in a special result is executed during the specific game state than when the first specific variation presentation resulting in a special result is executed during the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
The invention of No. 33-2 for solving the above problem provides a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine comprising: movable members (a first movable member 73, a second movable member 74, etc.) operable in a predetermined manner; a first determination means (a main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start hole); a second determination means (a main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start hole); and a control means for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (a probability variable game state, a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to a player than the normal game state. The game device includes a state control means (main control board 110) for executing a first variation performance according to the judgment result of the first judgment means, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a first variation performance according to the judgment result of the second judgment means, and the performance control means is capable of executing an action performance (prediction action performance, pseudo consecutive performance, development performance, deciding performance, etc.) of the movable member during the execution of the first variation performance or the second variation performance, and the number of times the action performance is executed is more likely to be greater when the second variation performance resulting in a special result is executed during the specific game state than when the first variation performance resulting in a special result is executed during the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The 34th invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising: an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) operable by a player; a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start port); a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start port); a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (a special probability game state, a time-limited game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state; and a third judgment means (main control board 110) for controlling a special game state (a special probability game state, a time-limited game state) which involves a variable display of an effect pattern depending on the judgment result of the first judgment means. and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes a first variation presentation and executes a second variation presentation accompanied by a variation display of the presentation pattern according to the judgment result of the second judgment means, the presentation control means generates an effective period during the execution of the first variation presentation, and is capable of executing an operation presentation (such as a dialogue preview presentation, a pseudo consecutive presentation, a development presentation, a cut-in presentation, and a deciding presentation) that executes a predetermined presentation according to the operation of the operation means during the effective period, the first variation presentation includes a specific variation presentation (reach variation presentation) in which the second presentation (reach post presentation) is executed after the first presentation (reach pre presentation), and when the specific variation presentation is executed during the specific game state, the operation presentation is easier to execute during the second presentation than during the first presentation. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The 35th invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising: an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) operable by a player; a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start port); a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start port); a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (a special probability game state, a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state; and a variable display of a performance pattern according to the judgment result of the first judgment means. and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes a first variation presentation accompanied by a variation display of the presentation pattern according to the judgment result of the second judgment means, and executes a second variation presentation accompanied by a variation display of the presentation pattern according to the judgment result of the second judgment means, and the presentation control means is capable of executing vibration presentations (vibration presentations during pre-reading vibration presentations, dialogue preview presentations, step-up preview presentations, pseudo consecutive presentations, development presentations, cut-in presentations, etc.) that vibrate the operation means during the execution of the first variation presentation, and the first variation presentation includes a specific variation presentation (reach variation presentation) in which the second presentation (reach post presentation) is executed after the first presentation (reach pre presentation), and when the specific variation presentation is executed during the specific game state, the vibration presentation is more likely to be executed during the second presentation than during the first presentation. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆The 36th invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising movable members (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, etc.) operable in a predetermined manner, a first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start hole), a second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start hole), and a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the normal game state and a specific game state (a special game state, a time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The game device includes a display control means (display control board 130) that executes a first variation performance according to the judgment result of the first judgment means and executes a second variation performance according to the judgment result of the second judgment means, and the performance control means is capable of executing the action performance of the movable member (prediction action performance, pseudo consecutive performance, development performance, deciding performance, etc.) during the execution of the first variation performance, and the first variation performance includes a specific variation performance (reach variation performance) in which the second performance (reach post performance) is executed after the first performance (reach pre performance), and when the specific variation performance is executed during the specific game state, the action performance is easier to execute during the second performance than during the first performance. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆The 37th invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start port), a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start port), a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (a special probability game state, a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a control means for controlling the state of the normal game state based on the judgment result of the first judgment means. and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes a first variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of a presentation pattern according to the result of the play, and executes a second variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of a presentation pattern according to the result of the judgment by the second judgment means, the presentation control means displays a plurality of options during the execution of the first variable presentation, and is capable of executing a selection presentation (roulette presentation) in which an option corresponding to the presentation to be executed thereafter is selected, and the selection presentation is more difficult to execute when the first variable presentation resulting in a losing result is executed during the specific game state than when the first variable presentation resulting in a losing result is executed during the normal game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆The 38th invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start port), a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start port), a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (a special game state, a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a judgment of the first judgment means. and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes a first variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of the presentation pattern according to the result, and executes a second variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of the presentation pattern according to the judgment result of the second judgment means, the presentation control means displays a plurality of options during the execution of the first variable presentation, and is capable of executing a selection presentation (roulette presentation) in which an option corresponding to the presentation to be executed thereafter is selected, and the selection presentation is more difficult to execute when the first variable presentation resulting in a special result is executed during the specific game state than when the first variable presentation resulting in a special result is executed during the normal game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆The 39th invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start port), a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start port), a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (a special game state, a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a result of the judgment of the first judgment means. and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes a first variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of a presentation pattern according to the result of a play, and executes a second variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of a presentation pattern according to the result of the judgment by the second judgment means, the presentation control means being capable of executing an update presentation (timer presentation, count-up presentation, etc.) that updates the predetermined information (number, quantity) displayed on the display means during the execution of the first variable presentation, and the update presentation is more difficult to execute when the first variable presentation resulting in a losing result is executed during the specific game state than when the first variable presentation resulting in a losing result is executed during the normal game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆The 40th invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising a first judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start port), a second judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start port), a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (a special game state, a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a judgment of the first judgment means. and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes a first variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of the presentation pattern according to the result, and executes a second variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of the presentation pattern according to the judgment result of the second judgment means, the presentation control means being capable of executing an update presentation (timer presentation, count-up presentation, etc.) that updates the predetermined information (number, quantity) displayed on the display means while the first variable presentation is being executed, and the update presentation is more difficult to execute when the first variable presentation resulting in a special result is executed during the specific game state than when the first variable presentation resulting in a special result is executed during the normal game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is not limited to being used as a pachinko gaming machine, but can also be used as a reel-type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used as a jan-ball gaming machine or an arrange-ball gaming machine.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment transitions to a low probability gaming state after the end of a jackpot game if the type of the special jackpot pattern is a normal pattern, and transitions to a high probability gaming state that continues until the next jackpot game after the end of a jackpot game if the type of the special jackpot pattern is a specific pattern, but the gaming machine may transition to a high probability gaming state for a predetermined number of times after the end of all jackpot games.

Also, the gaming machine may transition to a high probability gaming state after all jackpot games have ended, and if a player wins a drop lottery that is executed at the start of the variable display of special symbols in the high probability gaming state, the gaming machine may end the high probability gaming state and return to the normal gaming state.

In addition, the gaming machine may be configured such that, when the gaming ball passes through a specific area during a specific round of jackpot play, the gaming machine transitions to a high probability play state for a predetermined number of times after the jackpot play ends.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol are not executed simultaneously (in parallel), and the display of the second special symbol is executed with priority, but the gaming machine may be configured so that the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (in parallel).

Furthermore, the embodiments disclosed herein should be considered to be illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include the meaning equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

1 Gaming machine 5 Gaming board 44 Regular gate 45 First start gate 47 Second start gate 50 Big prize gate 70 First image display device 71 Second image display device 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
120 Payout control board 130 Performance control board 130a Sub-CPU

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player,
An operation means operable by a player;
a first acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition;
A second acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition;
A determination means for determining the determination information;
a pre-determination means for pre-determining the determination information before the determination means;
A state control means capable of controlling the game state to a specific game state which is more advantageous to a player than a predetermined game state;
A performance control means for executing a game performance according to a determination result of the determination means,
The operation means includes:
A first operating means and a second operating means different from the first operating means,
The performance control means includes:
A vibration effect that vibrates the first operating means during execution of the game effect and a suggestion effect that suggests execution of the special game can be executed;
When the vibration effect is executed during the operation of the second operating means, vibrations related to the vibration effect are transmitted to the player via the second operating means,
The vibration effect is
A first vibration effect is executed at a predetermined timing; and
A second vibration effect is executed at a timing different from that of the first vibration effect,
The first vibration effect can be executed according to a result of the advance determination,
The second vibration effect can be executed according to a result of the determination,
In the game presentation, the first vibration presentation and the second vibration presentation can be executed so that their presentation periods do not overlap,
When the game presentation corresponding to the determination result of the determination information acquired based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition is executed in the predetermined game state, the first vibration presentation and the second vibration presentation can be executed;
When the game presentation corresponding to the determination result of the determination information acquired based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition is executed in the specific game state, execution of the first vibration presentation is restricted, but the second vibration presentation is executable;
The ease of executing the first vibration effect is different between the predetermined game state and the specific game state,
The length of the vibration period in the first vibration performance and the length of the vibration period in the second vibration performance can be made different,
The second vibration effect is
A gaming machine characterized in that the instruction is not executed during the game presentation in which the special game is not executed, and is executable when the suggestion presentation is executed during the game presentation in which the special game is executed .

Images